Proiectare Structuri de Beton Rom

Manual
Proiectare structuri de beton
Table of Contents
Adjusting the parameters for design .................................................................................... 1 Setup dialogue ........................................................................................................................ 1 Parameters to a particular code ............................................................................................ 3 Automatic member reinforcement design ............................................................................ 3 EC ENV ..................................................................................................................................... 5 Design defaults .................................................................................................................... 5 Calculation parameters ........................................................................................................ 7 CDD/PGNL parameters ..................................................................................................... 11 Interaction diagram ............................................................................................................ 12 Ultimate limit state .............................................................................................................. 13 Ultimate limit state - Shear ................................................................................................. 14 Ultimate limit state - Punching shear ................................................................................. 16 Ultimate limit state - Foundation block ............................................................................... 18 Detailing provisions ............................................................................................................ 20 Serviceability limit state ...................................................................................................... 22 Serviceability limit state - Crack proof ................................................................................ 22 Design and drawing ........................................................................................................... 24 Hooks ................................................................................................................................. 24 Warning and errors ............................................................................................................ 24 EC EN 1992-1-1 ...................................................................................................................... 25 Design defaults .................................................................................................................. 25 General .............................................................................................................................. 27 Calculation parameters ...................................................................................................... 27 Ultimate limit state .............................................................................................................. 32 Interaction diagram ............................................................................................................ 32 Ultimate limit state - Shear ................................................................................................. 33 Ultimate Limit State - Fire resistance ................................................................................. 35 Ultimate limit state - Punching shear ................................................................................. 37 Serviceability limit state ...................................................................................................... 38 Serviceability limit state - Creep......................................................................................... 38 Serviceability limit state - Crack proof ................................................................................ 39 CDD parameters ................................................................................................................ 40 Detailing provisions ............................................................................................................ 40 Detailing provisions - Fire resistance ................................................................................. 41 Design and drawing ........................................................................................................... 43 Hooks ................................................................................................................................. 45 Warning and errors ............................................................................................................ 46 CSN 73 1201 ........................................................................................................................... 46 Design defaults .................................................................................................................. 46 Calculation parameters ...................................................................................................... 46 CDD/PGNL parameters ..................................................................................................... 51 Interaction diagram ............................................................................................................ 52 Ultimate limit state .............................................................................................................. 52 Gamma b ........................................................................................................................... 53 Gamma s............................................................................................................................ 54 Ultimate limit state - Punching shear ................................................................................. 54 Serviceability limit state ...................................................................................................... 55
iii
Proiectare structuri de beton Serviceability limit state - Crack proof ................................................................................ 56 Design and drawing ........................................................................................................... 56 Hooks ................................................................................................................................. 56 Detailing provisions ............................................................................................................ 56 DIN 1045, 1045-1 .................................................................................................................... 57 Design defaults .................................................................................................................. 57 Calculation parameters ...................................................................................................... 59 CDD/PGNL parameters ..................................................................................................... 63 Interaction diagram ............................................................................................................ 63 Ultimate limit state .............................................................................................................. 65 Ultimate limit state - Shear ................................................................................................. 66 Ultimate limit state - Punching shear ................................................................................. 67 Detailing provisions ............................................................................................................ 69 Serviceability limit state ...................................................................................................... 72 Serviceability limit state - Crack proof ................................................................................ 72 Design and drawing ........................................................................................................... 73 Hooks ................................................................................................................................. 73 Warning and errors ............................................................................................................ 73 NEN 6720 ................................................................................................................................ 73 Design defaults .................................................................................................................. 73 Calculation parameters ...................................................................................................... 75 CDD / PGNL calculation .................................................................................................... 80 Interaction diagram ............................................................................................................ 80 Ultimate limit state .............................................................................................................. 82 Ultimate limit state - Punching shear ................................................................................. 82 Serviceability limit state ...................................................................................................... 83 Serviceability limit state - Crack proof ................................................................................ 83 Design and drawing ........................................................................................................... 84 Hooks ................................................................................................................................. 84 Detailing provisions ............................................................................................................ 84 NORM B4700 ....................................................................................................................... 86 Design defaults .................................................................................................................. 86 Calculation parameters ...................................................................................................... 88 CDD/PGNL parameters ..................................................................................................... 92 Interaction diagram ............................................................................................................ 92 Ultimate limit state .............................................................................................................. 94 Ultimate limit state - Shear ................................................................................................. 94 Ultimate limit state - Punching shear ................................................................................. 96 Detailing provisions ............................................................................................................ 97 Serviceability limit state ...................................................................................................... 99 Serviceability limit state - Crack proof .............................................................................. 100 Design and drawing ......................................................................................................... 100 Hooks ............................................................................................................................... 102 Warning and errors .......................................................................................................... 103 SIA 263 ................................................................................................................................. 103 Design defaults ................................................................................................................ 103 Calculation parameters .................................................................................................... 105 CDD/PGNL parameters ................................................................................................... 109 Interaction diagram .......................................................................................................... 109
iv
Table of Contents Ultimate limit state ............................................................................................................ 111 Ultimate limit state - Punching ......................................................................................... 112 Ultimate limit state - Shear ............................................................................................... 114 Detailing provisions .......................................................................................................... 115 Serviceability limit state .................................................................................................... 118 Serviceability limit state - Crack proof .............................................................................. 118 REDES ............................................................................................................................. 119 Hooks ............................................................................................................................... 119 Warning and errors .......................................................................................................... 119 BAEL..................................................................................................................................... 120 Design defaults ................................................................................................................ 120 Calculation parameters .................................................................................................... 122 Interaction diagram .......................................................................................................... 125 Ultimate limit state ............................................................................................................ 127 Ultimate limit state - Punching ......................................................................................... 128 Serviceability limit state .................................................................................................... 128 Serviceability limit state - Crack proof .............................................................................. 128 Detailing provisions .......................................................................................................... 129 REDES ............................................................................................................................. 131 Hooks ............................................................................................................................... 131 Warning and errors .......................................................................................................... 131 BS 8110 ................................................................................................................................ 131 Design defaults ................................................................................................................ 131 Calculation parameters .................................................................................................... 133 Ultimate limit state ............................................................................................................ 138 Ultimate limit state - Shear ............................................................................................... 138 Ultimate limit state - Punching shear ............................................................................... 139 Serviceability limit state .................................................................................................... 140 Percentages for beams and columns .............................................................................. 140 Percentages for 2D structures ......................................................................................... 142 Detailing provisions .......................................................................................................... 142 Design and drawing ......................................................................................................... 143 Hooks ............................................................................................................................... 143 Warning and errors .......................................................................................................... 144 ACI 318 ................................................................................................................................. 144 Code setup for ACI 318 ................................................................................................... 144 General ............................................................................................................................ 145 Design defaults ................................................................................................................ 145 Calculation ....................................................................................................................... 148 Interaction diagram .......................................................................................................... 152 Design strength ................................................................................................................ 153 Shear ................................................................................................................................ 154 Detailing provisions .......................................................................................................... 155 Warning and errors .......................................................................................................... 155 Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 157 Adjusting the member data ................................................................................................ 157 Copying the member related data ..................................................................................... 158 1D elements ......................................................................................................................... 158 Basic mode for member data adjustment on 1D elements .............................................. 158
Proiectare structuri de beton Advanced mode for member data adjustment on 1D elements ...................................... 160 2D elements ......................................................................................................................... 163 Basic mode for member data adjustment on 2D elements .............................................. 163 Advanced mode for member data adjustment on 2D elements ...................................... 164 Calculated internal forces .................................................................................................. 169 Displaying the calculated internal forces ......................................................................... 170 Displaying the slenderness parameters ........................................................................... 171 Calculation of required reinforcement .............................................................................. 173 Introduction to design of reinforcement ........................................................................... 173 1D elements ..................................................................................................................... 173 2D elements ..................................................................................................................... 182 REDES - input of practical reinforcement ........................................................................ 195 Input of practical reinforcement........................................................................................ 195 Reinforcement template ................................................................................................... 196 Input and modification of reinforcement ........................................................................... 211 Anchorage detailing ......................................................................................................... 243 Automatic design of reinforcement .................................................................................. 246 Bill of material ..................................................................................................................... 248 Displaying the bill of material ........................................................................................... 248 1D elements ......................................................................................................................... 249 Checking to interaction diagram ...................................................................................... 249 Checking to interaction diagram - single check ............................................................... 251 Performing the checking to interaction diagram .............................................................. 255 Checking of limit strain ..................................................................................................... 255 Checking of limit strain - single check .............................................................................. 256 Performing the checking to limit deformations ................................................................. 261 Checking the cracks ......................................................................................................... 261 Performing the checking of crack..................................................................................... 262 Overall check ................................................................................................................... 262 Detailing provisions .......................................................................................................... 265 Deflections according to codes ......................................................................................... 266 Prerequisites for calculation of deflections according to a standard................................ 266 Load case combination for calculation of deflections according to a standard ............... 266 Performing the calculation of deflections according to a standard .................................. 267 Deflections according to a standard................................................................................. 267 Performing the check of deflections according to a standard .......................................... 271 Stiffness in calculation of code dependent deformations ................................................ 271 Prestressed concrete.......................................................................................................... 273 Checks of prestressed concrete ...................................................................................... 273 Crack control .................................................................................................................... 274 Performing crack control .................................................................................................. 274 Checking of limit strain ..................................................................................................... 275 Detailed checking of limit strain ....................................................................................... 277 Performing the checking of limit strain ............................................................................. 283 Checking to interaction diagram ...................................................................................... 284 Detailed checking to interaction diagram ......................................................................... 284 Performing the checking to interaction diagram .............................................................. 284 Allowable stress in concrete ............................................................................................ 285 Detailed check of allowable stress in concrete ................................................................ 285 Performing the check of allowable stress in concrete...................................................... 285
vi
Table of Contents Check of prestressing reinforcement ............................................................................... 286 Performing the check of prestressing reinforcement ....................................................... 287 Allowable principal stresses ............................................................................................. 287 Performing the check of allowable principal stresses ...................................................... 287 Detailed check of allowable principal stresses ................................................................ 288 Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 291 Punching shear data ........................................................................................................... 291 Punching shear data for CSN/STN .................................................................................... 294 Assigning the punching shear data to the node.............................................................. 297 Performing the punching shear check ............................................................................. 297 Detailed punching shear check ......................................................................................... 298 Comparison of PNL and PGNL calculation ...................................................................... 305 Material properties for physically non-linear calculation ............................................... 306 Beam related parameters for physically non-linear calculations .................................. 307 Reinforcement in the physically non-linear calculation ................................................. 309 The procedure for the Physically non-linear calculation ................................................ 310 Types of load case combinations ..................................................................................... 311 Assessment of results ........................................................................................................ 311 Separate check of a section/beam .................................................................................... 315 Literature .............................................................................................................................. 317 Types of fire resistance calculation .................................................................................. 319 Setup dialogue for fire resistance calculations ............................................................... 320 Fire resistance related member data ................................................................................ 321 Material properties of concrete with reference to fire resistance .................................. 322 Material properties of reinforcement with reference to fire resistance ......................... 323 Material properties of prestressing reinforcement with reference to fire resistance .. 323 Results for the check of detailing provisions .................................................................. 324 Load case combinations for fire resistance calculations ............................................... 325 Results for advanced method ............................................................................................ 326 Results for simplified method............................................................................................ 327 Quantities, parameters and warnings related to fire resistance .................................... 328
vii
General parameters Adjusting the parameters for design

The user must review and adequately adjust a set of design and calculation parameters prior to performing a successful and accurate design and checking of a concrete member All the parameters that may be adjusted are integrated into one multi-tab modal dialogue. This ensures that any of the parameters can be easily viewed, checked, modified, and/or compared with other settings. The procedure for modifying parameters 1. Call tree menu function Concrete > Setup. 2. The Setup dialogue opens on the screen. 3. Use the left-hand side tree to select required parameter set. 4. Input desired values in the right hand side part of the dialogue. 5. Confirm the settings with [OK].
Setup dialogue
Despite any possible differences in individual items due to specific regulations of different national standards, the Setup dialogue has got the same layout for all implemented national standards. Setup Dialogue In general, the Setup Dialogue consists of four parts (see the picture below): filter window (A), tree window (B), property window (C), explanation window (D).
Filter Window (A) This window contains a list of filters that can be used to reduce the number of parameters displayed in other parts of the dialogue. Note: This window may be hidden for some configurations of the dialogue. Tree Window (B) This window contains a list of parameter groups arranged in a tree structure. Clicking on a branch in the tree expanses the corresponding part of the property Window (with other branches automatically collapsed). Property Window (C) This window lists all the parameters that are available for the current configuration of the dialogue. The parameters are sorted in groups (branches). You may expand or collapse the required groups. Explanation Window (D) Once an item is selected in the Property Window, an explanation is displayed in this window. If possible, the explanation is accompanied with an illustrative picture. See chapter Adjusting the parameters for design for "how to open" the dialogue.
Note: Individual items in the Setup dialogue are printed in either black or blue colour. Items in black are valid for the whole project. Items in blue colour are default values for individual beams. These values, however, can be separately modified on individual beams. The modification of "blue values" can be done via function Concrete > Member data 1D. Note: The items displayed in the dialogue may vary according to (i) the project settings and (ii) the place from which the dialogue has been invoked. The dialogue takes account of the "caller" and may hide some items that are not relevant to the current operation.
General parameters
Parameters to a particular code

The dialogue for the adjustment of design and calculation parameters may look different for various national technical standards. The description of individual code-related dialogue tabs is therefore made separately for individual standards. Setup for EC2 Setup for SN 73 1201 Setup for STN 73 1201 Setup for DIN 1045, 1045-1 Setup for NEN 6720 Setup for NORM B4700 Setup for SIA 263 Setup for BAEL Setup for BS 8110 (Eurocode) (Czech standard) (Slovak standard) see the Czech standard (German standard) (Dutch standard) (Austrian standard) (Swiss standard) (French standard) (British standard)
Note 1: Settings whose description text is in blue can be defined per member. The value input in the Setup for concrete dialogue is the default value used for every new member. Note 2: The particular national standard can be selected in the Project Setup dialogue or via the "flag" button at the right end of programs Status bar (e.g. ).
Automatic member reinforcement design

This part of Setup dialogue is code-independent. It means that it looks the same for each national standard. General Maximal exploitation of cross-section Specifies the maximal utilisation of the crosssection in the automatically reinforced beam. The value may be between 1 and 100%. Longitudinal reinforcement Minimal length of bars Defines the minimal length of bars automatically inserted into the reinforced beam. The algorithm tries to shorten the reinforcement bars if possible so that they do
not extent along the whole length of the beam. The shortened bar cannot be shorter than the value of this parameter. Check min. number of longitudinal bars above supports Minimum number of longitudinal bars above supports Try to reduce length of bars If ON, the number of reinforcement bars above supports is checked and compared to the values specified below. Defines the minimal required amount of reinforcement bars above supports. If OFF, the program uses only bars that extent along the whole length of the beam. If ON, some bars may be shortened if the unity check is satisfied without them. Minimal number of bars in reinforcement layer Imagine a simply supported beam. There must be 6 bars in the middle of the span. Only 5 bars are required in a section that is closer to the support. And only 4 bars are necessary in another section that is still closer to the support. And so on. So in general, you could shorten the bars one by one. This may be sometimes impractical as it would lead to a large number of different bars. The value in this parameter defines the minimal number of bars that may be shortened at the same time. The default value is 2. It means that, in our example, you would have 6 bars in the middle, there still will be 6 bars in the section where 5 is sufficient, and only farther towards the support the number will be reduced to 4 bars. And so on. Maximal number of bigger diameters than the default Defines how many different (bigger) diameters of the reinforcement can be used for the optimisation. Let us assume that the default diameter specified in the Design default tab is 10mm. If this parameter is set to 2, the program can use diameters 10, 12 (i.e. +1 item in the manufacturing programme) and 14 (i.e. +2 item in the manufacturing programme) for the design. Do not use "Neighbouring" bars Some standards recommend that "neighbouring" profiles from the manufacturing programme should not be used in one beam (in order to avoid unintentional interchange of the profiles). Let us assume that the default diameter specified in the Design default tab is 10mm. Further assume that Maximal number of
General parameters
bigger diameters than the default is set to 2. If this option is ON, the following bars can be inserted into the beam: (i) either 10mm, (ii) or 12mm, (iii) or 14mm, (iv) or 10mm and 14mm can be combined together. 10mm and 12mm are not permitted to be combined in one beam.
Stirrups Minimal centre-tocentre distance for stirrups Minimum reduction length Specifies the minimal distance between stirrups measured from the centre of a bar to the centre of an adjacent bar. Defines the minimum reduction length. It may be defined by means of length or number of stirrups in the part. See the next two parameters. Defines the length of one part of the beam where stirrups are distributed uniformly. This parameter ensures than a situation the distance between two adjacent stirrups is different for every two adjacent stirrups. Analogous to the parameter above.
Minimal length of one stirrup part
Minimal number of stirrups in one stirrup part Step for reduction
Defines the step for the reduction of the distance between two adjacent stirrups. This insures that the distance between stirrups is always a "rounded" number e.g. 200mm, then 250mm, then 300mm, etc. (and not e.g. 200, 246mm, 298mm, etc.). This parameter may enforce that the stirrup part are symmetrical along the length of the beam.
Symmetrical part of stirrups
EC ENV
Design defaults
These parameters are used for the design of minimum required reinforcement if no member data have yet been defined on particular members. General Concrete cover Use min concrete cover User defined concrete cover The minimal values of cover based on detailing rules specified in the code are used. The user may input the thickness of cover layer.
Proiectare structuri de beton Concrete cover advanced settings Environmental class Tolerance increase delta tb Specifies the environmental class. The required cover may be affected by specific exposure and other conditions. One of the following options may be selected: Beams Default reinforcement Upper cover Upper Stirrup Lower Lower cover Defines thickness of concrete cover at the upper surface. Specifies diameter and type of reinforcement at the upper surface. Specifies diameter and type of reinforcement for stirrups (links). Specifies diameter and type of reinforcement at the lower surface. Defines thickness of concrete cover at the lower surface. prefabricated elements constructions made of cast concrete concrete foundation foundation ground temperature > 75 floating blocks of ice
Note: Items Upper cover and Lower cover are accessible only if User-defined concrete cover has been selected. Columns Default reinforcement Concrete cover Main Stirrup Defines the thickness of concrete cover. Specifies diameter and type of main reinforcement. Specifies diameter and type of reinforcement for stirrups (links).
Note: Item Concrete cover is accessible only if User-defined concrete cover has been selected. 2D structures and slabs Default reinforcement Upper cover Reinforcement Upper Defines thickness of concrete cover at the upper surface. Specifies the type of reinforcement. Specifies diameter of reinforcement for the upper surface.
General parameters
Lower Lower cover
Specifies diameter of reinforcement for the lower surface. Defines thickness of concrete cover at the lower surface.
Note: Items Upper cover and Lower cover are accessible only if User-defined concrete cover has been selected.
Calculation parameters
Calculation parameters are divided into several groups: general parameters (see below), parameters for columns (see below), parameters for beams (see below), parameters for CDD/PGNL calculation (see separate chapter), parameters for interaction diagram (see separate chapter). General parameters Number of iteration steps Precision of iteration Limit value for checks Defines the maximum numbers of steps, used to find the state of equilibrium in a section. Defines the numerical precision in percentages. This value is used in all checks for final assessment whether the member satisfies or does not satisfies the prescribed conditions. Normally, this value will be one (1), but it can be even lower or greater than 1. For stiffness and crack-proof calculation use reinforcement As,tot or 0 (As, tot for As,req > 0 and 0 for As,req = 0) The total area of reinforcement is used for the calculation on condition that the design function has been already run and that the program has already calculated the required area of reinforcement. Otherwise, zero value is used (even if the user has manually inserted some reinforcement bars). The total area of reinforcement is the sum of the user-defined reinforcement (through basic reinforcement, through reinforcement zones/regions or through free bars) and calculated additional required reinforcement. The additional required reinforcement may be zero, if the user has already inputted enough user-defined reinforcement. IMPORTANT: Keep in mind, that the function calculating the required areas of reinforcement MUST HAVE BEEN run before. Otherwise, the user-defined reinforcement is ignored and ZERO value is used. As, user The user-defined reinforcement is used for
the calculation. The term user-defined reinforcement covers the basic reinforcement specified in member data, reinforcement bars inputted through reinforcement templates in reinforcement zones (1D members) or regions (2D members), and free bars of reinforcement. In order: [ As, user ]; [ As,tot or 0] If there is any user-defined reinforcement, it is used, otherwise, the total reinforcement is used (which in fact means the calculated required area of reinforcement). Remember, that for the second option, the design function must have been already run. In order: [ As,tot or 0]; [ As, user] If the design of reinforcement has been already performed and the required area of reinforcement has been already calculated, it is used. Otherwise, the user-defined reinforcement is used. Check percentage of longitudinal reinforcement Check percentage of shear reinforcement If this option is ON, the calculation procedure takes account of the defined reinforcement percentage for longitudinal reinforcement. If this option is ON, the calculation procedure takes account of the defined shear reinforcement number of legs, link diameter, spacing of the links, and minimal percentage of reinforcement. The checks are performed only in selected sections. This option can dramatically speed up the program. The area of reinforcement is subtracted from the area of the cross-section as if ducts were installed. If ON, the already inserted longitudinal reinforcement is taken into account during the calculation. If ON, the torsion check is performed.
Check selected sections only Concrete area weakened by reinforcement bars Take into account longitudinal practical reinforcement for design calculation Check torsion Parameters for columns Advanced settings
This parameter can simplify the input for those users who calculate simple problems and need to adjust just a few basic parameters. If ON, all the items in the column setup part are available. If OFF, only the basic parameters are available. The less-common parameters are
General parameters
disabled. Corner design only The following cross-sections are supported: rectangular, L-section, T-section, I-section. The bars are designed only in corners of the cross-section. The calculation is iterative and diameter or area of reinforcement in corner is increased until the check is satisfied. Determine governing cross-section beforehand The user may determine that the design of reinforcement is carried out in the foot and head of the column. Otherwise, the calculation is carried out in all intermediate sections as well, which may be time consuming and bring no profit in terms of accuracy. The subsequent check of the designed reinforcement is performed in all sections. The option activates a pseudo-linear calculation of buckling for 1D member (the genuine 2nd order analysis is the non-linear one, i.e. using the Timoshenko or NewtonRaphson iteration). If this option is ON, a special algorithm is started on the background that evaluates bar imperfections and 1st + 2nd order deflections which leads to an approximation of the 1st order bending moments by increased 2nd order moments. DIN 1045-1 introduces for this situation the concept of "Model column method" and NORM calls it "Spare bar method". Each national standard implemented in Scia Engineer uses its analysis path that takes into account the stipulations of the particular standard. Optimize the number of bars in c-s for biaxial calculation If ON, the number of bars in the cross-section is optimised to achieve the minimum number of bars with the cross-section still passing the check.
Buckling data
Calculation method Uni-axial bending calculation Bi-axial bending calculation (interaction formula) Automatic determination - uniaxial bending calculation if ratio of biaxial moment is less The largest of bending moments My, Mz will be taken into consideration. The smaller one will be ignored. Both My and Mz are taken into account. The design is carried out using interaction formula
(My/Myu)x + (Mz/Mzu)x < 1

where x is the safety factor (see below). If the ratio of one bending moment to the other along the whole beam length is smaller than the input value, then the beam is considered to be subject to uni-axial bending. Otherwise, if at least one cross-section is
then
found where the ratio is greater than the input value, the biaxial approach is applied.
Biaxial bending Safety factor for biaxial bending formula (see above) Calculate reinforcement using Specifies the safety factor used in the interaction formula above. Default value = 1.4. real area of reinforcement If this option is ON, the reinforcement is calculated from the real sectional area of individual bars. delta area of reinforcement If this option is ON, the reinforcement is calculated using the user defined area (delta). Optimisation method for number of bars in cross-section Ratio y/z If the option is ON, the number on bars in section is minimised so that their minimal number is used. automatic If ON, the ratio of y-reinforcement to zreinforcement is determined automatically. manual If ON, the user specifies the ratio of reinforcement in y-direction to reinforcement in z-direction. Parameters for beams Calculate compression reinforcement Moment capping at supports If the compression reinforcement is necessary, check this box to provide for its calculation. Bending moment diagram may be "shifted" in supports in order to provide for reduction of support bending moments. The reduction depends on the type of support. For supports of Column type, the support dimension is calculated from the columns cross-section. For standard supports the user must input the support size (see the chapter dealing with point supports in the main reference manual). If reduction of shear force in supports is allowed, check this box. at the face (support/column) the reduced shear force is determined at the support face at the effective depth from the face (support/column) the reduced shear force is determined in the effective length from the support face See ENV 1992-1-1 Art. 4.3.2.2(10)
Shear force capping at supports
10
General parameters
in the face (support/column) + factor x internal cantilever arm For this option, the user must specify Factor of internal cantilever arm. Parameters for 2D elements The depth of slab should be at least 200 mm when shear reinforcement is required (5.4.3.3 (1)) Structural reinforcement of deep beam See ENV 1992-1-1 : Art. 5.4.5.(2). If ON, construction reinforcement for deep beams will be taken into account. If ON, the provision of the related paragraph is taken into account.
CDD/PGNL parameters
Two different types of physical nonlinear calculation (material nonlinearity) are available: Analysis of Code Dependent Deflections (including creep) (CDD) Physically nonlinear calculation of internal forces (only short term conditions) CDD Divide members in parts The number of intervals the beam is divided to during the physically nonlinear calculation of deformations. This value overrides the division adjusted in the mesh setup dialogue, but is used ONLY for the calculation of physically nonlinear deformations. Deformation: Max. displacement of beam Deformation: Max. displacement of plate PGNL Calculation of nonlinear stiffness for nonlinear calculation Convergence criterion of the calculation General Coefficient for If the PNL calculation is performed for the The default setting determining if the physically nonlinear behaviour should be taken into account in order to calculate internal forces. The precision (in percentages) of the iteration method. Maximal deflection of a beam for the serviceability limit state (defined relatively to the length of the beam). Maximal deflection of a slab for the serviceability limit state (the absolute value).
11
reinforcement (amount of reinforcement can be increased for the CDD and PGNL calculation)
Required As, the user may modify the amount of calculated reinforcement by multiplying it by this coefficient.
Interaction diagram
The parameters for interaction diagram are: Division of strain Calculation precision for one of the diagram "branches". The value means how many times the strain plane is readjusted from the position of section under full compression to the position of section under full tension. Default value = 180. The value influences the accuracy and the speed of calculation. See Figure 1 below. Vertical division Number of directions in which the diagram is calculated (number of "branches"). Default value = 72. See Figure 1 below. Horizontal division The value affecting the accuracy of vertical sections. Because "branches" of the diagram are not generally planar, the calculation of vertical sections is based on horizontal sections. Default value = 100. See Figure 1 below. Method of check The interaction diagram shows the ultimate bearing capacity. The following approaches can be applied: Nu assuming Md is constant Mu assuming Nd is constant NuMu assuming eccentricity is constant Muy assuming Mdz is constant Muz assuming Mdy is constant Default value = Muy. See Figure 2 below. Figure 1 - Divisions
12
General parameters
A = Division of strain; B = Vertical division; C = Horizontal division Figure 2 Method of check
Ultimate limit state

Safety factors Gamma c shear Partial safety factor for concrete used for calculation of the basic design shear resistance.
13
ENV 1992-1-1: Art. 4.3.2.3. (1) Default value = 1.5 Gamma c compression Partial safety factor for concrete. ENV 1992-1-1: Art. 2.3.3.2. (1) Default value = 1.5 Gamma s Partial safety factor for reinforcement steel. ENV 1992-1-1: Art. 2.3.3.2. (1) Default value = 1.15 Concrete Max. compression strain of concrete The limiting compressive strain for concrete. ENV 1992-1-1: Art. 4.3.1.2 Default = -0.0035. Strain at beginning of plastic deformation Strain at which concrete starts to behave plastically in the stress-strain diagram. ENV 1992-1-1 : Fig.4.2 Default = -0.0020. Alfa The additional reduction factor for sustained compression. ENV 1992-1-1: Art. 4.2.1.3.3b. (11) Default = 0.85. Steel Max. tension strain of steel The limiting steel strain. ENV 1992-1-1: Art.4.2.2.3.2. (5) Default = 0.01.
Ultimate limit state - Shear

The parameters in the Shear group control the calculation of shear reinforcement. 1D structures - beams Shear coefficients Coefficient in equation (4.18) Gives the influence of axial force on shear resistance of concrete without shear reinforcement. ENV 1992-1-1: Art.4.3.2.3. (1) Default value = 0.15 Max. value for coefficient ro_1 Maximum value of an effective reinforcement percentage. ENV 1992-1-1: Art.4.3.2.3. (1) Default value = 0.02
14
General parameters Shear percentage Concrete class The concrete classes that together with the steel class determine the minimum shear reinforcement ratio. ENV 1992-1-1: Tab.5.5 Default value = C40/50 to C50/60 Steel grade The steel class that together with the concrete classes determine the minimum shear reinforcement ratio. ENV 1992-1-1: Tab.5.5 Default value = S400 Result value of min. percentage Minimum shear reinforcement ratio. ENV 1992-1-1: Tab.5.5 Default value = 0.0016 Method for calculation of shear reinforcement Standard Choose this option to calculate shear reinforcement according to the standard method. ENV 1992-1-1: Art. 4.3.2.4.3 Variable strut inclination Choose this option to calculate shear reinforcement according to the variable strut inclination method. ENV 1992-1-1: Art. 4.3.2.4.4 Variable strut inclination method Minimum angle of the concrete strut with the longitudinal axis Maximum angle of the concrete strut with the longitudinal axis 2D structures - slabs Shear mode The calculation employs the checking of capability considering a fixed inclination of fictitious concrete strut (fixed strut inclination method). At most 50% of traction reinforcement is anchored before the support More than 50% of traction reinforcement is anchored before the support See ENV 1992-1-1 : Art. 4.3.2.3.(1) The lower limiting value for the angle between the concrete strut and the longitudinal axis. The upper limiting value for the angle between the concrete strut and the longitudinal axis.
See ENV 1992-1-1 : Art. 4.3.2.3.(1). This is the default setting.
15
Proiectare structuri de beton Shear strut inclination control variable strut inclination method (4.3.2.4.4) fixed strut inclination method (4.3.2.4.3) Shear effect upon the net reinforcement Shear reinforcement in a net reinforcement may have an effect on the results ("shear effect"). These parameters control the way this effect is taken into account. no shear effect upon the net reinforcement (4.3.2.4.4 (6) -> 5.4.2) shear effect will be considered in SR2 only (4.3.2.4.4 (5)) shear effect will be generally be considered (4.3.2.4.4 (5)) See ENV 1992-1-1 : 4.3.2.4.3.(5) A special check. The shear effect is taken into account in shear area 2 only. See ENV 1992-1-1 : Art. 4.3.2.4.4(6) -> 5.4.2 See ENV 1992-1-1 : Art. 4.3.2.4.3. See ENV 1992-1-1 : Art. 4.3.2.4.4.
Ultimate limit state - Punching shear

Coefficients This group defines parameters depending on the position of the column. The first four coefficients are used to determine the minimal bending moment per unit length in X and Y direction. The values are used in accordance with Table 4.9 ENV 1992-1-1. Column position Moment coefficient: eta x top eta x bottom eta y top eta y bottom Beta Coefficient taking into account the eccentricity of load (ENV 1992-1-1 : Art. 4.3.4.3 (4)). Default value = 1.0 Loaded area Shape circular, with diameter not exceeding ... Shape rectangular, with perimeter not exceeding ... Loaded area of circular shape with the maximal diameter equal to the input value. EC 2: Art. 4.3.4.2.1 (1), default value = 3.5 * d Loaded area of rectangular shape with the maximal perimeter equal to the input value. The position of the column is selected. Individual moment coefficients. ENV 1992-1-1, Art. 4.2.4.5.3(1) Default values: acc. to EC2, Table 4.9
16
General parameters
EC 2: Art. 4.3.4.2.1 (1), default value = 11 * d Shape rectangular, max length/width Loaded area of rectangular shape with the length/width ration not exceeding the input value. EC 2: Art. 4.3.4.2.1 (1) , default value = 2 Distance between the perimeter of the loaded area and the edge of the opening not exceeding ... The maximum value of the smallest distance between the perimeter of the loaded area and the edge of an opening. If the distance isless than the input value, the part of the critical section enclosed by the two tangents drawn from the centre of the loaded area to the opening edge is taken as ineffective. ENV 1991-1-1 2: Art. 4.3.4.2.2 (2), default value = 6 * d Shear reinforcement Min thickness of plate Minimal thickness of a plate where the shear reinforcement is created. EC 2: Art. 5.4.3.3 (1), default value = 200 mm Min ratio Minimal acting shear reinforcement should not be lower that the input percentage in the tab SLS group Ratio of shear reinforcement. EC 2: Art. 5.4.3.3 (2), default value = 60 % of the values acc. to Table 5.5 Shear resistance Coefficient of VRd1 The coefficient k for the calculation of shear resistance VRd1. It is possible to select (i) an automatic calculation or (ii) manual input of the value. ENV 1992-1-1: Art. 4.3.4.5.1 (1), formula (4.56) Coefficient of VRd2 The coefficient for the calculation of shear resistance VRd2. EC 2: Art. 4.3.4.5.2 (1) formula (4.57) Default value = 1.6 Column heads Rectangular column with rectangular column head, lh < 1.5 hh This option defines the determination of dcrit in the case that lh < 1.5 hh: The rectangular loaded area according to ENV 1992-1-1: Art. 4.3.4.2.2 Equivalent diameter according to ENV 1992-1-1: Art. 4.3.4.4(1), formula 4.52. Failure surface has to be completely inside Use this option if the failure area should be fully outside or fully inside of the column head
17
or outside of the column head
if 1.5hH < lH < 1.5(hH + d). If the failure area is not fully outside or fully inside of the column head, a warning is issued. If the option is not selected, formula 4.55 from ENV 1992-1-1: Art. 4.3.4.4(5) is used instead to calculate dcrit.
Ultimate limit state - Foundation block

Longitudinal reinforcement No reinforcement needed when hf / a > Minimum reinforcement ratio r1 Minimum reinforcement only needed hf < Default concrete cover If the ratio hF / a is greater than the adjusted value, no reinforcement is used. Default value = 2.0. Minimal reinforcement ratio. Default value = 0.005. The reinforcement ratio specified above is used ONLY if hF is lower than the input value. Default value = 500 mm. The default cover size for the foundation block. Default value = 70 mm. Apply reinforcement on the upper side For eccentric foundation blocks, the minimal design moments related to punching assessment cause tension at the upper side of the block. If this option is ON, the minimal reinforcement at the upper surface is taken into account. Moment in face of support Reduced moment Select the appropriate method for the calculation of the design moment: (i) in face of support position 1 in the figure, (ii) reduced moment - position 2 in the figure.
Calculation of bending moment
18
General parameters
Shear punching if A > 2 hF, Beta 1 = The definition of punching shear angle Beta 1 (see Fig. above) for the situation when A > 2 hF. Default value = 33.7. if A < 2 hF, Beta 1 = The definition of punching shear angle Beta 1 (see Fig. above) for the situation when A < 2 hF. Default value = 45.0. Beta V Coefficient taking account of the punching shear reinforcement in order to determine the shear force capacity. Default value = 1.0. Angle alpha reinforcement / foundation plane The orientation of the punching shear reinforcement. Default value = 45.0.
Pyramidal block k1 k2 Correction coefficient. Default value = 2.25. Correction coefficient.
19
Default value = 1.11. k3 Correction coefficient. Default value = 1.34.
Detailing provisions
Columns Longitudinal reinforcement Min. reinforcement percentage The minimum reinforcement percentage. ENV 1992-1-1: Art.5.4.1.2.1 Default value = 0.3% Max. reinforcement percentage The maximum reinforcement percentage. ENV 1992-1-1: Art.5.4.1.2.1 Default value = 8% Min. bar distance The minimum clear distance between individual parallel bars (for Design and Drawing). ENV 1992-1-1: Art.5.2.1.1 (3) Default value = 20 mm Max. bar distance The maximum clear distance between individual parallel bars (for Design and Drawing). The minimum numbers of bars in a column of a circular cross-section. ENV 1992-1-1: Art.5.4.1.2.1. (4) Default value = 6 Min. bar diameter The minimum diameter of bars in columns. ENV 1992-1-1: Art.5.4.1.2.1. (1) Default value = 12 mm Beams Longitudinal reinforcement Min. reinforcement factor x (b x d) / fyk equals to The minimum reinforcement percentage related to the characteristic steel yield strength. ENV 1992-1-1: Art.5.4.2.1.1 (1) Default value = 0.6 Min. reinforcement percentage (b x d) The minimum reinforcement percentage. ENV 1992-1-1: Art.5.4.2.1.1 (1) Default value = 0.15% Max. reinforcement percentage The maximum reinforcement percentage. ENV 1992-1-1: Art.5.4.2.1.1 (2) Default value = 4%
Min. number of bars in circular column
20
General parameters
Min bar distance
The minimum clear distance between individual bars (for Design and Drawing). ENV 1992-1-1: Art.5.2.1.1 (P1) Default value = 20 mm
Max. bar distance
The maximum clear distance between individual parallel bars (for Design and Drawing).
Stirrups (links) Maximum transverse spacing of stirrups The maximal transverse spacing of legs in a series of shear links is related to the shear force (Vsd). ENV 1992-1-1: Art.5.4.2.2 (9) Maximum longitudinal spacing of stirrups The maximal longitudinal spacing of successive links is related to the shear force (Vsd). ENV 1992-1-1: Art.5.4.2.2 (7) Calculation and theoprac (columns and beams) This group contains switches for checks that can be applied during design and drawing of reinforcement. Check min. bar distance Check max. bar distance 2D Structures Reinforcement Min. transverse reinforcement percentage Min. net reinforcement percentage (in general) Min pressure reinforcement percentage Maximum percentage in bending pressure zone Minimal amount of transverse reinforcement, determined as a percentage of main reinforcement, Default value = 20%. Minimum percentage of longitudinal reinforcement, unconditionally. Default value = 0%. Minimal part of concrete cross-section that should act as compression reinforcement. Default value = 0.4%. Plates only: Definition of the maximum percentage of reinforcement in the bending pressure zone related to the concrete pressure force. Compare with SIA 162, Art. 3.24.16 Default value = 50%. Min tension Shells and Plates only: Check for minimal distance of bars during design and drawing. Check for maximal distance of bars during design and drawing.
21
reinforcement percentage at face +Zp
Minimum percentage of tension reinforcement at the surface with positive Z co-ordinate (in the local coordinate system of the 2D member). ENV 1992-1-1, art. 5.4.2.1.1(1), formula (5.14) Default value = 0.15%.
Min tension reinforcement percentage at face -Zp
Minimum percentage of tension reinforcement at the surface with negative Z co-ordinate (in the local co ordinate system of the 2D member) or at each of the Wall faces, resp. ENV 1992-1-1, art. 5.4.2.1.1(1), formula (5.14) Default value = 0.15 %.
Max reinforcement percentage in crosssection Min shear reinforcement Minimal bar distance Maximal bar distance
Maximal part of concrete cross-section that should act as reinforcement. Default value = 8%. Minimal part of concrete cross-section that should act as shear reinforcement. Default value = 0.11%. Displays the minimal bar distance. Displays the maximal bar distance.
Serviceability limit state

Creep Creep coefficient The value of creep coefficient used for the calculation of effective tangential concrete modulus of elasticity that is valid during the physically nonlinear calculation for creep combination. ENV 1992-1-1: Table 3.3 Creep according to table Environment class Age at loading If ON, creep coefficient according to the code table can be specified. ENV 1992-1-1: Table 3.3 Exposure conditions for the determination of creep. The age of concrete at loading for which creep should be calculated.
Serviceability limit state - Crack proof

1D structures Sigma S Tension of the reinforcement as percentage of fyk. ENV 1992-1-1: Art. 4.4.2.2(39), Gl.(4.78)
22
General parameters
Default value: 100% (fyk) w lim Maximal permissible crack width. ENV 1992-1-1 Art. 4.4.2.1 (6), default value = 0.3 mm. 2D structures Maximum allowable crack width crack width on face Zp+ / ZpMaximal allowable crack width at the surface with positive / negative Z co-ordinate (in the local co-ordinate system of the plate).
If the value is set to zero, the crack width is not checked and the calculation is carried out empirically following the provisions of Article 4.4.2.3. Limit bar distance bar distance on face Zp+ / ZpMaximal allowable distance between reinforcement bars at the surface with positive / negative Z co-ordinate (in the local co-ordinate system of the plate).
Reinforcement bar surface characteristics Effect upon the main strain on face +Zp/-Zp Coefficient beta1 of the crack formula. ENV 1992-1-1, Art. 4.4.2.4(2), Gl.(4.81) Default value: Beta1=1.0 Effect upon the mean crack distance on face +Zp/-Zp Coefficient k1 of the mean crack distance formula. ENV 1992-1-1, Art. 4.4.2.4(2), Gl.(4.82) Default value: k1=0.8 Load case processing attitude Effect upon the main strain The user selects the type of load case that causes the appearance of cracks. The load causing cracks can be due to: prevailingly external load, internally imposed deformation, externally imposed deformation.
Concrete tension strength fct,eff in early stage of hardening In percent of fct The effective utilisation of concrete in tension. It can reduce the strength of concrete in tension. If set to zero (default value), the coefficient is not taken into account.
23
Design and drawing

The parameters are the same as for EC-EN 1992-1-1. See chapter General parameters > EC ENV > Design and drawing.
Hooks
This dialogue enables the user to define the default values for the anchorage details in stirrups and longitudinal reinforcement. Design and drawing Anchorage of stirrups In this dialogue the user can input the default values for the shape of the stirrup anchorage. Possible shapes are:
Anchorage of longitudinal reinforcement
In this dialogue the user can input the default values for the shape of the stirrup anchorage. Available shapes are:
Warning and errors

The calculation of a concrete member may generate a set of various warnings and errors specified in the code. The program warns the user if a warning or even an error has been generated. The used may review the rules and their seriousness in this dialogue. An error causes that the calculation in that particular point is stopped. On the other hand, a warning is just recorded and the calculation goes on.
24
General parameters
EC EN 1992-1-1
Design defaults
Concrete cover advanced settings Design working life [years] Exposure class It is possible to set either 50 or 100 years of lifespan of the structure. EN 1992-1-1:2004, art. 4.4.1.2(5), table 4.3 N The exposure classes are related to environmental conditions and can be found in table 4.1 (X0, XC1, XC2, XC3, XC4, XD1, XD2, XD3, XS1, XS2, XS3, XF1, XF2, XF3, XF4, XA1, XA2, XA3). Note: Exposure classes 5(XFy) and 6 (XAy) are not taken into account for concrete cover calculation, see EN 206-1, section 6. EN 1992-1-1:2004, art. 4.2(2), table 4.1 Abrasion class The minimum concrete cover cmin should be increased for concrete abrasion: - Abrasion class XM1: cmin + 5 mm; - Abrasion class XM2: cmin + 10 mm; - Abrasion class XM3: cmin + 15 mm Note: The abrasion class default is None and cmin is not increased. EN 1992-1-1:2004, art. 4.4.1.2(13) Delta c. dev The allowance in design for deviation Deltac.dev is: - for Prefabricated: 5 mm; - for In-situ concrete:10 mm; - for Concrete against prepared ground: 40 mm; - for Concrete against soil: 75 mm. EN 1992-1-1:2004:2004, art. 4.4.1.3 Special quality control See EN 1992-1-1:2004 table 4.3 N.
25
Proiectare structuri de beton Beams Default reinforcement Upper cover Upper Stirrup Lower Lower cover Defines thickness of concrete cover at the upper surface. Specifies diameter and type of reinforcement at the upper surface. Specifies diameter and type of reinforcement for stirrups (links). Specifies diameter and type of reinforcement at the lower surface. Defines thickness of concrete cover at the lower surface.
Note: Item Concrete cover is accessible only if User-defined concrete cover has been selected. 2D structures and slabs Default reinforcement Upper cover Reinforcement Upper Lower Lower cover Defines thickness of concrete cover at the upper surface. Specifies the type of reinforcement. Specifies diameter of reinforcement for the upper surface. Specifies diameter of reinforcement for the lower surface. Defines thickness of concrete cover at the lower surface.
Note: Items Upper cover and Lower cover are accessible only if User-defined concrete cover has been selected. Default unbraced types (for columns and beams only) If the option is ON, the sway frame is considered. This is the default setting that is used if: - the user has not defined this value at the beam directly (in the buckling lengths settings dialogue), or - if the corresponding parameters in the buckling lengths settings dialogue is set to "Settings".
26
General parameters
Y-Y Z-Z
Sway in YY direction. Sway in ZZ direction.
General
This part of the dialogue contains a set of parameters specified in the standard. Their explanation is not necessary here as all the items in the dialogue contain reference to the appropriate article in the standard. Some parameters are related to fire-resistance calculations and do not appear if fire resistance is not selected in Project > Functionality dialogue. These parameters are marked with "[2]" in the end of the article number.
Calculation parameters are divided into several groups: general parameters (see below), parameters for columns (see below), parameters for beams (see below), parameters for CDD calculation (see separate chapter), parameters for interaction diagram (see separate chapter). General parameters Number of iteration steps Precision of iteration Limit value of checks Defines the maximum numbers of steps, used to find the state of equilibrium in a section. Defines the numerical precision in percentages. This value is used in all checks for final assessment whether the member satisfies or does not satisfies the prescribed conditions. Normally, this value will be one (1), but it can be even lower or greater than 1. For stiffness and crack-proof calculation use reinforcement As,tot or 0 (As, tot for As,req > 0 and 0 for As,req = 0) The total area of reinforcement is used for the calculation on condition that the design function has been already run and that the program has already calculated the required area of reinforcement. Otherwise, zero value is used (even if the user has manually inserted some reinforcement bars). The total area of reinforcement is the sum of the user-defined reinforcement (through basic reinforcement, through reinforcement zones/regions or through free bars) and calculated additional required reinforcement. The additional required reinforcement may be zero, if the user has already inputted enough user-defined reinforcement. IMPORTANT: Keep in mind, that the function
27
calculating the required areas of reinforcement MUST HAVE BEEN run before. Otherwise, the user-defined reinforcement is ignored and ZERO value is used. As, user The user-defined reinforcement is used for the calculation. The term user-defined reinforcement covers the basic reinforcement specified in member data, reinforcement bars inputted through reinforcement templates in reinforcement zones (1D members) or regions (2D members), and free bars of reinforcement. In order: [ As, user ]; [ As,tot or 0] If there is any user-defined reinforcement, it is used, otherwise, the total reinforcement is used (which in fact means the calculated required area of reinforcement). Remember, that for the second option, the design function must have been already run. In order: [ As,tot or 0]; [ As, user] If the design of reinforcement has been already performed and the required area of reinforcement has been already calculated, it is used. Otherwise, the user-defined reinforcement is used. Check selected sections only Concrete area weakened by reinforcement bars Take into account longitudinal practical reinforcement for design calculation Check torsion Check shear of construction joint Check the interaction of shear, torsion, flexure and axial load Limit bending pressure zone ration xu/d The checks are performed only in selected sections. This option can dramatically speed up the program. The area of reinforcement is subtracted from the area of the cross-section as if ducts were installed. If ON, the already inserted longitudinal reinforcement is taken into account during the calculation. If ON, the torsion check is performed. If ON, the shear stress in joints is checked. If ON, the interaction of shear, torsion, flexure and axial load is checked. The limit value of the ratio of compression zone of concrete to effective height of the cross-section.
28
General parameters Parameters for columns Advanced settings This parameter can simplify the input for those users who calculate simple problems and need to adjust just a few basic parameters. If ON, all the items in the column setup part are available. If OFF, only the basic parameters are available. The less-common parameters are disabled. Corner design only The following cross-sections are supported: rectangular, L-section, T-section, I-section. The bars are designed only in corners of the cross-section. The calculation is iterative and diameter or area of reinforcement in corner is increased until the check is satisfied. Determine governing cross-section beforehand The user may determine that the design of reinforcement is carried out in the foot and head of the column. Otherwise, the calculation is carried out in all intermediate sections as well, which may be time consuming and bring no profit in terms of accuracy. The subsequent check of the designed reinforcement is performed in all sections. The option activates a pseudo-linear calculation of buckling for 1D member (the genuine 2nd order analysis is the non-linear one, i.e. using the Timoshenko or NewtonRaphson iteration). If this option is ON, a special algorithm is started on the background that evaluates bar imperfections and 1st + 2nd order deflections which leads to an approximation of the 1st order bending moments by increased 2nd order moments. DIN 1045-1 introduces for this situation the concept of "Model column method" and NORM calls it "Spare bar method". Each national standard implemented in Scia Engineer uses its analysis path that takes into account the stipulations of the particular standard. User estimate of reinf. ratio for design of reinforcement The users estimate of reinforcement ratio for columns. When the reinforcement is being designed with the effect of buckling length taken into account, the area of reinforcement is known yet. This are is, therefore, calculated using the user-specified value in this item. If ON, the number of bars in the cross-section is optimised to achieve the minimum number of bars with the cross-section still passing the check.
Buckling data
Optimize the number of bars in c-s for biaxial calculation
29
Proiectare structuri de beton Calculation method Uni-axial bending calculation Bi-axial bending calculation (interaction formula) Automatic determination - uniaxial bending calculation if ratio of biaxial moment is less then The largest of bending moments My, Mz will be taken into consideration. The smaller one will be ignored. Both My and Mz are taken into account. The design is carried out using interaction formula

where x is the safety factor (see below). If the ratio of one bending moment to the other along the whole beam length is smaller than the input value, then the beam is considered to be subject to uni-axial bending. Otherwise, if at least one cross-section is found where the ratio is greater than the input value, the biaxial approach is applied.
Biaxial bending Safety factor for biaxial bending formula (see above) Calculate reinforcement using Specifies the safety factor used in the interaction formula above. Default value = 1.4. real area of reinforcement If this option is ON, the reinforcement is calculated from the real sectional area of individual bars. delta area of reinforcement If this option is ON, the reinforcement is calculated using the user defined area (delta). Optimisation method for number of bars in cross-section Ratio y/z If the option is ON, the number on bars in section is minimised so that their minimal number is used. automatic If ON, the ratio of y-reinforcement to zreinforcement is determined automatically. manual If ON, the user specifies the ratio of reinforcement in y-direction to reinforcement in z-direction.
Parameters for beams Check max. depth of compression zone Calculate compression reinforcement Normal force to calculation If ON, activates the check of the limit value of the depth of compression zone x_lim (full value of tensile strength of steel is reached) If the compression reinforcement is necessary, check this box to provide for its calculation. If ON the normal force in beam is takes into account.
30
General parameters
Moment capping at supports
Bending moment diagram may be "shifted" in supports in order to provide for reduction of support bending moments. The reduction depends on the type of support. For supports of Column type, the support dimension is calculated from the columns cross-section. For standard supports the user must input the support size (see the chapter dealing with point supports in the main reference manual). If reduction of shear force in supports is allowed, check this box. at the face (support/column) the reduced shear force is determined at the support face at the effective depth from the face (support/column) the reduced shear force is determined in the effective length from the support face
Parameters for 2D elements 9.3.2(1): when shear reinforcement req. the height ought to be ? 20 cm Structural reinforcement of deep beams Pressure normal force eccentricity ratio ecr=M/(Nd) If ON, the statically required shear reinforcement in cross-sections with depth < 200 mm is declared as non-designable. EN 1992-1-1:2004: art. 9.3.2(1) If ON, construction reinforcement for deep beams will be taken into account. Shells: If the real eccentricity in cross-section is greater than the value on input, the state of stress-strain is considered as "prevailing bending", otherwise "prevailing normal force". This parameter is used in the control of minimum pressure reinforcement. Compare NORM B 4700: art. 3.4.2(3) Default value = 2.0 Limit bending pressure zone ratio for C12/15 till C35/45 Definition of the relative height of the bending pressure zone for different concrete strengths According to EN 1992-1-1: art. 2.5.3.4(5) Definition of the limit value ksi=x/d for concrete classes up to C35/45. According to EN 1992-1-1: art. 2.5.3.4.2(5) Default value = 0.45 for concrete classes higher than C35/45 Definition of the limit value ksi=x/d for concrete classes higher than C35/45. According to EN 1992-1-1 art. 2.5.3.4.2(5) Default value = 0.35
31

This part of the dialogue contains a set of parameters specified in the standard. Their explanation is not necessary here as all the items in the dialogue contain reference to the appropriate article in the standard. One tab is related to fire-resistance calculations and does not appear if fire resistance is not selected in Project > Functionality dialogue.
Interaction diagram
32
General parameters

The parameters in the Shear group control the calculation of shear reinforcement.
33
Proiectare structuri de beton 1D structures - beams Shear coefficients Max. value for coefficient ro_1 Maximum value of an effective longitudinal reinforcement percentage. EN 1992-1-1:2004, art. 6.2.2(1), Gl.(6.2a) Default value = 0.02
Angle between the concrete compression struts and beam axis model Type of input for theta Angle The angle is input. Cotangent Directly the cotangent is input. theta cot (theta) Depending on the type of input either requires the input or shows angle theta. Depending on the type of input either requires the input or shows cotangents of theta.
Plain and lightly reinforced concrete members Perform check always as plain concrete members (12.6.3, 12.6.4)
Coefficient taking into account axial compressive stress Automatic calculation according to sigma_cp value alpha_w by national annex user input alpha_cw
Principal stress Check design tensile strength only in compression zone
Construction joint Take into account cos_alpha for formula 6.25
34
General parameters 2D structures Shear strut inclination control variable strut inclination method (4.3.2.4.4) fixed strut inclination method (4.3.2.4.3) Calculates the required shear reinforcement using the standard Variable strut inclination method. EN 1992-1-1:2004, art. 6.2.3 Choose this option to calculate shear reinforcement according to the non-standard method assuming the constant strut inclination of 45.
Shear effect upon the net reinforcement The Shear force can affect also the net reinforcement (Scia Engineer introduced the notion of "Shear Effect" for this phenomenon). These parameters control the way this effect is taken into account. No Shear Effect considered Constructive measures are taken instead of exact calculation. EN 1992-1-1:2004, art. 6.2.2(5) and 9.2.1.3(2) Shear effect considered in SR 2/3 This is the standard case of Shear Effect: the impact upon the net reinforcement takes place if shear reinforcement is statically required only (Shear Region 2) EN 1992-1-1:2004, Art. 6.2.3(7) Shear Effect considered unconditionally This is a non-standard control (e.g. for test or comparison purposes): Shear Effect (see above) is applied also in SR1 (no shear reinforcement required)
Shear reinforcement in a net reinforcement may have an effect on the results ("shear effect"). These parameters control the way this effect is taken into account. See art. 6.2.3. (7)
Ultimate Limit State - Fire resistance
Note: Before the fire resistance data can be adjusted in servise Concrete > Setup, the appropriate option must be selected in the Project > Functionality dialogue.
Setting calculation Use equivalent temperature curve for calculation If item is turned OFF for calculation values, which depend on temperature, will use defined temperature distribution curve If item is turned ON for calculation values, which depend on temperature, will use equivalent temperature distribution curve, see picture below
35
Type of calculation Detailing provisions (tabulated data) If ON, Detailing provisions will be checked (function Check fire resistance-detailing rules under Member check > Concrete Fire Resistance check will be active). If ON, simplified calculation method will be applied (functions Check fire resistance response, Check fire resistance capacity, Prestress check fire resistance response and Prestress check fire resistance capacity under Member check > Concrete Fire Resistance check will be active.
Simplified calculation method
Detailing provisions Fire (time) resistance R and critical temperature Theta_cr automatic If option "automatic" {default} is turned on, the critical temperature in bars of reinforcement will be determined according to chapter 5.2(6) ( chapter 8.6.1) and the fire (time) resistance is input by the user in edit box: - "Fire (time) resistance R" is active with default value is 7200s. - "Theta_cr" is inactive. from temp.curve
36
General parameters
If option "from temp.curve" is turned on, the fire (time) resistance and critical temperature will be determined from "Temperature distribution curve" (items "Fire (time) resistance R" and "Theta_cr" are inactive ) user input If option "user input " is turned on, the fire (time) resistance and critical temperature is input by the user into the appropriate edit boxes: - "Fire (time) resistance R" default value is 7200 s - "Theta_cr" default value is 773,15 K Note: The values are same for all reinforcement bars and prestressing strands. Fire (time) resistance R Theta_cr Reduction factor mu_phi for column see above see above automatic If option "automatic {default}", the value mu_phi will be calculated according to chapter 5.3.2(3) value eta_fi If option "value eta_fi" is turned on, the value mu_phi will be same as value eta_fi (value eta_fi is adjusted in Concrete > Setup > ULS > Fire resistance) user input If option "user input " is turned on, the value mu_phi is inputting by user Simplified calculation method Use reduction factor for design level If ON, the internal forces for the check of fire resistance with simplified method will be multiplied by factor eta_fi (value eta_fi is set in Concrete > Setup > ULS > Fire resistance)

Loaded area Control perimeters for slab of ceiling at a distance Control perimeters for Defines the distance of the critical section from the face of the column. As above but for foundation slabs.
37
foundation slab at a distance Distance between the perimeter of the loaded area and the edge of the opening does not exceed value The maximum value of the smallest distance between the perimeter of the loaded area and the edge of an opening. If the distance is less than the input value, the part of the critical section enclosed by the two tangents drawn from the centre of the loaded area to the opening edge is taken as ineffective. The minimal dimension of a column with regard to "d" for which the length of the critical perimeter does not have to be reduced.
Dimensions of column for use of the complete perimeter does not exceed value Shear reinforcement Min thickness of plate
Minimal thickness of a plate where the shear reinforcement is created. Art. 9.3.2(1)
Shear resistance Normal force to punching calculation Column heads Rectangular column with rectangular column head, lh < 2.0 (0.5) hh This option defines the determination of dcrit in the case that lh < 2.0 hh. Art. 6.4.2 (8) Determines if the axial force is taken into account in the punching shear calculation.

This part of the dialogue contains a set of parameters specified in the standard. Their explanation is not necessary here as all the items in the dialogue contain reference to the appropriate article in the standard.
Serviceability limit state - Creep

Creep for concrete PNL deformation See Annex B of EC2. Creep coefficient Creep according to table Accessible only if Creep according to table is OFF. If ON, the creep coefficient is calculated according to Annex B1, using parameters Relative humidity, Age of loading and Age of concrete. If OFF, the creep coefficient can be input directly into the input field above.
38
General parameters
Relative humidity Age of loading Age at concrete
This is the relative humidity of the ambient environment in %. See Annex B1. This is the age of concrete at loading in days. See Annex B1. This is the age of concrete in days at the moment considered. See Annex B1.
Note: This simplified calculation of the creep coefficient is used to calculate deflections according to a standard. It is not, however, applied in TDA that uses more accurate algorithm to determine the value of the creep coefficient.

General kt load duration according to art. 7.3.4. (2) Factor of the reduced mean strain (tension stiffening) EN 1992-1-1: 2004, art. 7.3.4(2).
1D structures See chapter 7.3 in EN 1992-1-1. Stress after formation of first crack Input by user Sigma S will be calculate according to expression: Sigma S= k.fyk , where factor k may be changed in the input box below ( default value is 1,0) Automatic {default} Sigma S is calculated automatically according to according to EN 1992-1-1: 2004 Table 7.2 or 7.3. Sigma S Provides for the manual input of the coefficient needed for the determination of Sigma S.
2D structures Limit bar distance bar distance on face Zp+ / ZpMaximal allowable distance between reinforcement bars at the surface with positive / negative Z co-ordinate (in the local co-ordinate system of the plate).
Concrete tension strength fct,eff in early stage of hardening In percent of fct The effective utilisation of concrete in tension. It can reduce the strength of concrete in tension. If set to zero (default value), the coefficient is not taken into account.
39
CDD parameters
CDD Deformation: Max. displacement of beam Deformation: Max. displacement of plate Type of loading Maximal deflection of a beam for the serviceability limit state (defined relatively to the length of the beam). Maximal deflection of a slab for the serviceability limit state (the absolute value). Single short term This option sets beta to 1.0. Sustained For sustained loads or many cycles of repeated loading the coefficient Beta is equal to 1.0. See EN 1992-1-1, art. 7.4.3(3). Beta Beta is a coefficient taking account of the influence of the duration of the loading or of repeated loading on the average strain. See EN 1992-1-1, art. 7.4.3(3).
CDD in document The following abbreviations may occur in he output tables. Explanation of symbols of Code Dependent Deflections for beams Abbreviatio Explanation n Linear deformation based on linear linear combination Elastic deformation based on concrete st+lt combination Creep deformation based on creep creep combination Total deformation based on linear and total creep combination Immediate deformation based on permanent imm combination Additional deformation based on all combinations add
lim
Limit deformation
This part of the dialogue contains a set of parameters specified by the Standard (excepting one). Their explanation is not necessary here since all the items in the dialogue contain a reference to the appropriate article in the Standard. However, the following few parameters extracted from the tab for 2D structures detailing need a closer description.
40
General parameters 2D Structures (extract only) Reinforcement Min. transverse reinforcement percentage Minimum amount of transverse reinforcement, determined as a percentage of reinforcement in other reinforcement direction(s) at the same face. This control is active in ULS only, not in SLS. EN 1992-1-1:2004, Art. 9.3.1.1(2) Default value = 20% Min. net reinforcement percentage (in general) Maximum percentage in bending pressure zone Minimum percentage of longitudinal reinforcement, unconditionally. Default value = 0%. Plates only: Definition of the maximum percentage of reinforcement in the bending pressure zone related to the concrete pressure force. Compare with SIA 162, Art. 3.24.16 Default value = 50%. Min shear reinforcement Minimum percentage of shear reinforcement. The Norm stipulations as to minimum shear reinforcement in 2D structures are not unambiguously interpretable. The user can input value > 0. EN 1992-1-1:2004, Art. 9.2.2 & 9.3.2(2). Default value = 0%.
Special program restriction Virtual strut reduction factor It considers the diminished actual concrete strength in a 2D cracked continuum (100 % = full concrete strength). Default value = 80 %
Detailing provisions - Fire resistance

Changes in tabulated data for beams and slabs Reduce values bmin (hs,min) for beams and slabs for calcareous aggregate by Increase values amin for beams and slabs for prestressing bars The item specifies the reduction of values bmin and hs, min for calcareous aggregate according to 5.1 (2) in EN 1992-1-2. Default value is 10 ( bmin = 0,9xbmin). Value amin in tables for beams and slabs will be increased according to chapter 5.2 (5): amin = amin+10mm. Default value is 10mm.
41
Increase values amin for beams and slabs for prestressing wires and strands
Value amin in tables for beams and slabs will be increased according to chapter 5.2 (5): amin = amin+15mm. Default value is 15mm.
Columns Calculate standard fire resistance according to 5.3.2(4) If this check box is ON (default), the fire resistance will be calculated according to chapter 5.3.2(4). If this check box is OFF, the fire resistance will be calculated using the table below. Table for minimum column dimension bmin (Table 5.2a) The values in the table are editable only if the check box Detailing provisions (tabulated data) in Concrete > Setup > ULS > Fire resistance is turned on. The values are editable only in ascending order. Table for minimum axis distance amin (Table 5.2a) Button [Load default value] The same as above
If the button is pressed, the default values are loaded into the table. The button is active only if check box Detailing provisions (tabulated data) in Concrete > Setup > ULS > Fire resistance is turned on.
Beams Reduced minimum axis distance amin according to 5.2(7c) If ON {default}, the axial distance amin will be reduced according to chapter 5.2(7c). If OFF, the axial distance amin will not be reduced. If ON {default}, the minimum distance bmin will be reduced according to chapter 5.2(10). If OFF, the minimum distance bamin will not be reduced. The values in the table are editable only if check box Detailing provisions (tabulated data) in Concrete > Setup > ULS > Fire resistance is turned on. The values are editable only in ascending order. If the button is pressed, the default values are loaded into the table.
Reduced crosssectional dimensions bmin according to 5.2(10) Table for minimum dimension bmin and minimum axis distance amin (Table 5.5 and 5.6)
Button [Load default value]
42
General parameters
The button is active only if check box Detailing provisions (tabulated data) in Concrete > Setup > ULS > Fire resistance is turned on. Slabs Reduced minimum axis distance amin according to 5.2(7c) Table for minimum thickness hs,min and minimum axis distance amin for slabs (Table 5.8) If ON (default), the axis distance amin will be reduced according to chapter 5.2(7c). If OFF, the axis distance amin will be not reduced. The values in the table are editable only if check box Detailing provisions (tabulated data) in Concrete > Setup > ULS > Fire resistance is turned on. The values are editable only in ascending order. The values in the table are editable only if check box Detailing provisions (tabulated data) in Concrete > Setup > ULS > Fire resistance is turned on. The values are editable only in ascending order. If the button is pressed, the default values are loaded into the table. The button is active only if check box Detailing provisions (tabulated data) in Concrete > Setup > ULS > Fire resistance is turned on.
Table for min. thickness hs,min and min. axis distance amin for hollow core slabs (EN 1168,Table G1) Button [Load default value]
Design and drawing

Parameters for Design and drawing (formerly REDES) are divided into several groups Design and drawing Bend reinforcement Max. number of stirrup bendings Specifies the maximal number of bends in one stirrup. If the user exceeds this number, the program issues a warning. In practice, most of bending equipment allows up to seven bends in a single stirrup.
Parameters controlling the input of practical reinforcement Divide longitudinal reinforcement per span While the shear reinforcement is always divided by individual spans (i.e. one zone of shear reinforcement cannot contain two spans), the longitudinal reinforcement does not have to be. The user can decide whether the longitudinal reinforcement passes through several spans, or whether it is divided by individual spans.
43
Do not allow overlapping of stirrups No. of division in span for longitudinal reinforcement
Normally, overlapping of stirrups is not desired. However, for example in phased cross-sections this may be necessary (one stirrup shape in the web enters also the flange, and the flange has its own stirrups, which overlap with the web stirrups). This parameter is accessible only if Divide longitudinal reinforcement per span is not selected. If the reinforcement passes several spans of a member with variable cross-section, the program checks whether the reinforcement is still inside of the cross-section. This parameter defines how detailed is this verification. The location of reinforcement is verified in each N-th of each span with N specified by this item. This parameter ensures that the length of stirrup zones is realistic. The zone cannot be shorter than the value defined in this item. This parameter ensures that the length of main reinforcement bars is realistic. The bar cannot be shorter than the value defined in this item. If the program calculates a bar shorter than this value, the bar is not created. If the user inputs manually a bar that is shorter than this value, the bar is not created.
Minimum length for stirrup reinforcement Minimum length for longitudinal reinforcement
Distance of the first stirrup from beginning or end of zone It is possible to control the distance of the first stirrup in a zone from the beginning (or end) of that zone. the pictures below the table. Edge with support This parameter specifies the distance of the first stirrup from the zone end-point in the case that the zone end is in a support. Half of stirrup distance The distance is equal to a half of normal stirrup distance in the zone. Half of stirrup diameter The distance is equal to a half of stirrup diameter. By user The distance is specified by user. User value for edge with support Edge without support If the distance of the first stirrup is to be defined by user, it is done in this item. This parameter specifies the distance of the first stirrup from the zone end-point in the case that the zone end is without supports. Half of stirrup distance The distance is equal to a half of normal stirrup distance in the zone. Half of stirrup diameter The distance is equal to a half of stirrup diameter. By user The distance is specified by user. User value for edge without support If the distance of the first stirrup is to be defined by user, it is done in this item.
44
General parameters
Let us have a two-span beam with supports as in the following picture.
Let us assume that the distance of stirrups at the edge with support is set to 5 cm and the distance at the edge without support is set to "half of stirrup distance". Further, let us assume that the default stirrup distance is set to 30 cm. If no special requirements are specified, the program creates two stirrup zones with the following spacing of stirrups:
The default value for the distance between stirrups is set by the program to 300mm. It is not possible to change it in the Setup dialogue. However, it can be modified in the Member data settings. Bending This table defines minimal diameters for rounding of stirrups. These values depend on material and stirrup diameter.
Hooks
This dialogue enables the user to define the default values for the anchorage details in stirrups and longitudinal reinforcement. Anchorage of stirrups In this dialogue the user can input the default values for the shape of the stirrup anchorage. Possible shapes are:
45
In this dialogue the user can input the default values for the shape of the longitudinal reinforcement anchorage. Available shapes are:
Warning and errors

CSN 73 1201
Design defaults
See Design defaults for Eurocode 2.
Calculation parameters are divided into several groups: general parameters (see below), parameters for columns (see below), parameters for beams (see below), parameters for CDD/PGNL calculation (see separate chapter), parameters for interaction diagram (see separate chapter). General parameters Number of iteration steps Defines the maximum numbers of steps, used during the search for the state of equilibrium in the stress-strain diagram of concrete. Defines the numerical precision in percentages. This value is used in all checks for final assessment whether the member satisfies or does not satisfies the prescribed conditions.
Precision of iteration Limit value of checks
46
General parameters
Normally, this value will be one (1), but it can be even lower or greater than 1. For stiffness and crack-proof calculation use reinforcement As,tot or 0 (As, tot for As,req > 0 and 0 for As,req = 0) The total area of reinforcement is used for the calculation on condition that the design function has been already run and that the program has already calculated the required area of reinforcement. Otherwise, zero value is used (even if the user has manually inserted some reinforcement bars). The total area of reinforcement is the sum of the user-defined reinforcement (through basic reinforcement, through reinforcement zones/regions or through free bars) and calculated additional required reinforcement. The additional required reinforcement may be zero, if the user has already inputted enough user-defined reinforcement. IMPORTANT: Keep in mind, that the function calculating the required areas of reinforcement MUST HAVE BEEN run before. Otherwise, the user-defined reinforcement is ignored and ZERO value is used. As, user The user-defined reinforcement is used for the calculation. The term user-defined reinforcement covers the basic reinforcement specified in member data, reinforcement bars inputted through reinforcement templates in reinforcement zones (1D members) or regions (2D members), and free bars of reinforcement. In order: [ As, user ]; [ As,tot or 0] If there is any user-defined reinforcement, it is used, otherwise, the total reinforcement is used (which in fact means the calculated required area of reinforcement). Remember, that for the second option, the design function must have been already run. In order: [ As,tot or 0]; [ As, user] If the design of reinforcement has been already performed and the required area of reinforcement has been already calculated, it is used. Otherwise, the user-defined reinforcement is used. Check percentage of longitudinal reinforcement If this option is ON, the calculation procedure takes account of the defined reinforcement percentage of longitudinal reinforcement.
47
Check percentage of shear reinforcement
If this option is ON, the calculation procedure takes account of the defined shear reinforcement number of cuttings, bar diameter, distance between bars, minimal percentage of reinforcement. If OFF, the program calculates required reinforcement area As and displays the calculated value in function Concrete > 1D member > Member design > Design. If ON, the program performs several tasks at once. It calculates required reinforcement area As. Then, it looks into settings (Design defaults or Member data) and reads the adjusted diameter for main reinforcement. It calculates how many bars are required to cover the calculated As. Moreover, the program takes into account detailing provisions and determines the minimum number of bars. Then, the program decides which requirement is stricter: calculated rounded As or As determined from detailing provisions. Finally, the program displays As corresponding to the stricter condition.
Use practical number of bars
Use coefficient of geometry Check selected sections only Concrete area weakened by reinforcement bars Take into account practical reinforcement for design calculation Check torsion
If this option is OFF, the geometry coefficient to SN 73 1201-86, Art. 5.2.2. will be ignored. Its value will be set to 1. The checks are performed only in selected sections. This option can dramatically speed up the program. The area of reinforcement is subtracted from the area of the cross-section as if ducts were installed. If ON, the reinforcement already defined in the beam is taken into account.
If ON, the torsion check is performed.
Parameters for columns Advanced settings This parameter can simplify the input for those users who calculate simple problems and need to adjust just a few basic parameters. If ON, all the items in the column setup part are available. If OFF, only the basic parameters are available. The less-common parameters are disabled. Corner design only The following cross-sections are supported: rectangular, L-section, T-section, I-section. The bars are designed only in corners of the cross-section. The calculation is iterative and
48
General parameters
diameter or area of reinforcement in corner is increased until the check is satisfied. Determine governing cross-section beforehand The user may determine that the calculation is carried out in sections in the foot and the head of the column. Otherwise, the calculation is carried out in all intermediate sections as well, which may be time consuming and bring no profit in terms of accuracy. Static indeterminateness of the structure may be or may be not considered for calculation of eccentricity of axial force in compressed members. SN 73 1201-86, Art. 5.2.3.3 Buckling data The option activates a pseudo-linear calculation of buckling for 1D member (the genuine 2nd order analysis is the non-linear one, i.e. using the Timoshenko or NewtonRaphson iteration). If this option is ON, a special algorithm is started on the background that evaluates bar imperfections and 1st + 2nd order deflections which leads to an approximation of the 1st order bending moments by increased 2nd order moments. DIN 1045-1 introduces for this situation the concept of "Model column method" and NORM calls it "Spare bar method". Each national standard implemented in Scia Engineer uses its analysis path that takes into account the stipulations of the particular standard. Optimize the number of bars in c-s for biaxial calculation User estimate of reinf. ration for design of reinforcement If ON, the number of bars in the cross-section is optimised to achieve the minimum number of bars with the cross-section still passing the check. The users estimate of reinforcement ratio for columns. When the reinforcement is being designed with the effect of buckling length taken into account, the area of reinforcement is known yet. This are is, therefore, calculated using the user-specified value in this item. Removed???
Check static indeterminateness
Calculation method Uni-axial bending calculation Bi-axial bending calculation (interaction formula) The largest of bending moments My, Mz will be taken into consideration. The smaller one will be ignored. Both My and Mz are taken into account. The design is carried out using interaction formula

where x is the safety factor (see below).
49
Automatic determination - uniaxial bending calculation if ratio of biaxial moment is less then
If the ratio of one bending moment to the other along the whole beam length is smaller than the input value, then the beam is considered to be subject to uni-axial bending. Otherwise, if at least one cross-section is found where the ratio is greater than the input value, the biaxial approach is applied.
Biaxial bending Safety factor for biaxial bending formula (see above) Calculate reinforcement using Specifies the safety factor used for biaxial bending in the interaction formula above. Default value = 1.4. real area of reinforcement If this option is ON, the reinforcement is calculated from the real sectional area of individual bars. delta area of reinforcement If this option is ON, the reinforcement is calculated using the user defined area (delta). Optimisation method for number of bars in cross-section Ratio y/z If the option is ON, the number on bars in section is minimised so that their minimal number is used. automatic If ON, the ratio of y-reinforcement to zreinforcement is determined automatically. manual If ON, the user specifies the ratio of reinforcement in y-direction to reinforcement in z-direction.
User estimate of reinforcement ration for design of reinforcement
Specifies the user estimate of reinforcement percentage that is applied for design of the reinforcement in column.
Parameters for beams Calculate compression reinforcement Normal force to calculation Check compression of element Moment capping at supports If the compression reinforcement is necessary, check this box to provide for its calculation. Defines whether axial force ai or is not considered during calculation. If ON, the member under compression will be checked to SN 73 1201-86. If reduction of bending moments in supports is allowed, check this box.
50
General parameters
If reduction of shear force in supports is allowed, check this box. at the face (support/column) the reduced shear force is determined at the support face at the effective depth from the face (support/column) the reduced shear force is determined in the effective length from the support face
Parameters for 2D members Design of compression reinforcement in slabs Virtual strut reduction factor If ON, the compression reinforcement is designed. This item is accessible only for project of Plate XY type. Reduction of the strength of a concrete strut. It considers the diminished actual concrete strength in 2D continuum.
CDD/PGNL parameters
There are available two different types of physical nonlinear calculation (material nonlinearity): Analysis of Code Dependent Deflections (including creep) (CDD) Physically nonlinear calculation of internal forces (only short term conditions) CDD Divide members in parts The number of intervals the beam is divided to during the physically nonlinear calculation of deformations. This value overrides the division adjusted in the mesh setup dialogue, but is used ONLY for the calculation of physically nonlinear deformations. Deformation: Max. displacement of beam Deformation: Max. displacement of plate Maximal deflection of a beam for the serviceability limit state (defined relatively to the length of the beam). Maximal deflection of a slab for the serviceability limit state (the absolute value).
PGNL Calculation of nonlinear stiffness for nonlinear calculation Convergence criterion of the calculation The default setting determining if the physically nonlinear behaviour should be taken into account in order to calculate internal forces. The precision (in percentages) of the iteration method.
51
Controlled iteration
If ON, the user may control during the calculation process the insertion of plastic regions. S/he may define what internal forces are used to determine stiffness and what precision should be achieved. Internal forces: stiffness is calculated for the equilibrium of internal forces from the previous calculation step. Deformations: stiffness is calculated from rotations from the previous calculation step.
Calculation of stiffness
General Coefficient for reinforcement (amount of reinforcement can be increased for the CDD and PGNL calculation) If the PNL calculation is performed for the Required As, the user may modify the amount of calculated reinforcement by multiplying it by this coefficient.
Interaction diagram
See Interaction diagram for Eurocode2.

These parameters influence the Ultimate Limit State requirements stated in SN 73 1201-86. Gamma b Safety factor for concrete. SN 73 1201-86, Art. 2.3 Default value = 1 See chapter Gamma b Gamma s Safety factor for steel. SN 73 1201-86, Art. 2.3 Default value = 1 See chapter Gamma s Max. compression strain of concrete Value of limit compression strain of concrete under compression according to the stressstrain diagram. SN 73 11201-86, Art. 2.1.4 Default value = -0.0025 Max. tension strain of steel Value of limit tension strain of reinforcement steel according to the stress-strain diagram. SN 73 11201-86, Art. 2.2.2.3 Default value = -0.0015
52
General parameters Percentage of reinforcement Min. and max. degree to code If ON, the minimal percentage of reinforcement for tension and compression reinforcement is determined to the standard. SN 73 1201-86, Art. 3.1.4.3 Min. degree of tension reinforcement Min. degree of compression reinforcement Max. degree in one zone If option Min. and max. degree to code is OFF, the user specifies the minimal percentage of reinforcement. If option Min. and max. degree to code is OFF, the user specifies the minimal percentage of reinforcement. The value of maximal percentage of reinforcement for reinforcement located in one zone. SN 73 1201-86, Art. 3.1.4.6 Default value = 3 % Max. degree in two zones, compression - tension The value of maximal percentage of reinforcement for reinforcement located in two zones. One zone is under compression, the other one is under tension. SN 73 1201-86, Art. 3.1.4.6 Default value = 4 % Max. degree in two zones, tension - tension The value of maximal percentage of reinforcement for reinforcement located in two zones. SN 73 1201-86, Art. 3.1.4.6 Default value = 6 %
Min. percentage of reinforcement 2D structures The parameters of this group apply specially to 2D structures additionally to the parameters of the preceding table, which are common both to 1D and 2D structures. Min. transverse reinforcement coefficient Min. net reinforcement (in general) Minimal amount of transverse reinforcement in percentages of main reinforcement. Default value = 20 %. Minimal part of cross-section that should act as reinforcement. Default value = 0 %.
Gamma b
Coefficients Influence of cyclic concrete stress Influence of local decreasing of strength SN 73 1201-86, art. 2.3.6 SN 73 1201-86, art. 2.3.8
53
Influence of increased temperature Influence of multiaxial stress Influence of cyclic steel stress Influence of reinforcement welding.
SN 73 1201-86, art. 2.3.9 SN 73 1201-86, art. 2.3.10 See Gamma S. See Gamma S.
Gamma s
Coefficients Influence of cyclic concrete stress Influence of local decreasing of strength Influence of increased temperature Influence of multiaxial stress Influence of cyclic steel stress Influence of reinforcement welding. See Gamma B. See Gamma B. See Gamma B. See Gamma B. SN 73 1201-86, art. 2.3.7 SN 73 1201-86, art. 2.3.12

Coefficients Kapa s Coefficient of reinforcement. It is not calculated according to Annex 9, the user defines the value. CSN 73 12 01, art. 5.5.6.13 Default value = 1.0. Kapa a Coefficient of axial force. It is not calculated according to Annex 9, the user defines the value. CSN 73 12 01, art. 5.5.6.13 Default value = 1.0. multiple qbu for calculation qu (5.5.6.12 (198)) Max value of qu The coefficient of qbu in Eg. (199) may be set by the user. CSN 73 12 01, Art. 5.5.6.12, formula (198) Default value = 1.0 One of the conditions of reliability the
54
General parameters
calculation shear force corresponding to the punching shear capacity must be lower than the calculation shear force corresponding to the punching shear capacity taken by concrete. CSN 73 12 01,art. 5.5.6.12, formula 199 Default value = 2.0
Shear reinforcement Max value of Rsf The limit for maximal calculation strength of steel in tension (punching shear reinforcement). CSN 73 12 01, art. 5.5.6.14. Default value 300 MPa Min thickness of plate Minimal thickness of the plate for inclusion of shear reinforcement. CSN 73 12 01, art. 5.5.6.16 Default value 200mm. Min position of reinforcement row Detailing provision defining the position of shear reinforcement. It is the foot of the hook, if bent-up bars are used. CSN 73 12 01, art. 5.5.6.14, fig. 33 Max position of the first row reinforcement Max position of other rows reinforcement See above, this item relates to the first row of shear reinforcement from the face of the column. See above, this item relates to subsequent rows of shear reinforcement and their inclusion in the calculation of resistance.

General Coefficient gamma beb The coefficient taking account of initial plastic deformation of concrete. SN 73 1201-86, change 2, Art. 2.3.13 Default value = 0.8.
Creep - shrinkage Automatic creep coefficient calculation Environment class Initial time of creep t1 Final time of creep t2 If ON, the coefficient is calculated automatically. SN 73 1201-86, Art. 7.3.3.7, Tab. 12 Age of concrete (start of the interval) in days considered for the calculation of creep. Age of concrete (end of the interval) in days
55
considered for the calculation of creep. fi bf Creep coefficient Basic value of creep coefficient. The final value of the creep coefficient either calculated automatically or input directly.

1D structures Environment class Coefficient of permanent crack width w3a, lim w3b, lim SN 73 1201, Art. 9.2 Table 15 SN 73 1201, Art. 9.2 Table 15 Limit value of crack width. Limit value of crack width.
Design and drawing

Hooks
This dialogue enables the user to define the default values for the anchorage details in stirrups and longitudinal reinforcement. For details see the counterpart chapter for Eurocode.
Beams Min bar distance ds min Min distance between reinforcement bars in a beam. SN 73 1201-86, Art. 11.2.2.1 Default value = 20 mm. Max bar distance Max distance between reinforcement bars in a beam. SN 73 1201-86, Art. 11.2.2.4, Table 19 Default value = 300 mm. Max shear reinforcement distance Maximal distance between links. The lower of the two input values is taken into account. The user may input the distance as a part of a cross-section effective depth or s/he may input the distance directly. SN 73 1201-86, Art. 5.3.6 Default value = 0.75 and 400 mm, respectively.
56
General parameters
Columns Longitudinal reinforcement Min bar distance ds min Min distance between reinforcement bars in a column. SN 73 1201-86, Art. 11.2.2.1 Default value = 30 mm. Max bar distance Max distance between reinforcement bars in a beam. SN 73 1201-86, Art. 11.2.2.4, Table 19 Default value = 400 mm.
Shear reinforcement Min bar diameter Minimal link diameter determined as a maximum of the two input values. SN 73 1201-86, Art. 11.6.6.2 Default value = 0.25 ds and 4 mm, respectively. Max distance Max distance of links in a column. SN 73 1201-86, Art. 11.6.6.2 Default value = 250 mm.
Circular columns Min number of bars Min bar diameter SN 73 1201-86, Art. 11.6.6.1 Default value = 6 SN 73 1201-86, Art. 11.6.6.1 Default value = 12 mm
Calculation of theoprac (columns and beams) Test of min distance Test of max distance If ON, the minimal distance between bars is checked during the design phase. If ON, the maximal distance between bars is checked during the design phase.
DIN 1045, 1045-1

Design defaults
These parameters are used for the design of minimum required reinforcement if no member data have yet been defined on particular members.
57
Proiectare structuri de beton General Concrete cover Use min concrete cover User defined concrete cover The minimal values of cover based on detailing rules specified in the code are used. The user may input the thickness of cover layer.
Concrete cover advanced settings Environmental class Type of construction delta c c nom Specifies the environmental class. Selects the material used for the construction. Defines if delta c is to be used. Defines the value of c nom.
Beams Default reinforcement Upper cover Upper Stirrup Lower Lower cover Defines thickness of concrete cover at the upper surface. Specifies diameter and type of reinforcement at the upper surface. Specifies diameter and type of reinforcement for stirrups (links). Specifies diameter and type of reinforcement at the lower surface. Defines thickness of concrete cover at the lower surface.
Note: Item Concrete cover is accessible only if User-defined concrete cover has been selected. 2D structures and slabs Default reinforcement Upper cover Defines thickness of concrete cover at the
58
General parameters
upper surface. Reinforcement Upper Lower Lower cover Specifies the type of reinforcement. Specifies diameter of reinforcement for the upper surface. Specifies diameter of reinforcement for the lower surface. Defines thickness of concrete cover at the lower surface.
Note: Items Upper cover and Lower cover are accessible only if User-defined concrete cover has been selected. Default unbraced types (columns and beams only) If the option is ON, the sway frame is considered. This is the default setting that is used if: - the user has not defined this value at the beam directly (in the buckling lengths settings dialogue), or - if the corresponding parameters in the buckling lengths settings dialogue is set to "Settings". Y-Y Z-Z Sway in YY direction. Sway in ZZ direction.
Calculation parameters are divided into several groups: general parameters (see below), parameters for columns (see below), parameters for beams (see below), parameters for CDD/PGNL calculation (see separate chapter), parameters for interaction diagram (see separate chapter). General parameters Number of iteration steps Precision of iteration Limit value of checks For stiffness and crack-proof calculation use reinforcement As,tot or 0 (As, tot for As,req > 0 and 0 for As,req = 0) The total area of reinforcement is used for the calculation on condition that the design function has been already run and that the program has already calculated the required area of reinforcement. Otherwise, zero value is used (even if the user has manually inserted some reinforcement bars). The total area of reinforcement is the sum of the user-defined reinforcement (through basic reinforcement, through reinforcement Defines the maximum numbers of steps, used to find the state of equilibrium in a section. Defines the numerical precision in percentages.
59
zones/regions or through free bars) and calculated additional required reinforcement. The additional required reinforcement may be zero, if the user has already inputted enough user-defined reinforcement. IMPORTANT: Keep in mind, that the function calculating the required areas of reinforcement MUST HAVE BEEN run before. Otherwise, the user-defined reinforcement is ignored and ZERO value is used. As, user The user-defined reinforcement is used for the calculation. The term user-defined reinforcement covers the basic reinforcement specified in member data, reinforcement bars inputted through reinforcement templates in reinforcement zones (1D members) or regions (2D members), and free bars of reinforcement. In order: [ As, user ]; [ As,tot or 0] If there is any user-defined reinforcement, it is used, otherwise, the total reinforcement is used (which in fact means the calculated required area of reinforcement). Remember, that for the second option, the design function must have been already run. In order: [ As,tot or 0]; [ As, user] If the design of reinforcement has been already performed and the required area of reinforcement has been already calculated, it is used. Otherwise, the user-defined reinforcement is used. Check percentage of longitudinal reinforcement Check percentage of shear reinforcement If this option is ON, the calculation procedure takes account of the defined reinforcement percentage for longitudinal reinforcement. If this option is ON, the calculation procedure takes account of the defined shear reinforcement number of legs, link diameter, spacing of the links, and minimal percentage of reinforcement. The checks are performed only in selected sections. This option can dramatically speed up the program. The area of reinforcement is subtracted from the area of the cross-section as if ducts were installed. If ON, the already inserted longitudinal reinforcement is taken into account during the
Check selected sections only Concrete area weakened by reinforcement bars Take into account longitudinal practical
60
General parameters
reinforcement for design calculation Parameters for columns Advanced settings
calculation.
This parameter can simplify the input for those users who calculate simple problems and need to adjust just a few basic parameters. If ON, all the items in the column setup part are available. If OFF, only the basic parameters are available. The less-common parameters are disabled.
Corner design only
The following cross-sections are supported: rectangular, L-section, T-section, I-section. The bars are designed only in corners of the cross-section. The calculation is iterative and diameter or area of reinforcement in corner is increased until the check is satisfied.
Determine governing cross-section beforehand
The user may determine that the design of reinforcement is carried out in the foot and head of the column. Otherwise, the calculation is carried out in all intermediate sections as well, which may be time consuming and bring no profit in terms of accuracy. The subsequent check of the designed reinforcement is performed in all sections. The option activates a pseudo-linear calculation of buckling for 1D member (the genuine 2nd order analysis is the non-linear one, i.e. using the Timoshenko or NewtonRaphson iteration). If this option is ON, a special algorithm is started on the background that evaluates bar imperfections and 1st + 2nd order deflections which leads to an approximation of the 1st order bending moments by increased 2nd order moments. DIN 1045-1 introduces for this situation the concept of "Model column method" and NORM calls it "Spare bar method". Each national standard implemented in Scia Engineer uses its analysis path that takes into account the stipulations of the particular standard.
Buckling data
If ON, the number of bars in the cross-section is optimised to achieve the minimum number of bars with the cross-section still passing the check.
Calculation method Uni-axial bending The largest of bending moments My, Mz will
61
calculation Bi-axial bending calculation (interaction formula) Automatic determination - uniaxial bending calculation if ratio of biaxial moment is less then
be taken into consideration. The smaller one will be ignored. Both My and Mz are taken into account. The design is carried out using interaction formula

Parameters for beams Calculate compression reinforcement Moment capping at supports If the compression reinforcement is necessary, check this box to provide for its calculation. Bending moment diagram may be "shifted" in supports in order to provide for reduction of support bending moments. The reduction depends on the type of support. For supports of Column type, the support dimension is calculated from the columns cross-section. For standard supports the user must input the support size (see the chapter dealing with
62
General parameters
point supports in the main reference manual). Shear force capping at supports If reduction of shear force in supports is allowed, check this box. at the face (support/column) the reduced shear force is determined at the support face at the effective depth from the face (support/column) the reduced shear force is determined in the effective length from the support face
Parameters for 2D elements Control of tiny structural depth/height Structural reinforcement of deep beam Walls and Shells: DIN 1045-1: Art. 13.7.1(2), Tab. 32 Walls and Shells: DIN 1045-1: Art. 13.6(2)
CDD/PGNL parameters
CDD Deformation: Max. displacement of beam Deformation: Max. displacement of plate Maximal deflection of a beam for the serviceability limit state (defined relatively to the length of the beam). Maximal deflection of a slab for the serviceability limit state (the absolute value).
General Coefficient for reinforcement (amount of reinforcement can be increased for the CDD and PGNL calculation) If the PNL calculation is performed for the Required As, the user may modify the amount of calculated reinforcement by multiplying it by this coefficient.
Interaction diagram
The parameters for interaction diagram are: Division of strain Calculation precision for one of the diagram "branches". The value means how many times the strain plane is readjusted from the position of section under full compression to the position of section under full tension. Default value = 180.
63
The value influences the accuracy and the speed of calculation. See Figure 1 below. Vertical division Number of directions in which the diagram is calculated (number of "branches"). Default value = 72. See Figure 1 below. Horizontal division The value affecting the accuracy of vertical sections. Because "branches" of the diagram are not generally planar, the calculation of vertical sections is based on horizontal sections. Default value = 100. See Figure 1 below. Method of check The interaction diagram shows the ultimate bearing capacity. The following approaches can be applied: Nu assuming Md is constant Mu assuming Nd is constant NuMu assuming eccentricity is constant Muy assuming Mdz is constant Muz assuming Mdy is constant Default value = Muy. See Figure 2 below. Figure 1 - Divisions
A = Division of strain; B = Vertical division; C = Horizontal division Figure 2 Method of check 64
General parameters

Safety factors Gamma c compression Partial safety factor for concrete. DIN1045-1: Art. Art. 5.3.3(6), Tab. 2 Default value = 1.5 Gamma s Partial safety factor for reinforcement. It is used to determine the stress in the reinforcement both in compression and tension. DIN1045-1: Art. 5.3.3(6), Tab. 2 Default value = 1.15
Concrete Max. compression strain of concrete The limiting compressive strain for concrete. DIN1045-1: Art. 9.1.6 (1), Tab. 9 Default = -0.0035. Strain at beginning of plastic deformation Strain at which the concrete starts to behave plastically in the bi-linear stress-strain diagram. DIN1045-1: 9.1.6 (1), Tab. 9Default = 0.00135. Alfa The additional reduction factor for sustained compression. DIN 1045-1: Art. 9.1.6 (2) Default value = 0.85
65
Steel Max. tension strain of steel The limiting steel strain. DIN1045-1: Art. 9.2.2 (1), Tab. 11 Default value = 0.025

The parameters in the Shear group control the calculation of shear reinforcement. 1D structures - beams Shear percentage Concrete class The concrete classes. Together with the steel class it determines the minimum shear reinforcement ratio. DIN 1045-1: Art. 13.2.3(5), Table 29 Default value : from project settings Standard shear reinforcement percentage Minimum shear reinforcement ratio. DIN 1045 1: Art. 13.2.3(5), Table 29 Default value : calculated by program
Method of shear proof Constant strut inclination Choose this option to calculate shear reinforcement according to the non-standard method assuming the constant strut inclination of 45. Choose this option to calculate shear reinforcement according to the standard variable strut inclination method. DIN 1045 1: Art. 10.3.4
Variable strut inclination
Variable strut inclination method Minimum angle of the concrete strut with the longitudinal axis The lower limiting value for the angle between the concrete strut and the longitudinal axis. DIN 1045 1, Art. 10.3.4, Gl. (73) Default value = 18.4 (cotan 3.0) Maximum angle of the concrete strut with the longitudinal axis The upper limiting value for the angle between the concrete strut and the longitudinal axis. DIN 1045-1: Art. 10.3.4, Gl. (73) Default value = 59.9 (cotan 0.58)
66
General parameters Type of z calculation z = 0.9 d z = min (0.9 d; d-2 cnom) Simplified calculation of lever arm. Another option of this calculation.
2D structures Shear strut inclination control variable strut inclination method Calculates the required shear reinforcement using the standard variable strut inclination method. DIN 1045-1: Art. 10.3.4(3) fixed strut inclination method Choose this option to calculate shear reinforcement according to the non-standard method assuming the constant strut inclination of 45..
Shear effect upon the net reinforcement The Shear force affects the net reinforcement (Scia Engineer introduced the notion of "Shear Effect" for this phenomenon). This option controls the way this effect is taken into account. no shear effect upon the net reinforcement The effect of shear force upon the longitudinal reinforcement is not considered. Instead, constructive (user induced) measures are taken instead of exact calculation. DIN 1045-1: Art. 10.3.4(9) ? 13.2.2(3) shear effect will be considered in SR2 only This is the standard case of Shear Effect: the impact upon the net reinforcement takes place if shear reinforcement is statically required only (s.c. Shear Region 2). DIN 1045-1: Art. 10.3.4(9) shear effect will be generally be considered The shear effect is formally considered also in SR1 (i.e. when no shear reinforcement statically required) This case is non-standard! (reserved for special tests and investigations)!!

Coefficients This group defines parameters depending on the position of the column. The first four coefficients are used to determine the minimal bending moment per unit length in X and Y direction. The values are used in accordance with Table 18. Column position Moment coefficient: eta x top The position of the column is selected. Individual moment coefficients. DIN 1045-1, Art. 10.5.6(2)
67
eta x bottom eta y top eta y bottom Beta
Default values: acc. to Table 14
Coefficient taking into account the eccentricity of load (DIN 1045-1: Art. 10.5.3(2).
Loaded area Shape circular, with diameter not exceeding ... Loaded area of circular shape with the maximum diameter equal to the input value. DIN 1045-1: Art. 10.5.2(1) Default value = 3.5 * d Shape rectangular, with perimeter not exceeding ... Loaded area of rectangular shape with the maximal perimeter equal to the input value. DIN 1045-1: Art. 10.5.2(1) Default value = 11 * d Shape rectangular, max length/width Loaded area of rectangular shape with the length/width ratio not exceeding the input value. DIN 1045-1: Art. 10.5.2(1) Default value = 2 Distance between the perimeter of the loaded area and the edge of the opening not exceeding ... The maximum value of the shortest distance between the perimeter of the loaded area and the edge of opening. If the distance is exceeded, the part of the critical section contained between the two tangents drawn from the centre of the loaded are to the opening edge is taken as ineffective. DIN 1045-1: Art. 10.5.2(6) Default value = 6 * d Shear reinforcement Min thickness of plate Minimal thickness of a plate where the shear reinforcement is statically required. DIN 1045-1: Art. 10.3.3(1) Default value = 200 mm Shear resistance VRd,maxMin ratio The coefficient for the calculation of shear resistance VRd,max from VRd,ct. DIN 1045-1: Art. 10.5.5(1), formula (107) Default value = 1.5
68
General parameters Column heads Rectangular column with rectangular column head, lH < 1.0 hH This option defines the determination of rcrit in the case that lH < 1.0 hH: Rectangular area rcrit is calculated according to DIN 1045-1: Art. 10.5.2(10), formula (97) Equivalent diameter User input according to DIN 1045-1: Art. 10.5.2(10)
Columns Longitudinal reinforcement Min. reinforcement percentage Max. reinforcement percentage The minimum reinforcement percentage. Default value = 0.3% The maximum reinforcement percentage. DIN 1045-1, Art. 13.1.1(4) Default value = 8% Min. bar distance The minimum clear distance between individual parallel bars (for Design and Drawing). DIN 1045-1: Art. 12.2(2) Default value = 20 mm Max. bar distance The maximum clear distance between individual parallel bars (for Design and Drawing). DIN 1045-1: Art.13.5.1(3) Default value = 300 mm Min. number of bars in circular column The minimum numbers of bars in a column of a circular cross-section. DIN 1045-1: Art.13.5.1(3) Default value = 6 Min. bar diameter The minimum diameter of bars in columns. DIN 1045-1: Art.13.5.1(2) Default value = 12 mm
Beams Longitudinal reinforcement Min. reinforcement percentage (b x d) Max. reinforcement percentage The minimum reinforcement percentage. Default value = 0.15% The maximum reinforcement percentage. Default value = 4%
69
Min bar distance
The minimum clear distance between individual bars (for Design and Drawing). DIN 1045-1: Art.12.2(2) Default value = 20 mm
Max. bar distance
The maximum clear distance between individual parallel bars (for Design and Drawing). DIN 1045-1, Art.13.5.1(3) Default value = 300 mm.
Stirrups (links) Maximum transverse spacing of stirrups The maximal transverse spacing of legs in a series of shear links is governed by the magnitude of the shear force (VEd). DIN 1045-1: Art. 13.2.3(6), Table 31 Maximum longitudinal spacing of stirrups The maximal longitudinal spacing of successive links is governed by the magnitude of the shear force (VEd). DIN 1045-1: Art. 13.2.3(6), Table 31 Concrete class Selects the appropriate concrete class for which the maximum distances are valid.
Calculation (columns and beams) This group contains switches for checks that can be applied during design and drawing of reinforcement. Check min. bar distance Check max. bar distance Check for minimal distance of bars during design and drawing. Check for maximal distance of bars during design and drawing.
2D Structures Reinforcement Min. transverse reinforcement percentage Minimum amount of transverse reinforcement, determined as a percentage of reinforcement in other reinforcement direction(s) at the same face. This control is active in ULS only, not in SLS. Default value = 20%. Min. net reinforcement percentage (in general) Automatic calculation of minimum pressure reinforcement Minimum percentage of longitudinal reinforcement, unconditionally. Default value = 0%. Shells and Walls only: If ON, the corresponding reinforcement is calculated automatically. DIN 1045-1: Art.13.7.1(3)
70
General parameters
Min pressure reinforcement percentage
Shells and Walls only: Minimum percentage of compression reinforcement in a cross-section. Default value = 0%. Plates only: Definition of the maximum percentage of reinforcement in the bending pressure zone related to the concrete pressure force Compare with SIA 162, Art. 3.24.16 Default value = 50%.
Maximum percentage in bending pressure zone
Automatic calculation of minimum tension reinforcement
If ON, the corresponding reinforcement is calculated automatically. The calculation is based on the requirement of the prevention of brittle fracture at the first crack appearance. DIN 1045-1: Art. 5.3.2 & 13.1.1(1). Shells and Plates only: Minimum percentage of tension reinforcement at the surface with positive Z co-ordinate (in the local coordinate system of the 2D member). Default value = 0%. Minimum percentage of tension reinforcement at the surface with negative Z co-ordinate (in the local coordinate system of the 2D member) or at each of the Wall faces, respectively. Default value = 0%. Maximum percentage of reinforcement any design point. DIN 1045-1: Art. 13.1.1(4) Default value = 8%. Minimum percentage of shear reinforcement. The standard does not stipulate any 2D shear minimum reinforcement! DIN 1045-1: Art. 13.3.3(2). Default value = 0.11%.
Min tension reinforcement percentage on face +Zp
Min tension reinforcement percentage on face -Zp
Max reinforcement percentage in crosssection
Min shear reinforcement
Special program restriction Virtual strut reduction factor It considers the diminished actual concrete strength in a 2D cracked continuum (100 % = full concrete strength). Standard value = 80 %
71

Creep Creep coefficient The value of creep coefficient used for the calculation of effective tangential concrete modulus of elasticity that is valid during the physically non-linear calculation for "creep" combination. If ON, creep coefficient according to the code table can be specified. DIN 1045 - 1: Art. 9.1.4, Fig. 18, 19 Environment class Age at loading Exposure conditions for the determination of creep. The age of concrete at loading for which creep should be calculated.
Creep according to table

1D structures w lim The value specifies the maximal permissible crack width. DIN 1045 -1: Art. 11.2, Table 18
2D structures Maximum allowable crack width crack width on face Zp+ / ZpMaximal permissible crack width at the surface with positive / negative Z co-ordinate (in the local co-ordinate system of the plate).
If the value is set to zero, the crack proof is nor performed for that surface. Limit bar distance bar distance on face Zp+ / ZpMaximal allowable distance between reinforcement bars at the surface with positive / negative Z co-ordinate (in the local co-ordinate system of the plate).
Load case attitude Load case attitude The user selects the type of load case that causes the appearance of cracks. The load causing cracks can be due to prevailingly external load or internally imposed deformation.
72
General parameters Concrete tension strength fct,eff in early stage of hardening In percent of fct The effective tension strength of concrete in percent of the mean tension strength fctm. Value of zero means the same as 100% (default value), i.e. fct,eff=fctm. DIN1045-1: Art. 11.2.4(1)
Design and drawing

Hooks
Warning and errors

NEN 6720
Design defaults
These parameters are used for the design of minimum required reinforcement if no member data have yet been defined on particular members. General Concrete cover Use min concrete cover User defined concrete cover Concrete cover advanced settings Environmental class Upper side Specifies the environmental class. Special setting for the cover at the top side of a beam or plate can be made here. Unverifiable area If the beam can no longer be checked by visual means (unverifiable), one has to increase the cover. The minimal values of cover based on detailing rules specified in the code are used. The user may input the thickness of cover layer.
73
Treatment area If the beam will be treated -after casting- by some mechanical machines (treatment area), one has to increase the cover. Lower side Special setting for the cover at the bottom side of a beam or plate can be made here. Unverifiable area If the beam can no longer be checked by visual means (unverifiable), one has to increase the cover. Treatment area If the beam will be treated -after casting- by some mechanical machines (treatment area), one has to increase the cover. Beams Default reinforcement Upper cover Upper Stirrup Lower Lower cover Defines thickness of concrete cover at the upper surface. Specifies diameter and type of reinforcement at the upper surface. Specifies diameter and type of reinforcement for stirrups (links). Specifies diameter and type of reinforcement at the lower surface. Defines thickness of concrete cover at the lower surface.
Note: Item Concrete cover is accessible only if User-defined concrete cover has been selected. 2D structures and slabs Default reinforcement Upper cover Reinforcement Defines thickness of concrete cover at the upper surface. Specifies the type of reinforcement.
74
General parameters
Upper Lower Lower cover
Specifies diameter of reinforcement for the upper surface. Specifies diameter of reinforcement for the lower surface. Defines thickness of concrete cover at the lower surface.
Calculation parameters are divided into several groups: general parameters (see below), parameters for columns (see below), parameters for beams (see below), parameters for CDD/PGNL calculation (see separate chapter), parameters for interaction diagram (see separate chapter). General parameters Number of iteration steps Define the maximum numbers of steps, used during the search for the state of equilibrium in the stress-strain diagram of concrete. Used for the calculation of reinforcement and checks. Set the precision (in %) for defining the state of equilibrium in the stress-strain diagram of concrete. Used for the calculation of reinforcement and checks. This value is used in all checks for final assessment whether the member satisfies or does not satisfies the prescribed conditions. Normally, this value will be one (1), but it can be even lower or greater than 1. Check percentage of longitudinal reinforcement For stiffness and crack-proof calculation use reinforcement Switch on to check the required reinforcement against the min. and max. percentages. As,tot or 0 (As, tot for As,req > 0 and 0 for As,req = 0) The total area of reinforcement is used for the calculation on condition that the design function has been already run and that the
Precision of iteration
Limit value of checks
75
program has already calculated the required area of reinforcement. Otherwise, zero value is used (even if the user has manually inserted some reinforcement bars). The total area of reinforcement is the sum of the user-defined reinforcement (through basic reinforcement, through reinforcement zones/regions or through free bars) and calculated additional required reinforcement. The additional required reinforcement may be zero, if the user has already inputted enough user-defined reinforcement. IMPORTANT: Keep in mind, that the function calculating the required areas of reinforcement MUST HAVE BEEN run before. Otherwise, the user-defined reinforcement is ignored and ZERO value is used. As, user The user-defined reinforcement is used for the calculation. The term user-defined reinforcement covers the basic reinforcement specified in member data, reinforcement bars inputted through reinforcement templates in reinforcement zones (1D members) or regions (2D members), and free bars of reinforcement. In order: [ As, user ]; [ As,tot or 0] If there is any user-defined reinforcement, it is used, otherwise, the total reinforcement is used (which in fact means the calculated required area of reinforcement). Remember, that for the second option, the design function must have been already run. In order: [ As,tot or 0]; [ As, user] If the design of reinforcement has been already performed and the required area of reinforcement has been already calculated, it is used. Otherwise, the user-defined reinforcement is used. Use practical number of bars If OFF, the program calculates required reinforcement area As and displays the calculated value in function Concrete > 1D member > Member design > Design. If ON, the program performs several tasks at once. It calculates required reinforcement area As. Then, it looks into settings (Design defaults or Member data) and reads the adjusted diameter for main reinforcement. It calculates how many bars are required to cover the calculated As. Moreover, the program takes into account detailing
76
General parameters
provisions and determines the minimum number of bars. Then, the program decides which requirement is stricter: calculated rounded As or As determined from detailing provisions. Finally, the program displays As corresponding to the stricter condition. Check selected sections only Concrete area weakened by reinforcement bars Take into account longitudinal practical reinforcement for design calculation Parameters for columns Advanced settings This parameter can simplify the input for those users who calculate simple problems and need to adjust just a few basic parameters. If ON, all the items in the column setup part are available. If OFF, only the basic parameters are available. The less-common parameters are disabled. Corner design only The following cross-sections are supported: rectangular, L-section, T-section, I-section. The bars are designed only in corners of the cross-section. The calculation is iterative and diameter or area of reinforcement in corner is increased until the check is satisfied. Determine governing cross-section beforehand The user may determine that the design of reinforcement is carried out in the foot and head of the column. Otherwise, the calculation is carried out in all intermediate sections as well, which may be time consuming and bring no profit in terms of accuracy. The subsequent check of the designed reinforcement is performed in all sections. The option activates a pseudo-linear calculation of buckling for 1D member (the genuine 2nd order analysis is the non-linear one, i.e. using the Timoshenko or NewtonRaphson iteration). If this option is ON, a special algorithm is started on the background that evaluates bar imperfections and 1st + 2nd order deflections which leads to an approximation of the 1st order bending moments by increased 2nd order moments. DIN 1045-1 introduces for this situation the The checks are performed only in selected sections. This option can dramatically speed up the program. The area of reinforcement is subtracted from the area of the cross-section as if ducts were installed. If ON, the already inserted longitudinal reinforcement is taken into account during the calculation.
Buckling data
77
concept of "Model column method" and NORM calls it "Spare bar method". Each national standard implemented in Scia Engineer uses its analysis path that takes into account the stipulations of the particular standard. If ON, the number of bars in the cross-section is optimised to achieve the minimum number of bars with the cross-section still passing the check.
Calculation method Uni-axial bending calculation Bi-axial bending calculation (interaction formula) Automatic determination - uniaxial bending calculation if ratio of biaxial moment is less then The largest of bending moments My, Mz will be taken into consideration. The smaller one will be ignored. Both My and Mz are taken into account. The design is carried out using interaction formula

78
General parameters Parameters for beams Check max. depth of compression zone. Calculate compression reinforcement Moment capping at supports Check this box if the depth of the compression zone should be limited according Art. 8.1.3 of NEN6720. If the compression reinforcement is necessary, check this box to provide for its calculation. Bending moment diagram may be "shifted" in supports in order to provide for reduction of support bending moments. The reduction depends on the type of support. For supports of Column type, the support dimension is calculated from the columns cross-section. For standard supports the user must input the support size (see the chapter dealing with point supports in the main reference manual). According to EC2: Art. 2.5.3.3(4) Shear force capping at supports If reduction of shear force in supports is allowed, check this box. at the face (support/column) the reduced shear force is determined at the support face at the effective depth from the face (support/column) the reduced shear force is determined in the effective length from the support face See EC2 Art. 4.3.2.2(10) in the face (support/column) + factor x internal cantilever arm Shear reinforcement Alpha The angle between the stirrups and the beam. Default: 90 Theta The angle between the shear struts and the local x-axis of the beam. This option also influences the shifting of the moment lines. Default: 45 Check minimum shear reinforcement Tau1 expanded Check this box to take the minimum shear reinforcement into account during calculation. Check this box to calculate t1 according to NEN6720 - 8.2.3.1. If not selected t1 is equal 0.4fb. This setting does not affect the influence on t1 due to axial forces (NEN6720 8.2.3.2) or due to low-bending stresses (NEN 6720 8.2.3.3.). These effects are always taken into account.
79
Proiectare structuri de beton Parameters for 2D members Design of compression reinforcement in slabs If ON, the compression reinforcement is designed. This item is accessible only for project of Plate XY type. Virtual strut reduction factor Reduction of the strength of a concrete strut. It considers the diminished actual concrete strength in 2D continuum.
CDD / PGNL calculation

See CDD/PGNL calculation parameters in Eurocode 2.
Interaction diagram
The parameters for interaction diagram are: Division of strain Calculation precision for one of the diagram "branches". The value means how many times the strain plane is readjusted from the position of section under full compression to the position of section under full tension. Default value = 180. The value influences the accuracy and the speed of calculation. See Figure 1 below. Vertical division Number of directions in which the diagram is calculated (number of "branches"). Default value = 72. See Figure 1 below. Horizontal division The value affecting the accuracy of vertical sections. Because "branches" of the diagram are not generally planar, the calculation of vertical sections is based on horizontal sections. Default value = 100. See Figure 1 below. Method of check The interaction diagram shows the ultimate bearing capacity. The following approaches can be applied: Nu assuming Md is constant Mu assuming Nd is constant NuMu assuming eccentricity is constant Muy assuming Mdz is constant Muz assuming Mdy is constant Default value = Muy. See Figure 2 below.
80
General parameters
Figure 1 - Divisions
M-N-Kappa diagram Number of points in MN-kappa diagram The number of points in M-N-kappa diagram is the amount of calculated points a momentcurvature diagrams contains when performing a calculation of deflections according to a standard.
81
Type of concrete stress-strain diagram
The type of concrete stress-strain diagram is the stress-strain diagram the momentcurvature diagram depends on.

Concrete Gamma m compression Gamma m tension Compression strain at begin plastic deformation Ultimate compression strain Plastic compression strain SLS Partial safety factor for concrete in compression. NEN6720: Art. 6.1.1 Partial safety factor for concrete in tension. NEN6720: Art. 6.1.2 Strain at which the concrete starts to behave plastically in the bi-linear ULS stress-strain diagram. NEN6720: Art. 6.1.4 The limit concrete strain. NEN6720: Art 6.1.4 Strain at which the concrete starts to behave plastically in the bi-linear SLS stress-strain diagram for SLS. NEN6720: Art. 6.1.4 Reinforcement Gamma m Partial safety factor for steel reinforcement NEN6720: Art. 6.2.1 Default value = 1.15. Ultimate strain for reinforcement steel The ultimate limit strain for reinforcement steel. NEN6720: Art. 6.2.4 table 12 Default value = 0.00275.

Check criteria Max value of Tau 2 Min value of ultimate shear stress Tau 1 Loaded area Max ratio length to Specifies the maximal length/width ration. Defines the maximal value of shear stress Tau 2. Defines the minimal value of ultimate shear stress Tau 1.
82
General parameters
width Openings Distance between the perimeter of the loaded area and the edge of the opening not exceeding ... The maximal value of the smallest distance between the perimeter of the loaded area and the edge of opening. If the distance is exceeded, the part of the critical section contained between the two tangents drawn from the centre of the loaded are to the opening edge is taken as ineffective. Specifies the angle of the opening for which the column must be considered the column at the edge.
Angle of the opening when the column must be taken as a column at the edge

Environment Environment class Choose between the different environment classes. The environment class influences the concrete cover and the crack calculation Define the creep coefficient, used for the calculation of the long-term reduced stiffness of the concrete, valid during the calculation of deflections according to a standard for the "creep" combination.
Creep coefficient

General Crack proof can be exceeded by Environmental classes Enter the percentage for which the crack limitations may be exceeded. The table list the values of parameters according to individual articles of the standard.
Crack proof 2D structures Perform noncontrolled crack proof Select this option when the maximum distance and diameter for the required reinforcement should be calculated. For settings see Crack proof 1 page. Select this option when the statically required reinforcement may be adapted to meet the distance and/or diameter limits set by the user. For settings see Crack proof 2 page
Perform controlled crack proof
83
Proiectare structuri de beton Crack proof 1 Environment class Bar adhesion factor ksi The environment class used in calculation Factor for adhesion between the concrete and the reinforcement bars according table 39 of NEN6720. Select this box to perform a crack calculation depending on a fully or not fully developed crack pattern. NEN6720: Art. 8.7.1 a (8.7.2) or 8.7.1.b (8.7.3) Load case attribute > combined external loads and imposed deformations LC for crack proof Crack proof 2 Limit bar diameter Characteristic bar diameter The maximum bar diameter allowed for the layers at the positive / negative Z face. The maximum bar distances allowed for the layers at the positive / negative Z face. Select this bos to perform a crack calculation which gives the maximum results of a fully or a non-fully developed crack pattern. NEN6720: Art 8.7.2 and 8.7.3
Load case attribute > external loads LC for crack proof
Design and drawing

Hooks
General Min percentage of reinforcement in cross-section for columns and beams The minimum percentage of reinforcement that should be applied. Will only be effective when Check percentage of longitudinal reinforcement in tab Design calculation settings is selected. The maximum percentage of reinforcement that should be applied. Will only be effective when Check percentage of longitudinal reinforcement in tab Design calculation settings is selected.
Max. degree of reinforcement in cross-section
84
General parameters Columns Min number of bars in circle Min diameter The minimum numbers of bars that should be applied at least. The minimum diameter that should be applied. NEN6720: Art. 9.9.1 Min distance between bars Max distance between bars Max longitudinal distance between stirrups Beams Min distance between bars Max distance between bars Max longitudinal c/c distance between stirrups Max transverse c/c distance between stirrups Number of legs Calculation Check min bar distance Check max bar distance 2D structures Min transverse reinforcement percentage Min net reinforcement percentage (in general) The fraction of the main reinforcement that should at least be applied in the transverse reinforcement direction. Default: 20%. The fraction of the concrete section that should at least be applied as reinforcement in the element. Default: 0%. Check the minimum distance of bars during design and drawing. Check the maximum distance of bars during design and drawing. The minimum distance between longitudinal bars. NEN6720: Art. 9.10.1 The maximum distance between longitudinal bars. NEN6720: Art. 9.11.4.1 The maximum longitudinal centre to centre distance between stirrups. NEN6720: Art. 9.11.4.5 The maximum transversal centre to centre distance between stirrups. NEN6720: Art. 9.11.4.5 The numbers of legs that will be used. The minimum distance between longitudinal bars. NEN6720: Art. 9.10.1 The maximum distance between longitudinal bars. NEN6720: Art. 9.11.5.1 The maximum distance between the stirrups. NEN6720: Art. 9.11.5.2
85
Min pressure reinforcement percentage
Shells and Walls only: The fraction of the concrete section that should at least be applied as pressure reinforcement. Default: 0%. Plates only: Definition of the maximum percentage of reinforcement in the bending pressure zone related to the concrete pressure force Compare SIA 162, Art. 3.24.16 Default value = 50%.
Min tension reinforcement percentage at face +Zp Min tension reinforcement percentage at face -Zp
The fraction of the concrete section that should at least be applied as tension reinforcement. Default: 0% Minimum percentage of tension reinforcement at the surface with negative Z co-ordinate (in the local coordinate system of the 2D member) or at each of the Wall faces, resp. Default value = 0%. The maximum percentage of reinforcement that may be applied.
Max degree of reinforcement in cross-section
NORM B4700
Design defaults
These parameters are used for the design of minimum required reinforcement if no member data have yet been defined on particular members. General Concrete cover Use min concrete cover User defined concrete cover Concrete cover advanced settings Type of construction There are three structure types available: - general - bridge - in buildings. Min. thickness of concrete cover The minimal thickness of concrete cover can be controlled by the following options: Aggressive material The minimal values of cover based on detailing rules specified in the code are used. The user may input the thickness of cover layer.
86
General parameters
Increase min. concrete cover
Cast against uneven surfaces Under water 63 mm grain
The minimal thickness of concrete cover can be increased due to various reasons: Visible side Mechanical
Beams Default reinforcement Upper cover Upper Stirrup Lower Lower cover Defines thickness of concrete cover at the upper surface. Specifies diameter and type of reinforcement at the upper surface. Specifies diameter and type of reinforcement for stirrups (links). Specifies diameter and type of reinforcement at the lower surface. Defines thickness of concrete cover at the lower surface.
87
Calculation parameters are divided into several groups: general parameters (see below), parameters for columns (see below), parameters for beams (see below), parameters for CDD/PGNL calculation (see separate chapter), parameters for interaction diagram (see separate chapter). General parameters Number of iteration steps Precision of iteration For stiffness and crack-proof calculation use reinforcement Defines the maximum numbers of steps, used to find the state of equilibrium in a section. Defines the numerical precision in percentages. As,tot or 0 (As, tot for As,req > 0 and 0 for As,req = 0) The total area of reinforcement is used for the calculation on condition that the design function has been already run and that the program has already calculated the required area of reinforcement. Otherwise, zero value is used (even if the user has manually inserted some reinforcement bars). The total area of reinforcement is the sum of the user-defined reinforcement (through basic reinforcement, through reinforcement zones/regions or through free bars) and calculated additional required reinforcement. The additional required reinforcement may be zero, if the user has already inputted enough user-defined reinforcement. IMPORTANT: Keep in mind, that the function calculating the required areas of reinforcement MUST HAVE BEEN run before. Otherwise, the user-defined reinforcement is ignored and ZERO value is used. As, user The user-defined reinforcement is used for the calculation. The term user-defined
88
General parameters
reinforcement covers the basic reinforcement specified in member data, reinforcement bars inputted through reinforcement templates in reinforcement zones (1D members) or regions (2D members), and free bars of reinforcement. In order: [ As, user ]; [ As,tot or 0] If there is any user-defined reinforcement, it is used, otherwise, the total reinforcement is used (which in fact means the calculated required area of reinforcement). Remember, that for the second option, the design function must have been already run. In order: [ As,tot or 0]; [ As, user] If the design of reinforcement has been already performed and the required area of reinforcement has been already calculated, it is used. Otherwise, the user-defined reinforcement is used. Check percentage of longitudinal reinforcement Check percentage of shear reinforcement If this option is ON, the calculation procedure takes account of the defined reinforcement percentage for longitudinal reinforcement. If this option is ON, the calculation procedure takes account of the defined shear reinforcement number of legs, link diameter, spacing of the links, and minimal percentage of reinforcement.
Parameters for columns Advanced settings This parameter can simplify the input for those users who calculate simple problems and need to adjust just a few basic parameters. If ON, all the items in the column setup part are available. If OFF, only the basic parameters are available. The less-common parameters are disabled. Corner design only The following cross-sections are supported: rectangular, L-section, T-section, I-section. The bars are designed only in corners of the cross-section. The calculation is iterative and diameter or area of reinforcement in corner is increased until the check is satisfied. Determine governing cross-section beforehand The user may determine that the design of reinforcement is carried out in the foot and head of the column. Otherwise, the calculation is carried out in all intermediate sections as well, which may be time
89
consuming and bring no profit in terms of accuracy. The subsequent check of the designed reinforcement is performed in all sections. Buckling data The option activates a pseudo-linear calculation of buckling for 1D member (the genuine 2nd order analysis is the non-linear one, i.e. using the Timoshenko or NewtonRaphson iteration). If this option is ON, a special algorithm is started on the background that evaluates bar imperfections and 1st + 2nd order deflections which leads to an approximation of the 1st order bending moments by increased 2nd order moments. DIN 1045-1 introduces for this situation the concept of "Model column method" and NORM calls it "Spare bar method". Each national standard implemented in Scia Engineer uses its analysis path that takes into account the stipulations of the particular standard. Optimize the number of bars in c-s for biaxial calculation If ON, the number of bars in the cross-section is optimised to achieve the minimum number of bars with the cross-section still passing the check.

Biaxial bending Safety factor for biaxial bending formula (see above) Calculate reinforcement using Specifies the safety factor used in the interaction formula above. Default value = 1.4. real area of reinforcement If this option is ON, the reinforcement is calculated from the real sectional area of individual bars.
90
General parameters
delta area of reinforcement If this option is ON, the reinforcement is calculated using the user defined area (delta). Optimisation method for number of bars in cross-section Ratio y/z If the option is ON, the number on bars in section is minimised so that their minimal number is used. automatic If ON, the ratio of y-reinforcement to zreinforcement is determined automatically. manual If ON, the user specifies the ratio of reinforcement in y-direction to reinforcement in z-direction. Parameters for beams Calculate compression reinforcement Moment capping at supports If the compression reinforcement is necessary, check this box to provide for its calculation. Bending moment diagram may be "shifted" in supports in order to provide for reduction of support bending moments. The reduction depends on the type of support. For supports of Column type, the support dimension is calculated from the columns cross-section. For standard supports the user must input the support size (see the chapter dealing with point supports in the main reference manual). If reduction of shear force in supports is allowed, check this box. at the face (support/column) the reduced shear force is determined at the support face at the effective depth from the face (support/column) the reduced shear force is determined in the effective length from the support face Parameters for 2D elements Control of tiny structural depth/height If ON, the check is active for the shear proof according to Art. 3.4.2(5) (bending design)) and Art. 3.4.9.5(2) (Shear proof) and 11.3(1) (Deep beams). According to Art. 11.3(2)
Deep beam control in Walls and shells
91
CDD/PGNL parameters
CDD Deformation: Max. displacement of beam Deformation: Max. displacement of plate General Coefficient for reinforcement (amount of reinforcement can be increased for the CDD and PGNL calculation) If the PNL calculation is performed for the Required As, the user may modify the amount of calculated reinforcement by multiplying it by this coefficient. Maximal deflection of a beam for the serviceability limit state (defined relatively to the length of the beam). Maximal deflection of a slab for the serviceability limit state (the absolute value).
Interaction diagram
The parameters for interaction diagram are: Division of strain Calculation precision for one of the diagram "branches". The value means how many times the strain plane is readjusted from the position of section under full compression to the position of section under full tension. Default value = 180. The value influences the accuracy and the speed of calculation. See Figure 1 below. Vertical division Number of directions in which the diagram is calculated (number of "branches"). Default value = 72. See Figure 1 below. Horizontal division The value affecting the accuracy of vertical sections. Because "branches" of the diagram are not generally planar, the calculation of vertical sections is based on horizontal sections. Default value = 100. See Figure 1 below. Method of check The interaction diagram shows the ultimate bearing capacity. The following approaches can be applied: Nu assuming Md is constant Mu assuming Nd is constant NuMu assuming eccentricity is constant Muy assuming Mdz is constant
92
General parameters
Muz assuming Mdy is constant Default value = Muy. See Figure 2 below. Figure 1 - Divisions
93

Safety factors Gamma c compression Partial safety factor for concrete. It is applied to determine the design strength of concrete NORM B 4700: Art. 3.1(2), Table 1 Default value = 1.5 Gamma s Partial safety factor for reinforcement. It is applied to determine the design strength of the reinforcement steel both in compression and tension. NORM B 4700: Art. 3.1(2), Table 1 Default value = 1.15 Concrete Max. compression strain of concrete The limiting compressive strain for concrete. NORM B 4700, Art. 3.4.1.1(4), Bild 7 Default = -0.0035. Strain at beginning of plastic deformation Strain at which the concrete starts to behave plastically in the bi-linear stress-strain diagram. NORM B 4700, Art. 3.4.1.1(4), Bild 7 Default = -0.0020. Steel Max. tension strain of steel The limiting steel strain. Default value = 0.010

The parameters in the Shear group control the calculation of shear reinforcement. 1D structures - beams Method of shear proof Constant strut inclination Choose this option to calculate shear reinforcement according a non-standard method which assumes the strut inclination with 45. Choose this option to calculate shear reinforcement according to the variable strut inclination method. ONORM B 4700: Art. 3.4.4.2
Variable strut inclination
94
General parameters Variable strut inclination method Minimum angle of the concrete strut with the longitudinal axis The lower limiting value for the angle between the concrete strut and the longitudinal beam axis. NORM B 4700: Art. 3.4.4.2(7), Gl. (23) Default value = 31 (tan 0.6) Maximum angle of the concrete strut with the longitudinal axis The upper limiting value for the angle between the concrete strut and the longitudinal beam axis. NORM B 4700: Art. 3.4.4.2(7), Gl. (23) Default value = 58 (tan 1.6) 2D structures - slabs Shear mode At most 50% of traction reinf. is anchored before the support More than 50% of traction reinf. is anchored before the support Shear strut inclination control Variable strut inclination method Choose this option to calculate shear reinforcement according to the variable strut inclination method. ONORM B 4700: Art. 3.4.4.2 Constant strut inclination method Choose this option to calculate shear reinforcement according a non-standard method which assumes the strut inclination with 45.
Shear effect upon the net reinforcement Shear reinforcement in a net reinforcement may have an effect on the results ("shear effect"). These parameters control the way this effect is taken into account. no shear effect upon the net reinforcement No shear effect are considered according to Art. 3.4.4.2(15). Structural measures are considered according to Art. 3.4.4.2(16). shear effect will be considered in SR2 only shear effect will be generally be considered Shear effect are considered in Shear Region 2 only according to Art. 3.4.4.2(15), Fig.19. Shear effect are considered generally, i.e. also in Shear Region 1 (non-standard procedure for special investigations).
95

Coefficients This group defines parameters depending on the position of the column. The first four coefficients are used to determine the minimal bending moment per unit length in X and Y direction. The values are used in accordance with Table 6 of NORM B 4700. Column position Moment coefficient: ex/bef top ex/bef bottom ey/bef top ey/bef bottom ke Coefficient that takes into account the eccentricity of loading. (NORM B 4700: Art. 3.4.5.2 Default values: acc. to (43) Loaded area Shape circular, with diameter not exceeding ... Loaded area of circular shape with the maximal diameter equal to the input value. NORM B 4700: Art. 3.4.5.1 Default value = 3.5 * d Shape rectangular, with perimeter not exceeding ... Loaded area of rectangular shape with the maximal perimeter equal to the input value. NORM B 4700: Art. 3.4.5.1 Default value = 11 * d Shape rectangular, max length/width Loaded area of rectangular shape with the length/width ratio not exceeding the input value. NORM B 4700: Art. 3.4.5.1 Default value = 2 Distance between the perimeter of the loaded area and the edge of the opening not exceeding ... The maximum value of the shortest distance between the perimeter of the loaded area and the edge of opening. If the distance is exceeded, the part of the critical section contained between the two tangents drawn from the centre of the loaded are to the opening edge is taken as ineffective. NORM B 4700: Art. 3.4.5.4(3) Default value = 6 * d Shear reinforcement Min thickness of plate Minimal thickness of a plate where the shear reinforcement is created. NORM B 4700: Art. 3.4.5.3(2) The position of the column is selected. Individual moment coefficients. NORM B 4700, Art. 3.4.5.3(4) Default values: acc. to Table 7
96
General parameters
Default value = 200 mm ks NORM B 4700: Art. 3.4.5.3(2) formula (45) Default value = 0.5 Shear resistance Coefficient of VRdc The coefficient for calculating the shear resistance VRdc. NORM B 4700: Art. 3.4.5.3(2) Default value = 1.4
Columns Longitudinal reinforcement Min. bar distance The minimum clear distance between individual parallel bars (for Design and Drawing). NORM B 4700: Art.5.2.(2) Default value = 20 mm Max. bar distance The maximum clear distance between individual parallel bars (for Design and Drawing). NORM B 4700: Art. 9.2.2(3) Min. number of bars in circular column The minimum numbers of bars in a column of a circular cross-section. NORM B 4700: Art. 9.2.2(2) Default value = 6 Min. bar diameter The minimum diameter of bars in columns. NORM B 4700: Art. 9.2.2(1), Tab. 17 Default value = 12 mm Stirrups (links) Min. stirrup diameter Max. longitudinal distance between stirrups Max longitudinal distance between stirrups in place where columns is connected with beam or slab Specifies the minimal stirrup diameter. NORM B 4700: Art. 9.2.3(1) The meaning is clear from the item name. NORM B 4700: Art. 9.2.3(4) The meaning is clear from the item name. NORM B 4700, Art. 9.2.3(4) Default value = 0,6 x max D
97
Proiectare structuri de beton Beams Longitudinal reinforcement Min bar distance The minimum clear distance between individual bars (for Design and Drawing). NORM B 4700, Art. 5.2(2) Default value = 20 mm Max. bar distance The maximum clear distance between individual parallel bars (for Design and Drawing). Default value = 300 mm Stirrups (links) Maximum transverse distance between stirrups Maximum longitudinal spacing of stirrups The maximal transverse spacing of legs must not exceed 800 mm or d. NORM B 4700: Art. 3.4.4.2(11) The maximal longitudinal spacing of successive links is related to the shear force (Vsd). NORM B 4700: Art. 3.4.4.2(11) Calculation (columns and beams) This group contains switches for checks that can be applied during design and drawing of reinforcement. Check min. bar distance Check max. bar distance 2D Structures Reinforcement Min. transverse reinforcement percentage Min. net reinforcement percentage (in general) Automatic calculation of minimum pressure reinforcement Minimal amount of transverse reinforcement, determined as a percentage of main reinforcement, Default value = 20%. Minimum percentage of longitudinal reinforcement, unconditionally. Default value = 0%. Shells and Walls only: If ON, the corresponding reinforcement is calculated automatically. NORM B 4700: Art. 3.4.9.2, Eq. (60) Min pressure reinforcement percentage Shells and Walls only: Minimum part of concrete cross-section that should act as compression reinforcement. Default value = 0%. Check for minimal distance of bars during design and drawing. Check for maximal distance of bars during design and drawing.
98
General parameters
Plates only: Definition of the maximum percentage of reinforcement in the bending pressure zone related to the concrete pressure force. Compare with SIA 162, Art. 3.24.16 Default value = 50%.
Automatic calculation of minimum tension reinforcement Min tension reinforcement percentage on face +Zp Min tension reinforcement percentage on face Zp
If ON, the corresponding reinforcement is calculated automatically. NORM B 4700: Art. 3.4.9.4(1), Eq. (61) Minimum percentage of tension reinforcement at the surface with positive Z co-ordinate (in the local coordinate system of the 2D member. Default value = 0%. Minimum percentage of tension reinforcement at the surface with negative Z co-ordinate (in the local coordinate system of the 2D member) or at each of the Wall faces, respectively. . Default value = 0%. Maximal part of concrete cross-section that should act as reinforcement. NORM B 4700: Art. 3.4.9.2 and/or Art. 3.4.9.3 Default value = 8%. If ON, the corresponding reinforcement is calculated automatically. NORM B 4700, Art. 3.4.9.4(2), Eq. (62) Minimal part of concrete cross-section that should act as shear reinforcement. Default value = 0.11%.
Automatic calculation of min shear reinforcement Min shear reinforcement
Special program restriction Virtual strut reduction factor It considers the diminished actual concrete strength in a 2D cracked continuum. Values lower or equal to 100 are valid only. (100 % = full concrete strength).

Creep Creep coefficient The value of creep coefficient used for the calculation of effective tangential concrete modulus of elasticity that is valid during the physically non-linear calculation for "creep" combination.
99

1D structures w lim The value specifies the maximal permissible crack width. NORM B 4700 : Art. 4.2.1(2) 2D structures Maximum allowable crack width crack width on face Zp+ / ZpMaximal permissible crack width at the surface with positive / negative Z co-ordinate (in the local co-ordinate system of the plate).
If the value is set to zero, the crack proof is nor performed for that surface. Limit bar distance bar distance on face Zp+ / ZpMaximal allowable distance between reinforcement bars at the surface with positive / negative Z co-ordinate (in the local co-ordinate system of the plate).
Load case processing attribute Load case attribute The user selects the type of load case that causes the appearance of cracks. The load causing cracks can be due to prevailingly external load or internally imposed deformation.
Concrete tension strength fct,eff in early stage of hardening In percent of fct The effective tension strength of concrete in percent of the mean tension strength fctm. Value of zero means the same as 100% (default value), i.e. fct,eff=fctm. NORM B 4700: Art. 4.2.1(2)
Design and drawing

Parameters for Design and drawing (formerly REDES) are divided into several groups Design and drawing Bend reinforcement Max. number of stirrup bendings Specifies the maximal number of bends in one stirrup. If the user exceeds this number, the program issues a warning. In practice, most of bending equipment allows up to seven bends in a single stirrup.
100
General parameters
Parameters controlling the input of practical reinforcement Divide longitudinal reinforcement per span Do not allow overlapping of stirrups No. of division in span for longitudinal reinforcement While the shear reinforcement is always divided by individual spans (i.e. one zone of shear reinforcement cannot contain two spans), the longitudinal reinforcement does not have to be. The user can decide whether the longitudinal reinforcement passes through several spans, or whether it is divided by individual spans. Normally, overlapping of stirrups is not desired. However, for example in phased cross-sections this may be necessary (one stirrup shape in the web enters also the flange, and the flange has its own stirrups, which overlap with the web stirrups). This parameter is accessible only if Divide longitudinal reinforcement per span is not selected. If the reinforcement passes several spans of a member with variable cross-section, the program checks whether the reinforcement is still inside of the cross-section. This parameter defines how detailed is this verification. The location of reinforcement is verified in each N-th of each span with N specified by this item. This parameter ensures that the length of stirrup zones is realistic. The zone cannot be shorter than the value defined in this item. This parameter ensures that the length of main reinforcement bars is realistic. The bar cannot be shorter than the value defined in this item. If the program calculates a bar shorter than this value, the bar is not created. If the user inputs manually a bar that is shorter than this value, the bar is not created.
Minimum length for stirrup reinforcement Minimum length for longitudinal reinforcement
Distance of the first stirrup from beginning or end of zone It is possible to control the distance of the first stirrup in a zone from the beginning (or end) of that zone. the pictures below the table. Edge with support This parameter specifies the distance of the first stirrup from the zone end-point in the case that the zone end is in a support. Half of stirrup distance The distance is equal to a half of normal stirrup distance in the zone. Half of stirrup diameter The distance is equal to a half of stirrup diameter. By user The distance is specified by user. User value for edge with support Edge without support If the distance of the first stirrup is to be defined by user, it is done in this item. This parameter specifies the distance of the first stirrup from the zone end-point in the case that the zone end is without supports. Half of stirrup distance The distance is equal to a half of normal stirrup distance in the zone.
101
Half of stirrup diameter The distance is equal to a half of stirrup diameter. By user The distance is specified by user. User value for edge without support If the distance of the first stirrup is to be defined by user, it is done in this item.
Let us have a two-span beam with supports as in the following picture.
Let us assume that the distance of stirrups at the edge with support is set to 5 cm and the distance at the edge without support is set to "half of stirrup distance". Further, let us assume that the default stirrup distance is set to 30 cm. If no special requirements are specified, the program creates two stirrup zones with the following spacing of stirrups:
The default value for the distance between stirrups is set by the program to 300mm. It is not possible to change it in the Setup dialogue. However, it can be modified in the Member data settings. Bending This table defines minimal diameters for rounding of stirrups. These values depend on material and stirrup diameter.
Hooks
102
General parameters
Warning and errors

SIA 263
Design defaults
These parameters are used for the design of minimum required reinforcement if no member data have yet been defined on particular members. General Concrete cover Use min concrete cover User defined concrete cover Concrete cover advanced settings Bar diameter Defines the diameter of the reinforcement The minimal values of cover based on detailing rules specified in the code are used. The user may input the thickness of cover layer.
103
bar. Stone grain diameter Environmental class Soil contact Specifies the size of the aggregate. Specifies the environmental class. Various type of soil contact are possible: No soil contact Direct contact with soil Direct contact with prepared soil At the bottom of the dialogue, the calculated cover size is shown. Beams Default reinforcement Upper cover Upper Stirrup Lower Lower cover Defines thickness of concrete cover at the upper surface. Specifies diameter and type of reinforcement at the upper surface. Specifies diameter and type of reinforcement for stirrups (links). Specifies diameter and type of reinforcement at the lower surface. Defines thickness of concrete cover at the lower surface.
Columns
Default reinforcement Concrete cover Main Stirrup Defines the thickness of concrete cover. Specifies diameter and type of main reinforcement. Specifies diameter and type of reinforcement for stirrups (links).
Note: Item Concrete cover is accessible only if User-defined concrete cover has been selected.
2D structures and slabs Default reinforcement Upper cover Reinforcement Upper Defines thickness of concrete cover at the upper surface. Specifies the type of reinforcement. Specifies diameter of reinforcement for the upper surface.
104
General parameters
Lower Lower cover
Specifies diameter of reinforcement for the lower surface. Defines thickness of concrete cover at the lower surface.
Punching
Default reinforcement Reinforcement Support data Support shape Column position Default distance Specifies the default distance. The column position is defined according to the number of edges intersected by a fictitious circle drawn around the node (node = the centre of the circle). The radius of this circle is defined by the Default distance parameter, e.g. 6 = 6 x plate thickness. Default unbraced types (columns and beams only) If the option is ON, the sway frame is considered. This is the default setting that is used if: the user has not defined this value at the beam directly (in the buckling lengths settings dialogue), or if the corresponding parameters in the buckling lengths settings dialogue is set to "Settings". Y-Y Z-Z Sway in YY direction. Sway in ZZ direction. Defines the shape of the support. Selects the type of punching reinforcement.
Calculation parameters are divided into several groups: general parameters (see below), parameters for columns (see below), parameters for beams (see below), parameters for CDD/PGNL calculation (see separate chapter), parameters for interaction diagram (see separate chapter).
105
Proiectare structuri de beton General parameters
Number of iteration steps Precision of iteration For stiffness and crack-proof calculation use reinforcement
Defines the maximum numbers of steps, used to find the state of equilibrium in a section. Defines the numerical precision in percentages. As,tot or 0 (As, tot for As,req > 0 and 0 for As,req = 0) The total area of reinforcement is used for the calculation on condition that the design function has been already run and that the program has already calculated the required area of reinforcement. Otherwise, zero value is used (even if the user has manually inserted some reinforcement bars). The total area of reinforcement is the sum of the user-defined reinforcement (through basic reinforcement, through reinforcement zones/regions or through free bars) and calculated additional required reinforcement. The additional required reinforcement may be zero, if the user has already inputted enough user-defined reinforcement. IMPORTANT: Keep in mind, that the function calculating the required areas of reinforcement MUST HAVE BEEN run before. Otherwise, the user-defined reinforcement is ignored and ZERO value is used. As, user The user-defined reinforcement is used for the calculation. The term user-defined reinforcement covers the basic reinforcement specified in member data, reinforcement bars inputted through reinforcement templates in reinforcement zones (1D members) or regions (2D members), and free bars of reinforcement. In order: [ As, user ]; [ As,tot or 0] If there is any user-defined reinforcement, it is used, otherwise, the total reinforcement is used (which in fact means the calculated required area of reinforcement). Remember, that for the second option, the design function must have been already run. In order: [ As,tot or 0]; [ As, user] If the design of reinforcement has been already performed and the required area of reinforcement has been already calculated, it is used. Otherwise, the user-defined reinforcement is used.
106
General parameters
Check percentage of longitudinal reinforcement Check percentage of shear reinforcement
If this option is ON, the calculation procedure takes account of the defined reinforcement percentage for longitudinal reinforcement. If this option is ON, the calculation procedure takes account of the defined shear reinforcement number of legs, link diameter, spacing of the links, and minimal percentage of reinforcement.
Parameters for columns Advanced settings This parameter can simplify the input for those users who calculate simple problems and need to adjust just a few basic parameters. If ON, all the items in the column setup part are available. If OFF, only the basic parameters are available. The less-common parameters are disabled. Corner design only The following cross-sections are supported: rectangular, L-section, T-section, I-section. The bars are designed only in corners of the cross-section. The calculation is iterative and diameter or area of reinforcement in corner is increased until the check is satisfied. Determine governing cross-section beforehand The user may determine that the design of reinforcement is carried out in the foot and head of the column. Otherwise, the calculation is carried out in all intermediate sections as well, which may be time consuming and bring no profit in terms of accuracy. The subsequent check of the designed reinforcement is performed in all sections. The option activates a pseudo-linear calculation of buckling for 1D member (the genuine 2nd order analysis is the non-linear one, i.e. using the Timoshenko or NewtonRaphson iteration). If this option is ON, a special algorithm is started on the background that evaluates bar imperfections and 1st + 2nd order deflections which leads to an approximation of the 1st order bending moments by increased 2nd order moments. DIN 1045-1 introduces for this situation the concept of "Model column method" and NORM calls it "Spare bar method". Each national standard implemented in Scia Engineer uses its analysis path that takes into account the stipulations of the particular standard.
Buckling data
107
Calculation method Uni-axial bending calculation Bi-axial bending calculation (interaction formula) Automatic determination - uniaxial bending calculation if ratio of biaxial moment is less then The largest of bending moments My, Mz will be taken into consideration. The smaller one will be ignored. Both My and Mz are taken into account. The design is carried out using interaction formula (My/Myu)x + (Mz/Mzu)x < 1 where x is the safety factor (see below). If the ratio of one bending moment to the other along the whole beam length is smaller than the input value, then the beam is considered to be subject to uni-axial bending. Otherwise, if at least one cross-section is found where the ratio is greater than the input value, the biaxial approach is applied.
Biaxial bending Safety factor for biaxial bending formula (see above) Calculate reinforcement using Specifies the safety factor used in the interaction formula above. Default value = 1.4. real area of reinforcement If this option is ON, the reinforcement is calculated from the real sectional area of individual bars. delta area of reinforcement If this option is ON, the reinforcement is calculated using the user defined area (delta). Optimisation method for number of bars in cross-section Ratio y/z If the option is ON, the number on bars in section is minimised so that their minimal number is used. automatic If ON, the ratio of y-reinforcement to zreinforcement is determined automatically. manual If ON, the user specifies the ratio of reinforcement in y-direction to reinforcement in z-direction. Assumed irreversible deformation of concrete eps (c alpha) The strain is to be defined by the user. It could also be calculated by the program but The effect of creep and shrinkage is given by
108
General parameters
this would imply even more additional input. Moreover, using a fixed value gives already pretty good results. So it is left out for now. More accurate calculation could be done by recalculating the c factor, but this will be available in future versions. Parameters for beams Check max depth of compression zone Calculate compression reinforcement Check condition If ON, the relative compression zone height ksi = x/d is limited. See Ultimate limit state If the compression reinforcement is necessary, check this box to provide for its calculation. There is a condition limiting the maximal force in the reinforcement that prevents the concrete from crushing. The condition Fs<=1/2 Nc is obsolete; nevertheless it is kept in the program for "user compatibility". It is inactive by default. Moment capping at supports Bending moment diagram may be "shifted" in supports in order to provide for reduction of support bending moments. The reduction depends on the type of support. For supports of Column type, the support dimension is calculated from the columns cross-section. For standard supports the user must input the support size (see the chapter dealing with point supports in the main reference manual).
CDD/PGNL parameters
CDD Max. displacement of beam Maximal deflection of a beam for the serviceability limit state (defined relatively to the length of the beam).
Interaction diagram
The parameters for interaction diagram are: Division of strain Calculation precision for one of the diagram "branches". The value means how many times the strain plane is readjusted from the position of section under full compression to the position of section under full tension. Default value = 180. The value influences the accuracy and the speed of calculation. See Figure 1 below.
109
Vertical division
Number of directions in which the diagram is calculated (number of "branches"). Default value = 72. See Figure 1 below.
Horizontal division
The value affecting the accuracy of vertical sections. Because "branches" of the diagram are not generally planar, the calculation of vertical sections is based on horizontal sections. Default value = 100. See Figure 1 below.
Method of check
The interaction diagram shows the ultimate bearing capacity. The following approaches can be applied: Nu assuming Md is constant Mu assuming Nd is constant NuMu assuming eccentricity is constant Muy assuming Mdz is constant Muz assuming Mdy is constant Default value = Muy. See Figure 2 below.
110
General parameters

Safety factors Gamma c compression Partial safety factor for concrete. SIA 262: Art. 2.3.2.6 Default value = 1.5 Gamma s Partial safety factor for reinforcement steel. SIA 262: Art. 2.3.2.6 Default value = 1.15 Limit bending pressure zone ratio Relative depth of the compression zone ksi =x/d under prevailing bending: SIA 262: Art. 4.1.4.2.5 Default value = 0.35 Concrete Max. compression strain of concrete The limiting compressive strain for concrete. SIA 262: Art. 4.2.1.4, Tab. 8 Default = -0.0030. Strain at beginning of plastic deformation Strain at which concrete starts to behave plastically in the bi-linear stress-strain diagram. SIA 262: Art. 4.2.1.4, Tab. 8 Default = -0.0020.
111
Proiectare structuri de beton Steel Max. tension strain of steel The limiting steel strain. SIA 262: Art. 4.2.2.1, Tab. 9 Default = according to steel class
Ultimate limit state - Punching

Coefficients In this group, the coefficients that depend on the position of the column can be defined. The first four coefficients are used to calculate the minimum bending moments per unit length in the x and y direction. Column position Moment coefficient eta_x top Moment coefficient eta_x bot Moment coefficient eta_y top Moment coefficient eta_y bot Minimum main reinforcement (mRd/m0d) Check for bending resistance of the slab: Check: mod is comparison bending moment, mrd is the moment of resistance. SIA 262: Art. 4.3.6.4.3 Load eccentricity You can choose one of the following options: blocked rotation, free rotation, calculate, user defined. From SIA 262, Art. 4.3.6.2.6 For inner columns between regular spans, rigidly connected, without horizontal loading, ke = 0.9 can be used. Practically: If rotation of support is free (i.e. there no moment), use ke = 1. If rotation is blocked, ke is calculated according to the code. If rotation is blocked but the value of Md is not known, the following approximation can be done, provided that the spans are equal (lmax/lmin<1.25) and there are no horizontal loads or imposed displacement: o For internal columns, use ke The actual position of the column can be selected here. Individual moment coefficients.
112
General parameters
= 0.9, o For edge and corner columns, calculate u according to the figure below.
Loaded area Distance of the control to the support Angle for next critical section Distance between the perimeter of the loaded area and the edge of the opening does not exceed Test maximum length critical sections Maximum length critical sections Test maximum length of side for rectangular shape Shape rectangular, maximum length of side Location of the critical section. SIA 262: Art. 4.3.6.2.1, Fig. 19 Angle, measured from the foot, where the next critical section emerges. The distance when the openings are not taken into account any more. SIA 262: Art. 4.3.6.2.3, Fig. 20 Default: 6 x d If ON, the maximum length of the critical section is tested. Check of maximal length of critical section. Default: 16 x d If ON, the maximum length of side for rectangular shape is tested. Maximal length at the edge of long sections that can be taken into account. SIA 262: Art. 4.3.6.2.4, Fig. 21 Default: 3 x d Check for collapsing avoidance From SIA 262, Art. 4.3.6.7.1 In order to avoid collapsing of structure in case of unexpected punching, the reinforcement layers crossing the support surface that are compressed by bending must be at least
This gives the minimum reinforcement area that must cross the support surface in both directions on the face of the slab that is
113
compressed by bending, i.e. usually the lower layer for slabs and the upper layer for foundations. Shear reinforcement Maximum increase of resistance due to reinforcement From SIA 262, Art 4.3.6.5.3 Even after adding punching reinforcement, the punching resistance cannot be higher than
Maximum value of fsd
From SIA 262, Art. 4.3.6.5.1

The parameters in the Shear group control the calculation of shear reinforcement. 1D structures - beams Shear coefficients Inclination of concrete struts From SIA 262, 4.3.3.3.2 By default 45. Only in non-over-tensioned cross-sections reduce the angle. Inclination of stirrups Factor for compressive strength of concrete struts (kc) Factor of calculation of z Distance of the control section from the support edge Default value = right angle. From SIA 262, 4.2.1.7, default value
From SIA 262, 4.3.3.4.2 From SIA 262, 4.3.3.4.1 On supports and in the case of introduction of concentrated loads, the check section will be taken at a distance from the edge of the support/load.
2D structures Shear mode The continuity of reinforcement round the proof section affects the elementary resistance to shear force VRd (coefficient kv). Longitudinal reinforcement is staggered Control of the shear proof by the structural option continuity of reinforcement". Staggering of reinforcement in the zone ? d round the proof section implies 50% augmentation of the coefficient kv.
114
General parameters
SIA 262, Art. 4.3.3.2.3, Gl. (32), (33) Longitudinal reinforcement is constant Constant reinforcement round the proof section does not imply any effect upon the coefficient kv SIA 262, Art. 4.3.3.2.3, Gl. (32), (33) Default setting. Shear strut inclination control fixed strut inclination method Choose this option to calculate shear reinforcement under the overall assumption of constant strut inclination of 45. SIA 262, Art. 4.3.3.3.2 variable strut inclination method This option initiates the standard mode assuming variable virtual strut inclination. SIA 262, Art. 4.3.3.3.2 Shear effect upon the net reinforcement The Shear force affects the net reinforcement (Scia Engineer introduced the notion of "Shear Effect" for this phenomenon). This option controls the way this effect is taken into account. no Shear Effect upon the net reinforcement The effect of shear force upon the longitudinal reinforcement is not considered. Instead, constructive (user induced) measures are taken instead of exact calculation. SIA 262, Art. 4.3.3.4.8 no Shear Effect upon the net reinforcement This is the standard case of Shear Effect: the impact upon the net reinforcement takes place if shear reinforcement is statically required only (s.c. Shear Region 2) SIA 262, Art. 4.3.3.4.8, Art. 4.3.3.4.9, Gl. (42) Shear effect will be considered in SR2 only The shear effect is formally considered also in SR1 (i.e. when no shear reinforcement statically required) This case is nonstandard! (reserved for special tests and investigations)!
Columns Longitudinal reinforcement Min. reinforcement percentage Max. reinforcement percentage The minimum reinforcement percentage. Default value = 0.6% The maximum reinforcement percentage. Default value = 8%
115
Min. bar distance
The minimum clear distance between individual parallel bars (for Design and Drawing). Default value = 20 mm The maximum clear distance between individual parallel bars (for Design and Drawing). The minimum numbers of bars in a column of a circular cross-section. Default value = 6 The minimum diameter of bars in columns. Default value = 8 mm
Max. bar distance
Min. number of bars in circular column Min. bar diameter Thickness of outer layer for calculation of reinforcement percentage Stirrups Maximum stirrups spacing Maximum stirrups spacing Check against crosssection dimensions Beams Stirrups Maximum longitudinal distance between stirrups Maximum transverse distance between stirrups Max. stirrups spacing Min. stirrup percentage Max. thickness of the web for the calculation of the ratio
Default value = 200 mm
Distance between stirrups in multiple of diameters. Distance between stirrups in mm. Check of dimensions of the section.
The maximal longitudinal spacing of successive links is related to the shear force (Vsd). The maximal transverse spacing of legs in a series of shear links is related to the shear force (Vsd). self-explanatory self-explanatory Stirrups Maximum spacing: 25 times the diameter of bars. Minimum reinforcement ratio: 0.2%. Maximum thickness of the web for the calculation of the ratio: 400mm. Webs thicker than 500mm will have multiple stirrups.
Multiple stirrups web thicker than
Condition for web thickness.
116
General parameters T-section Min. transversal reinf. Transverse reinforcement of the slab (Tsection). Minimum reinforcement ratio: 0.2% in relation to the slab. Calculation This group contains switches for checks that can be applied during design and drawing of reinforcement. Check min. bar distance Check max. bar distance 2D structures Reinforcement Min. transverse reinforcement percentage Minimum amount of transverse reinforcement, determined as a percentage of reinforcement in other reinforcement direction(s) at the same face. This control is active in ULS only, not in SLS! SIA 262, Art. 5.5.3.2 Default value = 20%. Min. net reinforcement percentage (in general) Min pressure reinforcement percentage Minimum percentage oflongitudinal reinforcement, unconditionally. Default value = 0%. Walls and Shells: If ON, the minimum pressure reinforcement (per cross-section) is calculated. SIA 262, Art. 5.5.4.3 Default value = 0.6%. Maximum percentage in bending pressure zone Plates only: Definition of the maximum percentage of reinforcement in the bending pressure zone related to the concrete pressure force Compare with SIA 162, Art. 3.24.16 Default value = 50%. Automatic calculation of minimum tension reinforcement If ON, the corresponding reinforcement is calculated automatically. The calculation is based on the requirement of the prevention of brittle fracture at the first crack appearance. SIA 262, Art. 4.4.2.3.9, Tab. 16/1 und Art. 4.4.2.3.10, Fig. 31 Min tension reinforcement percentage on face +Zp Shells and Plates only: Minimum percentage of tension reinforcement at the surface with positive Z co-ordinate (in the local co-ordinate system of the 2D Check for minimal distance of bars during design and drawing. Check for maximal distance of bars during design and drawing.
117
member). Default value = 0%. Min tension reinforcement percentage on face -Zp Minimum percentage of tension reinforcement at the surface with negative Z co-ordinate (in the local co-ordinate system of the 2D member) or at each of the Wall faces, respectively. Default value = 0%. Max reinforcement percentage in crosssection Maximum percentage of reinforcement any design point. SIA 262, Art. 3.4.9.2 or 3.4.9.3, resp. Default value = 8%. Min shear reinforcement Minimum percentage of shear reinforcement. The Norm does not stipulate any 2D shear minimum reinforcement! Default value: 0% Special program restriction Virtual strut reduction factor (parallel cracks) Diminishing of the actual concrete strength of a stiffening 2D continuum due to parallel cracks (coefficient kc per cent). SIA 262, Art. 4.2.1.7 Default value = 80%. Virtual strut reduction factor (general cracks) Diminishing of the actual concrete strength of a stiffening 2D continuum due to general cracks (coefficient kc per cent). SIA 262, Art. 4.2.1.7 Default value = 60%.

Creep Creep coefficient The value of creep coefficient used for the calculation of effective tangential concrete modulus of elasticity that is valid during the physically nonlinear calculation for creep combination.

1D structures Sigma S w lim Percentage of tension of the reinforcement. Default value = 100 %. Maximal permissible crack width.
118
General parameters
Default value = 0.3 mm. 2D structures Maximum bar distances Bar distance on face +Zp/-Zp Maximum allowable distance of reinforcement bars in one direction (for both faces separately)
Environment requirement level on face +Zp/-Zp The user specifies the characteristic load case type for the crack proof (for both faces separately): normal, elevated, critical.
SIA 262: Art. 4.4.2.3.4, Table 16 Default: normal Load case attribute Load case attribute The user specifies the characteristic load case type for the crack proof: quasi permanent external loads frequently appearing external loads imposed or constrained deformations SIA 262: Art. 4.4.2.3.4, Table 16
REDES
Hooks
Warning and errors

119
BAEL
Design defaults
These parameters are used for the design of minimum required reinforcement if no member data have yet been defined on particular members. General Concrete cover Use min concrete cover User defined concrete cover Concrete cover advanced settings Minimum concrete cover The minimum value can be adjusted according to the actual exposure conditions. The minimal values of cover based on detailing rules specified in the code are used. The user may input the thickness of cover layer.
At the bottom of the dialogue, the calculated cover size is shown. Beams Default reinforcement Upper cover Upper Stirrup Lower Lower cover Defines thickness of concrete cover at the upper surface. Specifies diameter and type of reinforcement at the upper surface. Specifies diameter and type of reinforcement for stirrups (links). Specifies diameter and type of reinforcement at the lower surface. Defines thickness of concrete cover at the lower surface.
Columns
Default reinforcement Concrete cover Main Stirrup Defines the thickness of concrete cover. Specifies diameter and type of main reinforcement. Specifies diameter and type of reinforcement for stirrups (links).
120
Note: Item Concrete cover is accessible only if User-defined concrete cover has been selected.
General parameters 2D structures and slabs Default reinforcement Upper cover Reinforcement Upper Lower Lower cover Defines thickness of concrete cover at the upper surface. Specifies the type of reinforcement. Specifies diameter of reinforcement for the upper surface. Specifies diameter of reinforcement for the lower surface. Defines thickness of concrete cover at the lower surface.
Punching
Default reinforcement Reinforcement Support data Support shape Column position Default distance Specifies the support default distance from edges. The column position is defined according to the number of edges intersected by a fictitious circle drawn around the node (node = the centre of the circle). The radius of this circle is defined by the Default distance parameter, e.g. 6 = 6 x plate thickness. Default unbraced types (columns and beams only) If the option is ON, the sway frame is considered. This is the default setting that is used if: the user has not defined this value at the beam directly (in the buckling lengths settings dialogue), or if the corresponding parameters in the buckling lengths settings dialogue is set to "Settings". Y-Y Z-Z Sway in YY direction. Sway in ZZ direction. Defines the shape of the support. Selects the type of punching reinforcement.
121
Calculation parameters are divided into several groups: general parameters (see below), parameters for columns (see below), parameters for beams (see below), parameters for CDD/PGNL calculation (see separate chapter), parameters for interaction diagram (see separate chapter). General parameters Number of iteration steps Precision of iteration For stiffness and crack-proof calculation use reinforcement Defines the maximum numbers of steps, used to find the state of equilibrium in a section. Defines the numerical precision in percentages. As,tot or 0 (As, tot for As,req > 0 and 0 for As,req = 0) The total area of reinforcement is used for the calculation on condition that the design function has been already run and that the program has already calculated the required area of reinforcement. Otherwise, zero value is used (even if the user has manually inserted some reinforcement bars). The total area of reinforcement is the sum of the user-defined reinforcement (through basic reinforcement, through reinforcement zones/regions or through free bars) and calculated additional required reinforcement. The additional required reinforcement may be zero, if the user has already inputted enough user-defined reinforcement. IMPORTANT: Keep in mind, that the function calculating the required areas of reinforcement MUST HAVE BEEN run before. Otherwise, the user-defined reinforcement is ignored and ZERO value is used. As, user The user-defined reinforcement is used for the calculation. The term user-defined reinforcement covers the basic reinforcement specified in member data, reinforcement bars inputted through reinforcement templates in reinforcement zones (1D members) or regions (2D members), and free bars of reinforcement. In order: [ As, user ]; [ As,tot or 0] If there is any user-defined reinforcement, it is used, otherwise, the total reinforcement is used (which in fact means the calculated required area of reinforcement). Remember, that for the second option, the design function must have been already run.
122
General parameters
In order: [ As,tot or 0]; [ As, user] If the design of reinforcement has been already performed and the required area of reinforcement has been already calculated, it is used. Otherwise, the user-defined reinforcement is used. Check percentage of longitudinal reinforcement Check percentage of shear reinforcement If this option is ON, the calculation procedure takes account of the defined reinforcement percentage for longitudinal reinforcement. If this option is ON, the calculation procedure takes account of the defined shear reinforcement number of legs, link diameter, spacing of the links, and minimal percentage of reinforcement.
Parameters for columns Advanced settings This parameter can simplify the input for those users who calculate simple problems and need to adjust just a few basic parameters. If ON, all the items in the column setup part are available. If OFF, only the basic parameters are available. The less-common parameters are disabled. Corner design only The following cross-sections are supported: rectangular, L-section, T-section, I-section. The bars are designed only in corners of the cross-section. The calculation is iterative and diameter or area of reinforcement in corner is increased until the check is satisfied. Determine governing cross-section beforehand The user may determine that the design of reinforcement is carried out in the foot and head of the column. Otherwise, the calculation is carried out in all intermediate sections as well, which may be time consuming and bring no profit in terms of accuracy. The subsequent check of the designed reinforcement is performed in all sections. The option activates a pseudo-linear calculation of buckling for 1D member (the genuine 2nd order analysis is the non-linear one, i.e. using the Timoshenko or NewtonRaphson iteration). If this option is ON, a special algorithm is started on the background that evaluates bar imperfections and 1st + 2nd order deflections which leads to an approximation of the 1st order bending moments by increased 2nd order moments.
Buckling data
123
DIN 1045-1 introduces for this situation the concept of "Model column method" and NORM calls it "Spare bar method". Each national standard implemented in Scia Engineer uses its analysis path that takes into account the stipulations of the particular standard. If ON, the number of bars in the cross-section is optimised to achieve the minimum number of bars with the cross-section still passing the check.
Calculation method Uni-axial bending calculation Bi-axial bending calculation (interaction formula) Automatic determination - uniaxial bending calculation if ratio of biaxial moment is less then The largest of bending moments My, Mz will be taken into consideration. The smaller one will be ignored. Both My and Mz are taken into account. The design is carried out using interaction formula (My/Myu)x + (Mz/Mzu)x < 1 where x is the safety factor (see below). If the ratio of one bending moment to the other along the whole beam length is smaller than the input value, then the beam is considered to be subject to uni-axial bending. Otherwise, if at least one cross-section is found where the ratio is greater than the input value, the biaxial approach is applied.
124
General parameters
Parameters for beams Calculate compression reinforcement Check support condition If the compression reinforcement is necessary, check this box to provide for its calculation. Check of minimal tensile reinforcement in a support. Support condition: At the support, the following reinforcement (in the tension zone) is needed:
Mu = bending moment at support Vu = shear force at support Shear force capping at supports If reduction of shear force in supports is allowed, check this box. at the face (support/column) the reduced shear force is determined at the support face at the effective depth from the face (support/column) the reduced shear force is determined in the effective length from the support face in the face (support/column) + factor x internal cantilever arm Shear reinforcement Parameters for 2D structures Control of tiny structural depths/heights Structural reinforcement of deep beam Load duration code Not yet implemented. Reserved for possible cross-section dimensions restrictions. Automatic calculation of minimum net reinforcement of deep beams according to Section E.5.4,2 Control Code for coefficient theta in the formula A.4.3,41 for design concrete compression strength representing the duration of load applied to structure: 0 - more than 24 h 1 - 1 to 24 h 2 - less than 1 h. Alpha = angle between stirrups and beam
Interaction diagram
The parameters for interaction diagram are:
125
Division of strain
Calculation precision for one of the diagram "branches". The value means how many times the strain plane is readjusted from the position of section under full compression to the position of section under full tension. Default value = 180. The value influences the accuracy and the speed of calculation. See Figure 1 below.
Vertical division
Number of directions in which the diagram is calculated (number of "branches"). Default value = 72. See Figure 1 below.
Horizontal division
The value affecting the accuracy of vertical sections. Because "branches" of the diagram are not generally planar, the calculation of vertical sections is based on horizontal sections. Default value = 100. See Figure 1 below.
Method of check
The interaction diagram shows the ultimate bearing capacity. The following approaches can be applied: Nu assuming Md is constant Mu assuming Nd is constant NuMu assuming eccentricity is constant Muy assuming Mdz is constant Muz assuming Mdy is constant Default value = Muy. See Figure 2 below.
126
General parameters

Safety factors Gamma c Partial safety factor for concrete used for calculation of the basic design shear resistance.
127
Default value = 1.5 Gamma s Theta (parameter for load duration) Partial safety factor for reinforcement steel. Definition of the Theta value according to the specification in the dialogue Parameters for 2D structures. The user can here redefine the value preset by the program.
Concrete Alpha Special concrete strength reduction coefficient alpha (default: 0.85). It implies the usage of the standard Norm value alpha = 0.85 for rectangular pressure zone shape
Ultimate limit state - Punching

Influence of longitudinal reinforcement The influence of slab reinforcement on punching resistance. If ON, different formula is used to determine the resistance without the effect of shear reinforcement.

Environment Region exposure Five different regions are available: Not exposed, Humid, Moderate, Non-moderate, Dry.

1D structures Crack condition You can choose from three options: Little harmful, Harmful, Very harmful.
128
General parameters
Columns Longitudinal reinforcement Min. reinforcement percentage Max. reinforcement percentage Min. bar distance The minimum tension reinforcement percentage. Default value = 0.2% The maximum reinforcement percentage. Default value = 5% The minimum clear distance between individual parallel bars (for Design and Drawing). Default value = 20 mm Max. bar distance The maximum clear distance between individual parallel bars (for Design and Drawing). Default value = 250 mm Min. number of bars in circular column The minimum numbers of bars in a column of a circular cross-section. Default value = 6 Stirrups Maximum long. distance between stirrups Defines the maximum longitudinal distance between stirrups. Default value = 400 mm
Beams Longitudinal reinforcement Min. bar distance The minimum clear distance between individual parallel bars (for Design and Drawing). Default value = 20 mm Max. bar distance The maximum clear distance between individual parallel bars (for Design and Drawing).
Stirrups Maximum longitudinal distance between stirrups The maximal longitudinal spacing of successive links is related to the shear force (Vsd).
Calculation This group contains switches for checks that can be applied during design and drawing of reinforcement.
129
Check min. bar distance Check max. bar distance Reinforcement Min. transverse reinforcement percentage Min. net reinforcement percentage (in general) Min pressure reinforcement percentage
Check for minimal distance of bars during design and drawing. Check for maximal distance of bars during design and drawing.
Minimal amount of transverse reinforcement, determined as a percentage of main reinforcement, Default value = 25%. Minimum percentage of longitudinal reinforcement, unconditionally. Default value = 0%. Shells and Walls only: Minimum percentage of compression reinforcement in a cross-section. BAEL 91/99, Art. A.8.1,1 Default value = 0,20%.
Plates only: Definition of the maximum pressure reinforcement percentage in the bending pressure zone related to the total pressure force BAEL 91/99, Art. A.4.1,2 & B.6.6.1 Default value = 40%.
Automatic calculation of minimum tension reinforcement
If ON, the corresponding reinforcement is calculated automatically. The calculation is based on the requirement of the prevention of brittle fracture at the first crack appearance. BAEL 91/99, Art. A.4.1,2. Shells and Plates only: Minimum percentage of tension reinforcement at the surface with positive Z co-ordinate (in the local co-ordinate system of the 2D member). BAEL 91/99, Art. B.6.4 Default value = 0%.
Min tension reinforcement percentage on face +Zp
Min tension reinforcement percentage on face -Zp
Minimum percentage of tension reinforcement at the surface with negative Z co-ordinate (in the local co-ordinate system of the 2D member) or at each of the Wall faces, respectively. BAEL 91/99, Art. B.6.4 Default value = 0%.
Maximum percentage of reinforcement any design point. BAEL 91/99, Art. A.8.1,1
130
General parameters
Default value = 5%. Special program restriction Virtual strut reduction factor It considers the diminished actual concrete strength in a 2D cracked continuum (100 % = full concrete strength). Default value = 80 %
REDES
Hooks
Warning and errors

BS 8110
Design defaults
Concrete cover advanced settings This dialogue serves two purposes. First, it enables the user to specify parameters that are required for a successful determination of a minimal cover. Second, it is a kind of calculator that shows the user what cover will be calculated by the program for specific characteristics (e.g. material) of individual members. Nominal maximal size of the aggregate self-explanatory
131
Environment
self-explanatory (used for calculator only, calculations will use the value adjusted in member data)
Lowest concrete grade
self-explanatory (used for calculator only, calculations will use the value adjusted at the member)
Maximum free water/cement ratio Minimum cement content Nominal concrete cover Abrasive Extra cover Apply min cover to ensure that fire resistance requirements are satisfied Fire resistance Member Type of member Result value of fire
self-explanatory (informative only, no direct input) self-explanatory (informative only, no direct input) self-explanatory (informative only, no direct input) If ON, an extra cover may be specified. self-explanatory self-explanatory
self-explanatory self-explanatory self-explanatory Shows the cover required by the fire resistance requirements. (informative only, no direct input) self-explanatory (used for calculator only, calculations will use the value adjusted in member data) Shows the result cover value. (informative only, no direct input)
Concrete against uneven surfaces Result value tb
Note: The values in the table are used to calculate two result values of cover: one from the left-hand side parameters, the other one from the fire-resistance related parameters grouped in the right-hand side. The final cover value is the maximal value of these two. Beams Default reinforcement Upper cover Upper Stirrup Defines thickness of concrete cover at the upper surface. Specifies diameter and type of reinforcement at the upper surface. Specifies diameter and type of reinforcement
132
General parameters
for stirrups (links). Lower Lower cover Specifies diameter and type of reinforcement at the lower surface. Defines thickness of concrete cover at the lower surface.
Note: Items Upper cover and Lower cover are accessible only if User-defined concrete cover has been selected. Default unbraced types (for columns and beams only) If the option is ON, the sway frame is considered. This is the default setting that is used if: - the user has not defined this value at the beam directly (in the buckling lengths settings dialogue), or - if the corresponding parameters in the buckling lengths settings dialogue is set to "Settings". Y-Y Z-Z Sway in YY direction. Sway in ZZ direction.
General parameters Number of iteration Defines the maximum numbers of steps, used
133
steps Precision of iteration For stiffness and crack-proof calculation use reinforcement
to find the state of equilibrium in a section. Defines the numerical precision in percentages. As,tot or 0 (As, tot for As,req > 0 and 0 for As,req = 0) The total area of reinforcement is used for the calculation on condition that the design function has been already run and that the program has already calculated the required area of reinforcement. Otherwise, zero value is used (even if the user has manually inserted some reinforcement bars). The total area of reinforcement is the sum of the user-defined reinforcement (through basic reinforcement, through reinforcement zones/regions or through free bars) and calculated additional required reinforcement. The additional required reinforcement may be zero, if the user has already inputted enough user-defined reinforcement. IMPORTANT: Keep in mind, that the function calculating the required areas of reinforcement MUST HAVE BEEN run before. Otherwise, the user-defined reinforcement is ignored and ZERO value is used. As, user The user-defined reinforcement is used for the calculation. The term user-defined reinforcement covers the basic reinforcement specified in member data, reinforcement bars inputted through reinforcement templates in reinforcement zones (1D members) or regions (2D members), and free bars of reinforcement. In order: [ As, user ]; [ As,tot or 0] If there is any user-defined reinforcement, it is used, otherwise, the total reinforcement is used (which in fact means the calculated required area of reinforcement). Remember, that for the second option, the design function must have been already run. In order: [ As,tot or 0]; [ As, user] If the design of reinforcement has been already performed and the required area of reinforcement has been already calculated, it is used. Otherwise, the user-defined reinforcement is used.
Check percentage of longitudinal reinforcement
If this option is ON, the calculation procedure takes account of the defined reinforcement percentage for longitudinal reinforcement.
134
General parameters
Check percentage of shear reinforcement
If this option is ON, the calculation procedure takes account of the defined shear reinforcement number of legs, link diameter, spacing of the links, and minimal percentage of reinforcement. If ON, the already inserted longitudinal reinforcement is taken into account during the calculation.
Take into account longitudinal practical reinforcement for design calculation Parameters for columns Advanced settings
This parameter can simplify the input for those users who calculate simple problems and need to adjust just a few basic parameters. If ON, all the items in the column setup part are available. If OFF, only the basic parameters are available. The less-common parameters are disabled.
Corner design only
The following cross-sections are supported: rectangular, L-section, T-section, I-section. The bars are designed only in corners of the cross-section. The calculation is iterative and diameter or area of reinforcement in corner is increased until the check is satisfied.
Determine governing cross-section beforehand
The user may determine that the design of reinforcement is carried out in the foot and head of the column. Otherwise, the calculation is carried out in all intermediate sections as well, which may be time consuming and bring no profit in terms of accuracy. The subsequent check of the designed reinforcement is performed in all sections. The option activates a pseudo-linear calculation of buckling for 1D member (the genuine 2nd order analysis is the non-linear one, i.e. using the Timoshenko or NewtonRaphson iteration). If this option is ON, a special algorithm is started on the background that evaluates bar imperfections and 1st + 2nd order deflections which leads to an approximation of the 1st order bending moments by increased 2nd order moments. DIN 1045-1 introduces for this situation the concept of "Model column method" and NORM calls it "Spare bar method". Each national standard implemented in Scia Engineer uses its analysis path that takes into account the stipulations of the particular standard.
Buckling data
135

Biaxial bending Safety factor for biaxial bending formula (see above) Calculate reinforcement using Specifies the safety factor used in the interaction formula above. Default value = 1.4. real area of reinforcement If this option is ON, the reinforcement is calculated from the real sectional area of individual bars. delta area of reinforcement If this option is ON, the reinforcement is calculated using the user defined area (delta). Optimisation method for number of bars in cross-section Ratio y/z If the option is ON, the number on bars in section is minimised so that their minimal number is used. automatic If ON, the ratio of y-reinforcement to zreinforcement is determined automatically. manual If ON, the user specifies the ratio of reinforcement in y-direction to reinforcement in z-direction. Parameters for beams Calculate compression reinforcement If the compression reinforcement is necessary, check this box to provide for its calculation.
136
General parameters
Moment capping at supports
Bending moment diagram may be "shifted" in supports in order to provide for reduction of support bending moments. The reduction depends on the type of support. For supports of Column type, the support dimension is calculated from the columns cross-section. For standard supports the user must input the support size (see the chapter dealing with point supports in the main reference manual). If reduction of shear force in supports is allowed, check this box. at the face (support/column) the reduced shear force is determined at the support face at the effective depth from the face (support/column) the reduced shear force is determined in the effective length from the support face
Parameters for 2D elements Control of tiny structural depths Internal forces calculation method If ON, thickness is check during the calculation of shear reinforcement. Two methods can be used to recalculate internal forces into design quantities: Internal forces transformation by Bauman Internal forces transformation by Wood Limit ratio of bending pressure zone ksi=x/d Check of concrete cover for subtracting 2D practical reinforcement from required reinforcement The limitation of pressure zone. The design of practical reinforcement in slabs can use two approaches: - OFF: consider the defined reinforcement AS IS without any checks - ON: verify the cover - i.e. the position of the reinforcement within the thickness of the slab and issue a warning and stop the design algorithm if the cover of the inserted practical reinforcement differs from the cover specified in the Setup dialog (as this Setup-defined value is used by the design algorithm). Defines the value used for the check of cover. (available only for Plate XY project) (in 3D projects the pressure reinforcement is used automatically) In a 2D project, the user may specify if the pressure reinforcement is allowed or not: - pressure reinforcement prohibited, - pressure reinforcement required, warning message appears on output, - pressure reinforcement allowed, no
Delta Design of pressure reinforcement in plates
137
warnings issued.
Note: The parameters in the Setup dialogue may differ according to the type of the project (plate / wall / general).

Safety factors Gamma m (shear) Gamma m (concrete under flexural or axial load) Gamma m (reinforcement) Concrete Max. compression strain of concrete Steel Max. tension strain of steel self-explanatory self-explanatory self-explanatory self-explanatory
self-explanatory

The parameters in the Shear group control the calculation of shear reinforcement. 1D structures - beams Shear coefficients Assumed % of main reinforcement available for shear The calculation of the resistance of concrete in a support depends on the percentage of the longitudinal reinforcement. This represents a reduction of tensile reinforcement in the support.
2D structures Plate XY project Shear effect control The check of shear effect in plates is normally not required. It may be, however, performed according to EN 1992-1-1, art. 4.3.2.4.4 (5).
138
General parameters

Coefficients Calculation of Vef Defines the method for recalculation of internal forces in supports: Calculation from design moment This method requires no additional parameters in input. Using coefficient For this option, other parameters must be specified. Position Three different positions may occur: - edge columns, - corner column, - internal column. Coefficient for moment perpendicular to edge Coefficient for moment parallel with edge Coefficient Defines the value of the parameter. (for edge column only) Defines the value of the parameter. (for edge column only) Defines the value of the parameter. (for corner and internal column) Distance of the first critical perimeter from the face of the loaded area Distance of the first critical perimeter from the face of the loaded area Loaded area Distance between the perimeter of the loaded area and the edge of the opening does not exceed value This parameter defines the way openings are handled. The maximum value of the smallest distance between the perimeter of the loaded area and the edge of an opening. If the distance is less than the input value, the part of the critical section enclosed by the two tangents drawn from the centre of the loaded area to the opening edge is taken as ineffective. This items defines the limit value of shear stress. If the calculated stress exceeds this limit value, the calculation is ended with result: "does not satisfy". Two options are available: - 1.5 d, - 0.75 d.
Maximum design shear stress
Shear reinforcement Min thickness of plate Minimal thickness of a plate where the shear reinforcement is considered in the calculation
139
of shear resistance. The shear reinforcement is ignored for thin slabs.

Deformation Creep coefficient Limit crack width w lim 2D structures Maximum admissible crack width at face Z+ Maximum admissible crack width at face ZLimit bar distances at face Z+ Limit bar distances at face Zfcu, 28 Mean effective modulus Art. 3.12.11.2.1 Default value = 0.3 Art.3.12.11.2.1 Default value = 0.3 Maximum calculation bar distance. Maximum calculation bar distance. Cube strength of concrete Art. 2.4.2.1 Mean effective modulus of elasticity of concrete for assessing the strains in the crack proof according to the recommendation of Part 2, Art.3.8.3. Representative modulus of elasticity of concrete for assessing the strains for assessing the strains according to the recommendation of Part 2, Art.3.8.3 in crack proof. Additional modification (augmentation) factor of average strain in the crack proof according to the recommendation of Part 2, Art. 3.8.3 (especially for abnormally high shrinkage). Additional augmentation factor of average strain according to the recommendation of Part 2, Art. 3.8.3 (specially for abnormally high shrinkage) in crack proof. self-explanatory self-explanatory
Representative modulus of elasticity
Additional modification factor of average strain Additional augmentation factor of average strain
Percentages for beams and columns

Strength of self-explanatory
140
General parameters
reinforcement fy The following tables define minimum and maximum percentages of reinforcement for different types of reinforcement steel and different shapes of cross-section. Min. compression reinforcement General rule Simplified rules for particular cases Rectangular column Flanged beam: flange in compression Flanged beam: web in compression Rectangular beam Min. tensile reinforcement Section subjected to pure tension Section subjected to flexure Flanged beam, web in tension: bw/b < 0.4 Flanged beam, web in tension: bw/b >= 0.4 Flanged beam, flange in tension over continuous support: T-beam Flanged beam, flange in tension over continuous support: L-beam rectangular section Maximum areas of reinforcement Beams Columns self-explanatory self-explanatory self-explanatory self-explanatory self-explanatory self-explanatory self-explanatory self-explanatory self-explanatory self-explanatory self-explanatory self-explanatory self-explanatory
141
Percentages for 2D structures

Strength of reinforcement fy self-explanatory
The following tables define minimum and maximum percentages of reinforcement for different types of reinforcement steel. Plates, walls, shells Minimum lateral reinforcement mutually Minimum generally maximum pressure reinforcement in bending zone Maximum reinforcement in any cross-section Special design control Virtual strut concrete strength reduction factor Virtual strut reduction factor [%] special control parameter used in the design It considers the diminished actual concrete strength in a 2D cracked continuum. 100 % = full concrete strength. Limit eccentricity ratio of axial compression thrust self-explanatory self-explanatory self-explanatory self-explanatory
self-explanatory
Columns Longitudinal reinforcement This part is analogous to other national standards. Min. bar distance Max. bar distance Min. number of bars in circular column Min. bar diameter Beams Longitudinal reinforcement Min bar distance Max. bar distance self-explanatory self-explanatory self-explanatory self-explanatory self-explanatory self-explanatory
142
General parameters
Minimum number of bars Stirrups Max. transversal distance between stirrups Calculation Check min. bar distance Check max. bar distance
self-explanatory
self-explanatory
self-explanatory self-explanatory
Design and drawing

Max. number of stirrup bendings Specifies the maximal number of bends in one stirrup. If the user exceeds this number, the program issues a warning. In practice, most of bending equipment allows up to seven bends in a single stirrup.
Hooks
143
Warning and errors

ACI 318
Code setup for ACI 318
The American standard enables the user to select the required format for the input of reinforcement. Metric format In this format, the diameter of reinforcement is not defined directly but through a special "number". All the input dialogues always display the corresponding diameter in addition to this special "number". US format Soft metric system In this format, the diameter of reinforcement is not defined directly but through a special "number". All the input dialogues always display the corresponding diameter in addition to this special "number". European metric system In this format, the diameter of reinforcement is defined directly. The procedure to select the required format 1. Open Project data dialogue using function Project from the main tree menu. 2. Select tab Combinations. 3. Click button Code setup [...]. 4. The Combination setup dialogue is opened on the screen. 5. Select the require format. 6. Confirm with [OK]. 7. Close with [OK] the Project data dialogue.
144
General parameters
General
This part of the dialogue contains a set of parameters specified in the standard. Concrete Name Minimum value of fc, fc_min = Maximum value of fc, fc_max = Coefficient for specified compressive strength for design coeff_fcd Non-prestressed reinforcement Name Maximum value of fy, fy_max = Value 80000 Unit [ psi] Chapter 9.4 Value 2500 10000 0,85 Unit [ psi] [ psi ] [-] Chapter 5.1.1 11.1.2 10.27.1
Design defaults
These parameters are used for the design of minimum required reinforcement if no member data have yet been defined on particular members. General Concrete cover Use min concrete cover User defined concrete cover Concrete cover advanced settings Type of concrete Selects whether the concrete is cast in place or precast. For Cast in place concrete there are three options: against and permanently exposed to earth exposed to earth and weather not exposed to weather or in contact with ground (defult). For Precast there are two options exposed to earth and weather not exposed to weather or in contact with ground (defult) The minimal values of cover based on detailing rules specified in the code are used. The user may input the thickness of cover layer.
Situation
145
Corrosive environment
If ON, the user must specify the value by which the cover is to be increased. (see the parameter below) See above.
Increment for corrosion Beams Default reinforcement Upper cover Upper Stirrup Lower Lower cover
Defines thickness of concrete cover at the upper surface. Specifies diameter and type of reinforcement at the upper surface. Specifies diameter and type of reinforcement for stirrups (links). Specifies diameter and type of reinforcement at the lower surface. Defines thickness of concrete cover at the lower surface.
Note: Item Concrete cover is accessible only if User-defined concrete cover has been selected. 2D structures and slabs Default reinforcement Upper cover Reinforcement Upper Angle Lower Angle Lower cover Defines thickness of concrete cover at the upper surface. Specifies the type of reinforcement. Specifies diameter of reinforcement for the upper surface. Specifies the angle of reinforcement. Specifies diameter of reinforcement for the lower surface. Specifies the angle of reinforcement. Defines thickness of concrete cover at the
146
General parameters
lower surface. Note: Items Upper cover and Lower cover are accessible only if User-defined concrete cover has been selected. Walls Default reinforcement Concrete cover Reinforcement Diameter Angle Defines thickness of concrete cover at the upper surface. Specifies the type of reinforcement. Specifies diameter of reinforcement. Specifies the angle of reinforcement.
Note: Item Concrete cover is accessible only if User-defined concrete cover has been selected. Shells Default reinforcement Upper cover Reinforcement Upper Angle Lower Angle Lower cover Defines thickness of concrete cover at the upper surface. Specifies the type of reinforcement. Specifies diameter of reinforcement for the upper surface. Specifies the angle of reinforcement. Specifies diameter of reinforcement for the lower surface. Specifies the angle of reinforcement. Defines thickness of concrete cover at the lower surface.
Note: Items Upper cover and Lower cover are accessible only if User-defined concrete cover has been selected. Default unbraced types (for columns and beams only) If the option is ON, the sway frame is considered. This is the default setting that is used if: - the user has not defined this value at the beam directly (in the buckling lengths settings dialogue), or - if the corresponding parameters in the buckling lengths settings dialogue is set to "Settings". Y-Y Z-Z Sway in YY direction. Sway in ZZ direction.
147
Calculation
General parameters Number of iteration steps Precision of iteration Defines the maximum numbers of steps, used to find the state of equilibrium in a section. Defines the numerical precision in percentages. As,tot or 0 (As, tot for As,req > 0 and 0 for As,req = 0) The total area of reinforcement is used for the calculation on condition that the design function has been already run and that the program has already calculated the required area of reinforcement. Otherwise, zero value is used (even if the user has manually inserted some reinforcement bars). The total area of reinforcement is the sum of the user-defined reinforcement (through basic reinforcement, through reinforcement zones/regions or through free bars) and calculated additional required reinforcement. The additional required reinforcement may be zero, if the user has already inputted enough user-defined reinforcement. IMPORTANT: Keep in mind, that the function calculating the required areas of reinforcement MUST HAVE BEEN run before. Otherwise, the user-defined reinforcement is ignored and ZERO value is used. As, user The user-defined reinforcement is used for the calculation. The term user-defined reinforcement covers the basic reinforcement specified in member data, reinforcement bars inputted through reinforcement templates in reinforcement zones (1D members) or regions (2D members), and free bars of reinforcement. In order: [ As, user ]; [ As,tot or 0] If there is any user-defined reinforcement, it is used, otherwise, the total reinforcement is used (which in fact means the calculated required area of reinforcement). Remember, that for the second option, the design function must have been already run. In order: [ As,tot or 0]; [ As, user] If the design of reinforcement has been already performed and the required area of reinforcement has been already calculated, it
For stiffness and crack-proof calculation use reinforcement
148
General parameters
is used. Otherwise, the user-defined reinforcement is used. Take into account longitudinal practical reinforcement for design calculation Concrete area weakened by reinforcement bars Concrete area weakened by prestressed reinforcement bars Check selected sections only Parameters for columns Advanced settings This parameter can simplify the input for those users who calculate simple problems and need to adjust just a few basic parameters. If ON, all the items in the column setup part are available. If OFF, only the basic parameters are available. The less-common parameters are disabled. Corner design only The following cross-sections are supported: rectangular, L-section, T-section, I-section. The bars are designed only in corners of the cross-section. The calculation is iterative and diameter or area of reinforcement in corner is increased until the check is satisfied. Determine governing cross-section beforehand The user may determine that the design of reinforcement is carried out in the foot and head of the column. Otherwise, the calculation is carried out in all intermediate sections as well, which may be time consuming and bring no profit in terms of accuracy. The subsequent check of the designed reinforcement is performed in all sections. The option activates a pseudo-linear calculation of buckling for 1D member (the genuine 2nd order analysis is the non-linear one, i.e. using the Timoshenko or NewtonRaphson iteration). If this option is ON, a special algorithm is started on the background that evaluates bar imperfections and 1st + 2nd order deflections which leads to an approximation of the 1st order bending If ON, the already inserted longitudinal reinforcement is taken into account during the calculation.
The area of reinforcement is subtracted from the area of the cross-section as if ducts were installed. The area of prestressed reinforcement is subtracted from the area of the cross-section.
If ON, the checks are performed in selected sections only.
Buckling data
149
moments by increased 2nd order moments. DIN 1045-1 introduces for this situation the concept of "Model column method" and NORM calls it "Spare bar method". Each national standard implemented in Scia Engineer uses its analysis path that takes into account the stipulations of the particular standard. If ON, the number of bars in the cross-section is optimised to achieve the minimum number of bars with the cross-section still passing the check.
Calculation method Uni-axial bending calculation The largest of bending moments My, Mz will be taken into consideration. The smaller one will be ignored. Both My and Mz are taken into account. The design is carried out using interaction formula
Bi-axial bending calculation (interaction formula)

where x is the safety factor (see below). With this option ON the user may select one of three available methods.
Automatic determination - uniaxial bending calculation if ratio of biaxial moment is less then
If the ratio of one bending moment to the other along the whole beam length is smaller than the input value, then the beam is considered to be subject to uni-axial bending. Otherwise, if at least one cross-section is found where the ratio is greater than the input value, the biaxial approach is applied.
Biaxial bending Calculate reinforcement using real area of reinforcement If this option is ON, the reinforcement is calculated from the real sectional area of individual bars. delta area of reinforcement If this option is ON, the reinforcement is calculated using the user defined area (delta). Method for calculation Depending on the selected method for biaxial bending calculation, the user may be asked to specify one required parameter. If the option is ON, the number on bars in section is minimised so that their minimal number is used. automatic
Optimisation method for number of bars in cross-section Ratio y/z
150
General parameters
If ON, the ratio of y-reinforcement to zreinforcement is determined automatically. manual If ON, the user specifies the ratio of reinforcement in y-direction to reinforcement in z-direction. Parameters for beams Calculate compression reinforcement If the compression reinforcement is necessary, check this box to provide for its calculation. If ON the normal force in beam is takes into account. The element is compressed if axial factored axial compressive load is less than 0,1Agfc. Bending moment diagram may be "shifted" in supports in order to provide for reduction of support bending moments. The reduction depends on the type of support. For supports of Column type, the support dimension is calculated from the columns cross-section. For standard supports the user must input the support size (see the chapter dealing with point supports in the main reference manual). If reduction of shear force in supports is allowed, check this box. at the face (support/column) the reduced shear force is determined at the support face at the effective depth from the face (support/column) the reduced shear force is determined in the effective length from the support face Parameters for 2D elements Special reinforcement control for wall and deep beam structures 2D practical reinforcement Three self-explanatory options are available.
Normal force to calculation Check compression of element Moment capping at supports
Check for concrete cover for subtracting 2D practical reinforcement from required reinforcement If this option is ON, the algorithm that calculates the required reinforcement takes into account the cover of practical reinforcement. If the option is ON and the
151
cover of the defined practical reinforcement is different from the cover specified for design in the setup dialogue, the program issues a warning.
Interaction diagram
152
General parameters
Design strength
General Name Coefficient for maximum Default value 0,8 Article 10.3.6.2
153
allowable value of Pn Equation for calculation EI for critical load Pc (0,2EcIg+EsIse)/(1+betaD) 10.12.3
Note: The combobox "Equation for calculation EI for critical load Pc" contains two items: (0,2EcIg+EsIse)/(1+betaD) 0,4EcIg/(1+betaD) Strength reduction factor Phi Name Tension-controlled section Compression-controlled section Shear and torsion Default value 0,9 0,65 0.75 Article 9.3.2.1 9.3.2.2 9.3.2.3
Reduction factor for moment of inertia Name Beams Columns Default value 0,7 0,35 Article 10.11.1 10.11.1
Shear
The parameters in the Shear group control the calculation of shear reinforcement. 1D structures - beams Shear coefficients Max. value fy and tyt for shear Art. 11.5.2 Default value = 60000
2D structures Control of the shear proof method after art. 11.3 Use the simplified method after 11.3.1 The simplified method after 11.3.1, including the condition Vc = 0 (11.3.1.3) for overtensioned cross-sections is applied. This is the default option for shells and plates.
Use the more detailed method after 11.3.2
Special minimum shear reinforcement control after 11.5.6.1 No special shear reinforcement is provided (art. 11.5.6.1) This is the default option. No minimum shear reinforcement is provided for
154
General parameters
(standard provision 11.5.6.1) Special minimum shear reinforcement control after art. 11.5.6.1 Minimum shear reinforcement is provided for (11.5.6.3, provision in the sense of R11.5.6.1)
Shear effect control No effect of shear force on the longitudinal reinforcement Effect of shear force upon longitudinal reinforcement is considered after EC2, art. 4.3.2.4.4 (5) This is the default option. The effect of shear force on the longitudinal reinforcement is not considered (ACI 318M05 standard) The effect of shear force on the longitudinal reinforcement is considered according to EC2, 4.3.2.4.4(5) This represents a nonstandard procedure!
This part of the dialogue contains a set of parameters specified by the Standard (excepting one). Their explanation is not necessary here since all the items in the dialogue contain a reference to the appropriate article in the Standard.
Warning and errors

155
Member-related parameters Introduction

Design and checking of concrete members requires the user to specify quite a large number of various parameters. These parameters are defined in a particular technical standard. Scia Engineer pre-sets all these parameters to default values. These default values may be employed to obtain reasonable results. Most often, however, the user wants to define specific parameters differently on different members. Function Member data can be used to perform this task.
Adjusting the member data

Member data may be assigned to any member in the structure. Once assigned, they overload default settings made in the Setup dialogue. The procedure to adjust member data 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Start function Member data. a. for beams use function 1D design > Member data, b. for slabs use function 2D design > Member data. 3. Select the member where the data should be assigned. 4. The program takes the shape of members cross-section and displays appropriate dialogue. 5. If required, choose the Basic or Advanced mode of the dialogue. 6. Adjust the required parameters. Look at the drawing on the left for explanation of main parameters. 7. Alternatively, you may use button [Load default values] to reload the values adjusted in the Setup dialogue. 8. Confirm with [OK]. Note: For 2D members, if a plate contains subregions, it is possible to assign different member data to individual subregions. Member data on a slab
Member data on a beam
157
Copying the member related data

Member data adjusted on one member may be copied to another one.
IMPORTANT: The user must pay attention to the type of the original and target member. If the type (beam, column, slab, rib see e.g. chapter Basic mode for member data adjustment) of both members is the same the action is completed immediately. If however, the original and target beam are of different type, the program asks the user what to do in order to resolve this discrepancy. The user may choose to (i) change the type of the target beam and copy the member data or (ii) keep the type of the target beam and copy the member data. Regardless of the final solution, we strongly recommend to pay an increased attention to the copying action whenever such warning is issued.
The procedure to copy member data from one member to another 1. Make sure that the member data symbol id displayed. If not, switch it on in View parameters dialogue. 2. Select the member data on the original member. 3. Invoke the pop-up menu of the graphical window and start function Copy add-data. 4. Select the target member or members. 5. If a warning is issued, follow carefully the instructions given in the important note above. 6. Clear the selection.
1D elements
Basic mode for member data adjustment on 1D elements
Basic mode of the Member data adjustment dialogue offers only basic parameters. To select the basic mode, clear check box Advanced mode at the top part of the dialogue. The basic mode allows the user to set only the diameter of the reinforcement and exposure conditions.
158
Member-related parameters
General parameters Name Beam type Advanced mode Member Defines the name of member data. Specifies the beam type. Available options are: (i) beam, (ii) column, (iii) slab, (iv) rib. In Basic mode, this option is OFF. Informs about the name of the selected member.
Minimal concrete cover Environmental class Delta tb Specifies the environmental class. Defines the condition that may affect the value of minimal cover (applicable to some standards only). Informs about the concrete grade used. Informs about the size of stones in concrete.
Concrete Stone diameter Design Upper > Diameter Upper > Concrete cover Lower > Diameter Lower > Concrete cover Stirrups > Diameter
Defines the diameter of longitudinal reinforcement at upper surface. Informs about the cover size at upper surface. Defines the diameter of longitudinal reinforcement at lower surface. Informs about the cover size at lower surface. Defines the diameter of shear reinforcement.
159
Advanced mode for member data adjustment on 1D elements

Advanced mode of the Member data adjustment dialogue offers all the possible options. To select the advanced mode, tick check box Advanced mode at the top part of the dialogue. The advanced mode allows the user to adjust any parameter to any available value.
General parameters Name Beam type Advanced mode Member Defines the name of member data. Specifies the beam type. Available options are: (i) beam, (ii) column, (iii) slab, (iv) rib. In Advanced mode, this option is ON. Informs about the name of the selected member.
Minimal concrete cover Input for sides If ON, the Minimal concrete cover parameters may be defined separately for upper and lower surface. Defines the environmental class. Defines the condition that may affect the value of minimal cover (applicable to some standards only). Informs about the concrete grade used. Informs about the size of stones in concrete.
Environmental class Delta tb
Concrete Stone diameter Design Material Upper > Number of bars
Defines the material of reinforcement. IMPORTANT: This item specifies number of bars of BASIC REINFORCEMENT. Basic reinforcement is present in the member under all circumstances. All functions in service Concrete assume that this basic
160
reinforcement already exists in the designed members and any calculated required reinforcement is an addition to this basic reinforcement. This item enables the user to define the assumed number of bars at the top and bottom surface. This number is considered during the design. The design is carried out for a beam that already contains this defined reinforcement and the final necessary reinforcement area means the reinforcement that must be added to this assumed reinforcement. See note below. Upper > Diameter Upper > Type of cover Defines the diameter of longitudinal reinforcement at upper surface. The user may swap between automatically determined minimal cover and manually defined cover. Informs about the cover size at upper surface or allows for the manual input of exact cover value (depending on the option above). This item specifies number of bars of Basic reinforcement at the lower surface See the note below. Lower > Diameter Lower > Concrete cover Stirrups > Material Stirrups > Basic distance Stirrups > Diameter Stirrups > User defined number of cuts Stirrups > Number of cuts Stirrups > User defined width for shear Stirrups > Width for shear Defines the diameter of longitudinal reinforcement at lower surface. Informs about the cover size at lower surface. Defines the material of stirrups. Defines the basic distance between stirrups. Defines the diameter of shear reinforcement. If ON, the user may define the number of legs of stirrups. Defines the number of legs of the stirrup. If ON, the user may define the shear width. Defines the shear width.
Upper > Concrete cover Lower > Number of bars
Note: The assumed (basic) reinforcement is used for the design of reinforcement only. It enables the user to insert a virtual reinforcement into the beam. This virtual reinforcement is taken into account when the design of reinforcement in that particular member is carried out. It is inserted along the whole members length and therefore acts in all sections. As this reinforcement is just a virtual one, it cannot be considered in the checks! On the other hand, it can facilitate the input of practical reinforcement.
161
Proiectare structuri de beton Forces reduction Set support width The decisive parameter for the calculation of reduced moments and shear forces is the width of the support. It is calculated automatically from the specified width of supports or columns. The user can overload this default by manual input of the width of the support. The width of the support for the purpose of calculation of reduced moments and shear forces.
Support width
Column calculation Use buckling data The option activates a pseudo-linear calculation of buckling for 1D member (the genuine 2nd order analysis is the non-linear one, i.e. using the Timoshenko or NewtonRaphson iteration). If this option is ON, a special algorithm is started on the background that evaluates bar imperfections and 1st + 2nd order deflections which leads to an approximation of the 1st order bending moments by increased 2nd order moments. DIN 1045-1 introduces for this situation the concept of "Model column method" and NORM calls it "Spare bar method". Each national standard implemented in Scia Engineer uses its analysis path that takes into account the stipulations of the particular standard. Type of calculation The type of column analysis. Depending on this parameter, either simple bending or biaxial bending is considered for the design of reinforcement. The option Automatic reads the following parameter (Biaxial bending coefficient) and depending on its value opts for either simple bending or biaxial bending Biaxial bending coefficient User defined y/z My/Mz ratio. The ratio of areas of reinforcement in individual directions (y, z) can be specified automatically or manually (by the user). The user-defined ratio of the amount of reinforcement in individual directions. The user specifies the percentage for the ydirection. The percentage for the z-direction is calculated as 100 minus the input value. Creep coefficients User defined creep If ON, the user may input the creep
Ratio y/z y [%]
162
coefficient Creep coefficient Relative humidity Load time User defined notional size of cross-section Notional size of crosssection Concrete
coefficient. Defines the creep coefficient. Defines the Relative humidity. Defines the load time in days. If ON, the user may input the notional size of cross-section manually. Defines the notional size of cross-section. Informs about concrete grade.
2D elements
Basic mode for member data adjustment on 2D elements
Basic mode of the Member data adjustment dialogue offers only basic parameters. To select the basic mode, clear check box Advanced mode at the top part of the dialogue. The basic mode allows the user to set only the diameter of the reinforcement and exposure conditions.
General parameters Name Type Advanced mode Layers in centre Defines the name of member data. Specifies the member type. Available types: Wall, Plate, Shell. In Basic mode of the project, this option is OFF. If the Type (above) is set to either Wall or Shell, it is possible to define just one layer of reinforcement in the centre of the member. In Basic mode, only orthogonal layout of reinforcement is supported. If ON, different steel class, reinforcement
Type of layout Different layers per
163
side Slab Main reinforcement steel Shear reinforcement steel First reinforcement direction angle
geometry and covers may be adjusted for the upper and lower surface. The name of the member is displayed. The steel material of the longitudinal reinforcement can be changed or reselected here The steel material of the shear reinforcement can be changed or reselected here The direction angle of the outer reinforcement direction is et here Default value: 0
Longitudinal / Upper + lower Concrete cover (cu) Diameter (du) Minimal concrete cover Environmental class Delta tb Defines the environmental class. Defines the condition that may affect the value of minimal cover (not applicable to all standards). Informs about the concrete grade used. Informs about the size of stones in concrete. Shows the name of the member. Informs about the cover size. Specifies the diameter of used reinforcement.
Concrete Stone diameter Slab Actions Load default values Concrete setup
Loads the default settings made in the setup dialogue. Enables the user to adjust parameters in the setup dialogue.
Advanced mode for member data adjustment on 2D elements

Advanced mode of the Member data adjustment dialogue offers all the possible options. To select the advanced mode, tick check box Advanced mode at the top part of the dialogue. The advanced mode allows the user to adjust any parameter to any available value.
164
General parameters Name Type Advanced mode Defines the name of member data. Specifies the member type. Select "shell". In Advanced mode, this option is ON.
Basic data Type of reinforcement geometry Orthogonal: The reinforcement is arranged in two orthogonal directions. User: The user may define up to three independent directions for the reinforcement. Type of cover Use minimal cover: the minimal allowable cover is applied. User defined: User defined cover size is used instead. Different layers per side If ON, the reinforcement properties for the upper and lower reinforcement layer are set independently. This Option controls the use of user reinforcement in the 2D-design. If ON, the input field Bars distance is opened for users input. Read also the note below the table. User input thickness If ON, the user may define the thickness of the slab. This manually input thickness is considered in
User reinforcement
165
the phase of design of reinforcement. The check, however, always uses the real thickness of the defined slab. Thickness Specifies the thickness of the slab. Manual input of slab thickness may be useful for e.g. renovations when different thickness from the modelled one is considered for the design and assessment. By default, the thickness is taken from the slab input in the main graphical window of Scia Engineer. Specifies the steel used for the main reinforcement. Specifies the steel used for the transverse reinforcement.
Main reinforcement steel Stirrups reinforcement steel
Note: User reinforcement: The user reinforcement in slabs is used for the design, when the program calculates the amount of required reinforcement it calculates the amount that is needed in addition to the user required. Moreover, if the user reinforcement is specified and the user wants to input some real reinforcement, the program asks whether the user reinforcement should be converted into the real reinforcement or not. The program does not allow to have both user and real reinforcement in a slab at the same time. Therefore, once a real reinforcement in a particular slab is defined, the user reinforcement is removed (i.e. either converted into the real reinforcement or deleted).
Longitudinal / Upper + lower Number of directions If Type of layout is set to User, it is possible to select if the reinforcement is laid in two or three directions. Usually, two directions are used. Defines the total number of reinforcement layers. All the bars in one layer are laid in the same direction i.e. they are parallel to each other. Specifies the diameter of the reinforcement bars. Specifies the direction angle. The user may select from the previously defined direction angles. It is not allowed to assign the same angle to 2 directions. Hint: The design algorithm controls certain minimum angles between the reinforcement directions to ensure an acceptable design solution. Type of cover * The user may choose various definitions of cover size:
Number of reinforcement layers
Diameter (du) *
Direction angle *
166
Layer on previous layer: One layer is laid on the other one. Cover from previous: The user defines the cover from the previous layer. The cover is measured from a surface of one reinforcement bar to the surface of the other bar. Cover from edge: The user defines the cover from the edge of the slab. Distance from previous: The user defines the distance from the previous layer. The distance is measured from the centre of one reinforcement bar to the centre of the other bar. Distance from edge: The user defines the distance from the edge of the slab. Concrete cover (cu) * Bars distance * Shows or provides for the input of cover. Specifies the distance between individual bars in one layer.
Note: Items marked with an asterisk must be defined for each reinforcement direction. The total number of directions is specified by the item Number of reinforcement layer. Minimum concrete cover Input for sides Different cover may be defined for individual sides of the slab. Defines the environmental class. Defines the condition that may affect the value of minimal cover (not applicable to all standards). Informs about the concrete grade used. Informs about the size of stones in concrete.
Environmental class Delta tb
Concrete Stone diameter Creep coefficient User defined creep coefficient Creep coefficient Relative humidity Load time Age of concrete
If ON, the user may input the creep coefficient manually. Defines the value of creep coefficient. Defines the relative humidity. Specifies the load time in days. Specifies the age of concrete.
167
Actions Load default values Loads the default settings made in the setup dialogue. Enables the user to adjust parameters in the setup dialogue.
Concrete setup
168
Internal forces and slenderness Calculated internal forces

Service Concrete enables the user to display internal forces in members. Internal forces may be displays AS ARE, i.e. as calculated by the solver or they may be recalculated to take account of possible shift of the moment diagram and reduction allowed in the particular national standard (see appropriate parameters in Setup dialogue). Parameters Selection This item defines the type of selection that the user wants to use to choose beams where the design results should be displayed. Selects the type of load to be evaluated: load case, combination, class. Selects the particular load case, combination or class to be evaluated. The selection of beams to be evaluated may be filtered out. If ON, a table explaining warnings and errors occurring during the design is attached to the document. This item has no response in the graphical window. Design ULS The internal forces as recalculated for the ULS design configuration are displayed. Non-prestressed ULS check The internal forces as recalculated for the ULS check configuration are displayed. Non-prestressed SLS check The internal forces as recalculated for the SLS check configuration are displayed. Values Extreme This item selects the value or values to be displayed. See below. Defines the places where numerical values will be added to the diagram of selected quantity. Enables the user to adjust the display style for the result diagrams. See below.
Type of loads
Load cases / Combinations / Classes Filter Print explanation
Type of check
Drawing setup
Values My recalc Recalculated (i.e. shifted and reduced) bending moment My.
169
Mz recalc Vz recalc N, Vy, Vz, Mx, My, Mz
Recalculated (i.e. shifted and reduced) bending moment Mz. Recalculated shear force Vz. Internal forces as determined by the finite elements calculation.
Drawing setup In addition to standard drawing setup parameters, the following parameters are added for the needs of design of concrete beams. Values If ON, labels are attached to the diagram. If OFF, only the diagram without any description is displayed. Draw section in labels Draw load case or combination in label If ON, the longitudinal position of the section is depicted. The design is always performed for the selected load case or combination. The number of considered load case / combination may be added to the diagram label. If ON, the number of a potential warning or error is attached to the diagram of selected quantity. If no error occurs, nothing is printed.
Warnings, errors
Action buttons Refresh Refreshes the contents of the graphical window. Whenever the refresh of the screen is required, this item is redhighlighted. Shows information about the calculation. See separate chapter. Enables the user to modify design parameters. See separate chapter. Shows the selected design values in the Preview window.
Calculation info Concrete setup Preview
Displaying the calculated internal forces

The procedure to display the internal forces 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Select function 1D member > Member design > Internal forces (a single click on the tree menu item is sufficient to open the function). 3. Select the required type of load. 4. Select the required load case, combination or class. 5. Select members where the values should be displayed. 6. Select the required quantity and if required, make other adjustments in the property window.
170
Internal forces and slenderness 7. Click Action button [Refresh] to see the selected design values. 8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 as many times as required.
Displaying the slenderness parameters

Slenderness-related parameters for individual members can be displayed in the form of diagrams. The diagrams and their adjustment are analogous to internal forces diagrams. The parameters may be different for various standards. The meaning of individual slendernessrelated parameters is given in appropriate national standard.
171
Reinforcement Calculation of required reinforcement

Introduction to design of reinforcement
The design takes account of parameters adjusted in the Setup dialogue and Member data dialogue. The required reinforcement suggested by the program then complies with the requirements of a particular national standard. The user may review the results of automatic design in function Design of service Concrete. The following conditions apply for the design of reinforcement: the design can be performed for a load case, the design can be performed for an ULS combination, the design can be performed for a class containing an ULS combination.
Note: The design of reinforcement may be performed ONLY after the calculation has been carried out.
1D elements Design of beams

Parameters Selection This item defines the type of selection that the user wants to use to choose beams where the design results should be displayed. For more information see chapter Results in the main help. Type of loads Selects the type of load to be evaluated: load case, combination, class. For more information see chapter Results in the main help. Load cases / Combinations / Classes Selects the particular load case, combination or class to be evaluated. For more information see chapter Results in the main help. Filter The selection of beams to be evaluated may be filtered out. For more information see chapter Results in the main help. Print explanation If ON, a table explaining warning and error occurring the design is attached to the document. This item has no response in the graphical window. This item selects the value or values to be displayed. See below. Defines the places where numerical values will be added to the diagram of
Values Extreme
173
selected quantity. Drawing setup Enables the user to adjust the display style for the result diagrams. See below.
Values As total required Total required area of longitudinal reinforcement. If assumed (basic) or real (practical) reinforcement is used, it shows the total area of longitudinal reinforcement in the section. As user defined Area of defined basic and also practical (defined) longitudinal reinforcement (see Advanced mode for member data adjustment). Area of still required longitudinal reinforcement after the basic reinforcement has been taken into account. (see Advanced mode for member data adjustment). Percentage of total required reinforcement. Total required area of shear reinforcement. Weight of the reinforcement.
As additional required
Reinforcement ration Ass Weight
Drawing setup In addition to standard drawing setup parameters, the following parameters are added for the needs of design of concrete beams. Values If ON, labels are attached to the diagram. If OFF, only the diagram without any description is displayed. Draw section in labels Draw load case or combination in label If ON, the longitudinal position of the section is depicted. The design is always performed for the selected load case or combination. The number of considered load case / combination may be added to the diagram label. The calculated number of reinforcement bars is printed in the diagram label. The considered profile of reinforcement bars is printed in the diagram label. If ON, the number of a potential warning or error is attached to the diagram of selected quantity. If no error
Number of bars
Profile of bars Warnings, errors
174
Reinforcement
occurs, nothing is printed. Action buttons Refresh Refreshes the contents of the graphical window so that the window shows the selected quantity for the selected load case or combination taking account of all relevant parameters. Whenever the refresh of screen is required, this item is red-highlighted. Calculation info Concrete setup New reinforcement Shows information about the calculation. See separate chapter. Enables the user to modify design parameters. See separate chapter. It enables the user to input the reinforcement in the member following the drawn necessary reinforcement area. If option "Take into account practical reinforcement for design calculation" in the Setup dialogue is ON, the necessary reinforcement area is recalculated taking account of the newly defined reinforcement. Single check Performs a detailed check of a selected beam. See separate chapter. Note: Single check in design cannot be used for columns. Preview Shows the selected design values in the Preview window.
Performing the design of beams

The procedure to make a design of reinforcement a beam 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Select function 1D member > Member design > Design (a single click on the tree menu item is sufficient to open the function). 3. Select the required type of load. 4. Select the required load case, combination or class. 5. Select beams where the design values should be calculated and displayed. 6. Select the required quantity and if required, make other adjustments in the property window. 7. Click Action button [Refresh] to see the selected design values. 8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 as many times as required.
Note: It is worth mentioning that the design of columns may be rather time consuming. The time needed for a successful design of a column depends on adjustments made in the setup dialogue. The core of the problem is that the reinforcement is optimised and the minimum of it is searched for. In case of unsymmetrical bending, the 3D interaction diagram must be calculated. If option "Determine governing cross-section beforehand" is ON, the
175

reinforcement is designed only in the foot and the head of the column. Then the designed reinforcement complying with required conditions is checked in all sections of the column.
Calculation info for design of beams

The Calculation info dialogue summarises all warnings and errors that occurred during the design of reinforcement.
Filtering the list of warnings and errors warning and errors errors only for whole structure for members for sections Both warnings and errors are listed in the table. Only errors are shown. A brief summary for the whole structure is printed. All warnings and/or errors for individual members are shown. Warnings and/or errors for every section of every member are shown.
Concrete setup for design of beams

A standard Setup dialogue is opened. However, the items in the dialogue are filtered out so that only those relevant to the design of reinforcement are listed.
Single check for design of beams

Single cross-section dialogue provides for detailed view of design results.
176
Reinforcement
Parts of the dialogue Step / position Calculation The user may select the section of the beam that should be calculated. This group shows internal forces in the selected section, enables the user to change the settings and calculate the results. The designed beam is shown. Mouse cursor may be used to select the required section for assessment. Pop-up menu may be used to control the view adjustment. Set of graphical windows The set of graphical windows presents all the important information related to the design. Pop-up menu may be used to control the view adjustment. Information window Any comments accompanying the calculation are listed in this window.
Side view of the beam
Calculation Code setup Filtered dialogue for adjustment of
177
design parameters is opened on the screen. Extreme Internal forces Internal forces input by user Calculation Set of graphical windows ( the pictures below) Cross-section Shows the cross-section, its dimensions and the designed reinforcement. Shows internal forces in the selected section. Shows the strain and its distribution across the section. Shows the stress and its distribution across the section. Shows the strain and its distribution across the section in a 3D view. Shows the stress and its distribution across the section in a 3D view. Shows internal forces in the selected section in a 3D view. Shows the stress-strain diagram for the selected section. The user may click a point in the section (in the left hand side part of the graphical window) or reinforcement and see the corresponding position on the diagram (in the right hand side part of the graphical window). Selects the extreme force for which the cross-section should be checked. Lists internal forces in the selected section. If ON, the user may modify the internal forces manually. Performs the calculation.
Loads Strain Stress Strain 3D Stress 3D Forces 3D Stress-strain diagram
Cross-section
178
Reinforcement
Loads
Strain
179
Stress
Strain 3D
180
Reinforcement
Stress 3D
Forces 3D
181
Stress-strain diagram
2D elements Design of 2D members

Parameters Selection This item defines the type of selection that the user wants to use to choose slabs where the design results should
182
Reinforcement
be displayed. For more information see chapter Results in the main help. Type of loads Selects the type of load to be evaluated: load case, combination, class. For more information see chapter Results in the main help. Load cases / Combinations / Classes Selects the particular load case, combination or class to be evaluated. For more information see chapter Results in the main help. Filter The selection of slabs to be evaluated may be filtered out according to: material, layer, thickness. For more information see chapter Results in the main help. Warnings, errors If ON, the number of a potential warning or error is attached to the diagram of selected quantity. If no error occurs, nothing is printed. The user may define the scale for isolines. The scale is based on the type of used reinforcement bars. If ON, the unrealistic extreme values in corners are averaged. Specifies the style of isolines / isobands. For more information about the display of results on slabs the main reference manual / help for Scia Engineer. the note below. Type values It is possible to choose between: (i) Required reinforcement and (ii) Shear stresses (see below). Specifies the surface, where the results are displayed: displayed: upper/ lower or +Zp/-Zp, respectively. This item is available for Required reinforcement only. If any member in the project uses onelayer reinforcement, the options are: (i) upper, (ii) lower or middle. If all the members in the project use one-layer reinforcement, this item is hidden. Direction Specifies the direction, in which the results are shown. It is possible to select from the directions defined in the Member data dialogue. This item is available for Required
User scale isolines
Averaging of peak values Location
Surface
183
reinforcement only. Reinforcement Required reinforcement Displays the total required reinforcement. User reinforcement Displays the reinforcement that has been already input by the user. Additional reinforcement Displays the reinforcement that still has to be inserted in addition to the already defined user reinforcement (Additional = Required User). Drawing The results can be displayed in several ways: Standard The results are displayed as isolines/isobands. Section The diagrams in defined sections are drawn. Resultant The resultant in the defined section is shown. Standard + section Combines the first two options. Value Extreme This item selects the value or values to be displayed. See below. Defines the places where numerical values will be added to the diagram of selected quantity. Enables the user to adjust the display style for the result diagrams. See below.
Drawing setup
Note: The solver calculates the results in four nodes of every finite element, i.e. the nonaveraged values in nodes). The value in a centroid of each finite element is calculated as an arithmetic mean of the four nodal values. Averaged values in nodes are determined as an arithmetic mean of values in all nodes of surrounding finite elements. Averaged values on a macro (2D member) are calculated as an arithmetic mean of all values in all nodes of surrounding finite elements, that relate to the same 2D member (macro) and to the same side of the internal edge (on condition that such an edge exists). Therefore, one node on a connection of several 2D members has as many result values as different members meet in that node. E.g. on an internal edge, each node contains two different values. In addition, for averaged values in nodes and on macros also a special smoothing procedure applies the aim of which is to eliminate possible "faults" (the word derived from tectonic faults) in the distribution of the quantity on the edge of the macro. These faults result from the saw-like distribution of results caused by the fact that (i) the distribution is smooth on internal nodes (because values from all sides are averaged) but (ii) in nodes on edges there is nothing on one side to produce the averaging.
184
Reinforcement Values - Required reinforcement As Ass Displays the distribution of As across the slab at the given surface. Displays the distribution of Ass across the slab.
There are three different "types" of necessary reinforcement that can be obtained from the program: Total reinforcement Basic reinforcement The total reinforcement in the member. The reinforcement defined as a basic reinforcement, i.e. the reinforcement present in the member. The reinforcement that must be added to the present reinforcement in order to achieve the required reinforcement area.
Additional reinforcement
Values Shear stresses tau tau0 Displays the distribution of tau across the slab. Displays the distribution of tau0 across the slab.
Note: The notation may vary according to the applied national standard.
Drawing setup Parameters of isolines / isobands used to display the calculated results can control the style of the graphics. These parameters can be adjusted in a separate dialogue named 2D results display. For more information about the display of results on slabs see the main reference manual / help for Scia Engineer. Action buttons Refresh Refreshes the contents of the graphical window so that the window shows the selected quantity for the selected load case or combination taking account of all relevant parameters. Whenever the refresh of screen is required, this item is red-highlighted. Concrete setup Calculation info Preview Enables the user to modify design parameters. See separate chapter. Shows information about the calculation. Shows the selected design values in the Preview window.
185
Performing the design of slabs

The procedure to make a design of reinforcement in a slab 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Select required function: a. either 2D members > Design ULS (a single click on the tree menu item is sufficient to open the function), b. or 2D members > Design - crack width. 3. Select the required type of load. 4. Select the required load case, combination or class. 5. Select slabs where the design values should be calculated and displayed. 6. Select the required quantity and if required, make other adjustments in the property window. 7. Click Action button [Refresh] to see the selected design values. 8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 as many times as required.
Design of reinforcement - crack width
Note: This type of calculation can only be performed for a class containing both SLS and ULS combination(s).
Parameters Selection This item defines the type of selection that the user wants to use to choose slabs where the design results should be displayed. Selects the type of load to be evaluated: load case, combination, class. Selects the particular load case, combination or class to be evaluated. The selection of 2D members to be evaluated may be filtered out. If ON, a table explaining the warnings and errors occurring during the design is attached to the document. This item has no response in the graphical window. The user can manually adjust the scale of displayed isolines. If ON, a special averaging algorithm is applied to eliminate unrealistic peak values. Defines the method how the final values are calculated from the finite element analysis results. Selects the group of values to be displayed. Defines the surface: upper/ lower or +Zp/-Zp, respectively. Selects the direction for which the values are calculated.
Type of load
Load cases / Combinations / Classes Filter Print explanation of errors and warnings
User scale isolines Averaging of peak values
Location
Type values Surface Direction
186
Reinforcement
Drawing Values Extreme
Defines the style of drawing. Offers available values of the particular group (Type values). Defines the places where numerical values will be added to the diagram of selected quantity. Enables the user to adjust the display style for the result diagrams.
Drawing setup
Type values and values Necessary areas As evaluated are calculated necessary areas of main reinforcement Ass - evaluated are calculated necessary areas of shear reinforcement Maximal diameters Maximal distances fr evaluated are calculated maximal diameters in individual layers sr evaluated are calculated maximal distances between reinforcement bars in individual layers tau D tau R1
Shear stresses
Output of design results

In "Member design ULS" and "Member design ULS+SLS" there are now three types of output: brief detailed advanced In the text and figures below you can get the idea about these types.
Brief Here the user can review all the reinforcement i.e. in all directions, top and bottom of the slab.
Detailed Table for lower reinforcement in both directions of the slab.
187
Note that new extra information is shown is this table: - internal cantilever arm, - depth of the compression zone, - stress in the reinforcement and concrete, - strain in the reinforcement and concrete. In the document the user can ask for an explanation of the symbols for all these values in order to make it clear for himself and clear in the output document.
Advanced Table for one direction of the lower or upper reinforcement of the slab.
188
Reinforcement
Shear calculation There are also more values in the output for the shear calculation.
189
Reinforcement ratio of slabs It is possible to view the reinforcement ratios of the slab.
Weight of the reinforcement It is also possible to view the mass of the reinforcement on the slab and have a nice overview of this reinforcement weight in the preview and/or the document window.
190
Reinforcement
Member design ULS+SLS For "Member design ULS+SLS" it is possible to display tables with calculated / optimised maximum diameter and maximum distance of reinforcement.
191
192
Reinforcement
User-scale isolines
For the display of the results of the design of 2D members (i.e. the areas of reinforcement) in the form of isolines and isobands the users can define their own palette that corresponds to a particular practical distribution of reinforcement. For example, one colour may indicate the areas where diameter 8 mm with spacing 200 mm is required, another colour the areas where diameter 8 mm with spacing between bars of 100 mm is sufficient, etc.
Note: In order to be able to use the User scale isolines, item "Location" in the Property dialogue must be set to "In nodes, averaged".
Note: When User scale isolines are in use, the Drawing setup dialogue is modified and some options in it are disabled.
Procedure to define a new User scale isolines 1) In service Concrete select function 2D member > Member design - ULS. 2) In the Property window select option Use user scale isoline. A new item named User scale isolines appears in the Property window. 3) Click the three-dot button at the User scale isolines item. 4) The User scale isolines manager is opened on the screen. 5) Click button [New] and define a user scale isoline. 6) Confirm with OK. 7) Close the User scale isolines manager. Scale of isolines input dialogue In this dialogue, the user can define the legend that reflects the profiles used in the structure.
193
Name Specifies the name of the user scale. New level group In this group you can input a new level for the isoline palette. The level is defined by the diameter of the reinforcement bar and by the distance between individual bars. The program then calculates the area of reinforcement and mean diameter and distance. One level can contain one to three different diameters, each of them with a separate spacing. Copy to legend When a new is defined, it can be added to the legend using this button. The new level is positioned in the legend according to total reinforcement area of the level. Clear level This button clears all the edit boxes in the New level group. Legend group This group displays the defined levels sorted according to the total area of reinforcement in the level. Delete active level If required, any defined level can be removed from the legend. Delete all This button clear the whole legend. The palette input in the picture above results in the following display:
194
Reinforcement
One layer reinforcement

For 2D members of type Wall or Shell, it is possible to define reinforcement consisting of just one layer located in the middle of the member. This layer holds reinforcement bars in two perpendicular directions. Each of the directions can use different diameter. The bars are place "on the middle-plane" of the member. It means that if each direction of the reinforcement uses different diameter, the centre of gravity of the reinforcement does not coincide with the centre of gravity of the member. If the project contains only 2D members with one-layer reinforcement, the corresponding property dialogues and Document tables are filtered to show only the data relating to this layer of reinforcement. On the other hand, if the project contains also 2D members with "normal" reinforcement, the property dialogues and Document tables contain items and columns relating to upper and lower surface of the reinforcement and data relating to the one-layer reinforcement are shown in items/rows for lower surface. That a particular member should have one-layer reinforcement can be defined in member data for that particular member. If a member uses one-layer reinforcement, it is not possible to run crack proof for that particular member. However, reinforcement bars or meshes can be input on such members. It is however necessary to ensure that the reinforcement is placed to the middle plane of the member. Otherwise, the program is not able to calculate the required reinforcement areas. The easiest way to ensure this is to use action button Load from member data in the dialogue for the input of 2D reinforcement. This action button automatically places the reinforcement to the middle of the member.
REDES - input of practical reinforcement

Input of practical reinforcement
There are several ways to input practical reinforcement. You can either define reinforcement based on predefined templates that are assigned to required members. Or you can input directly individual bars as separate self-standing components. If the first mentioned approach is applied, there are still several possibilities. You can select and assign required stirrup template first and then add longitudinal reinforcement through longitudinal reinforcement template. Alternatively, you may use function that works with both types of template at the same time. And last, but not least, it is possible to apply what is called "Automatic Member Reinforcement Design", which is a sophisticated algorithm that automatically detects the shape of the member and finds an optimal reinforcement. The second approach of free bars, as the name suggests, means independent (free) bars of longitudinal reinforcement. They are input as other "drawn" components, i.e. the real shape of each bar is input directly. The input of practical reinforcement requires that a lot of parameters are specified (material, diameter, anchoring details, cover, etc.).
195
Proiectare structuri de beton For reinforcement templates, the values of individual parameters are assigned using the following rules: - the value is taken from the template, - if the value does not exist in the template (e.g. cover), it is taken from Member data, - if Member data has not been not specified for the member in question, the values are taken Concrete Setup dialogue (in the Setup, always at least default values exist). For free bars, the required parameters are defined in the corresponding Property window. Once the reinforcement has been defined, the properties of reinforcement can be modified: - in the template dialogue (only for template based reinforcement), - using "Edit reinforcement in section" function, which is a kind of extended template dialogue, - through the Property window - including action-button-dialogues (extended or reduced template dialogues). SeeAlso
Reinforcement template Principle of reinforcement templates

There are two types of template: (i) template for stirrups (shear reinforcement), and (ii) template or longitudinal reinforcement. Standard templates for basic cross-sections (rectangle, T-shape, etc.) have been defined beforehand and are supplied with the program. In addition, the user may define his/her own templates for any cross-section type and arrangement of reinforcement. Templates may be used in various projects; they are not bound to a single project. The template defines position of reinforcement and number of reinforcement bars in a section. The position of individual reinforcement bars is related to the shape of the cross-section and not to its absolute dimensions. This means that each template is designed for a particular crosssection type: template for T-section, template for circular section, etc. However, there may be several different templates prepared for one cross-section type. E.g. the user may have several different templates for rectangular cross-section. A template may be then used for a particular member. The template "fits itself" to the actual cross-section dimensions, taking over all the settings defined in the Setup dialogue (related to a particular code - e.g. EC2) and in the Member data settings. Neither material, nor cover is considered in templates. These characteristics are code-related and appear only when reinforcement is inserted into a particular member.
Shear reinforcement template

Shear reinforcement template
Shear reinforcement template defines the (i) shape, (ii) number and (iii) type of stirrups (links) in a section of a member. Individual templates can be created and edited in the Stirrup shape manager.
196
Reinforcement
The Stirrup shape manager can be used to create a new template or edit an existing one. The existing templates can also be exported to an external file. And of course, new templates may be imported from an external file. The procedure to open the Stirrup shape manager Use menu function Libraries > Stirrups, or use tree menu function Library > Stirrups.
Creating a new shear reinforcement template

The procedure to create a new shear reinforcement template 1. Open the Stirrup shape manager. 2. Press button [New]. 3. The Cross-section manager is opened on the screen. 4. Select the required cross-section shape.
Note: It is not necessary to select directly the cross-section for which the template will be used. It is important to select appropriate cross-section shape. E.g. if a template for Tsection is being designed, select any T-section existing in the project. If such a crosssection does not exist in the current project, define it now.
5. Close the Cross-section manager. 6. The Stirrup shape dialogue is opened on the screen. 7. Input the stirrup or stirrups into the cross-section (read chapter "Defining the shape of a new stirrup" for details). 8. Close the Stirrup shape dialogue. 9. The new template is added to the current template database. 10. Repeat steps 2 to 9 as many times as required. 11. Close the Stirrup shape manager.
Defining the shape of a new stirrup

The real shape of a stirrup (or several stirrups) in a particular cross-section shape is defined in the dialogue called Stirrup shape.
197
Graphical window The graphical window displays the cross-section shape, auxiliary entities and defined stirrups. Shape of the cross-section Edge numbers Offset The cross-section shape is drawn and filled with colour. Individual edges are numbered. The numbering is referred to in various dialogues for input and editing of reinforcement. Edges of the cross-section are drawn also with an offset. The offset is in dashed line that can be seen before defined stirrups cover this line. Corner and intersection points may be drawn in the picture as well to simplify manual definition of a new stirrup shape. Also user defined points may be drawn. Each defined stirrup is displayed.
Characteristic points Inserted stirrup
Stirrup New stirrup This button starts manual definition of a new stirrup. The procedure for the input of a stirrup is described at the end of this topic. Automatic This button can be used only once for each template. It generates a
198
Reinforcement
stirrup that follows the shape of the cross-section. The procedure for the input of a stirrup is described at the end of this topic. Diameter The diameter of the new stirrup. This item is available only for the first stirrup in the template. Once the first stirrup has been defined, the item becomes disabled. The reason is that all the stirrups in one template must have the same diameter.
User defined points Add If required, the user may insert arbitrary number of "auxiliary" points. It is then possible to pick these points when the shape of a new stirrup is being defined manually. Any of already defined "auxiliary" points can be deleted. All points may be deleted in one step.
Delete Delete All
List of inserted stirrups List of defined stirrups The list states all the stirrups defined in the current template. If required, any stirrup may be removed (via button [Delete]).
Properties of stirrups analysis model Name Position number A name of he stirrup may be typed here. This item inform about the number of the stirrup. The template manager always shows local numbering of reinforcement bars. This information is not shown if the Stirrup shape dialogue has been opened from the Template manager. It appears only if the Stirrup shape dialogue has been opened through function Edit reinforcement in section ( ) or through the action button in the property window of a stirrup that has been already inserted into a particular member. Profile Colour Number of vertices Closed Detailing Active This item specifies the diameter of the stirrup. The default value is taken from the Setup dialogue. It is possible to select required colour of the stirrup. This item informs about the number of vertices of the stirrup. The stirrup may be closed or open. If ON, the stirrup is not used for calculation. Its purpose is to help support the longitudinal reinforcement. If Detailing is ON, it is possible to say whether the stirrup is displayed in the graphical window of the program (Active = ON), or whether it is hidden and can be seen ONLY in the dialogue for editing of the stirrup shape (Active = OFF). If ON, also torsion is checked. Moreover, the shape of the stirrup must allow for the transfer of torsion. If a stirrup template consists of more than one stirrup, this option can
Torsion
199
be turned ON for one stirrup only see the following note.
Important: Only one (1) stirrup in a section can be used for the check of torsion. For example, in a T-section, only the stirrup in the web OR the stirrup in flange can be taken into account. Moreover, only a stirrup in one (1) stirrup zone and in one (1) span can be selected for the torsion check. In other words, if there are overlapping stirrups or more stirrup zones in one beam/span, the torsion checkbox can be marked only for one (1) particular stirrup in the section.
First edge Last edge Shear in joint
For open stirrup, the user may specify the length of the first straight part of the stirrup. For open stirrup, the user may specify the length of the last straight part of the stirrup. If ON, the stirrup is used in calculation of shear stress in joints of phased cross-sections, e.g. in a T-section the shear stress between the flange and the web.
Important: Only a stirrup in one (1) stirrup zone and in one (1) span can be selected for shear stress calculation. In other words, if there are overlapping stirrups or more stirrup zones in one beam/span, the Shear in joint checkbox can be marked only for one (1) particular stirrup in the section. However, contrary to the torsion (above), all partial stirrups (web, flanges, etc.) in on one section can be selected.
Other stirrups properties Number of cuts Diameter of mandrel Specifies the number of legs of the stirrup. Defines the diameter of stirrup bend.
Properties of stirrups structural model Name Anchorage type Shows the name of the stirrup. It can be changed on tab Analysis model. Selects the anchorage type. See Hooks for options. If torsion is switched on in "Analysis model" parameters, the user may select from three types of stirrup (marked A, B, C). If torsion is switched off in "Analysis model" parameters, two other types of stirrup are available (D, E). Vertex "dimensions" Selects the vertex at which the anchoring detail is made. Defines the anchorage length. The exact meaning of the parameter is clear from the guiding picture. In order to see the picture, position the mouse cursor on top of words Anchorage type and let the mouse steady for a while. The picture is shown. If this option is ON, the program verifies the anchorage length and if the hook would stick out of the formwork, an additional bend is added so that the hook follows the shape of the formwork (i.e. the outline of
Keep formwork
200
Reinforcement
the cross-section). Permanent code check The total anchorage length is permanently checked to satisfy the condition of the minimal length stipulated in the appropriate standard. That means that e.g. change of the diameter of the bar may result in the change of the anchorage length. Shows the total bar length. The anchorage length is adjusted in accordance with the active standard. The minimum anchorage length is calculated and the hook length is adjusted accordingly. Normally, only the minimal length is checked, i.e. it is not possible to input a stirrup with anchorage length shorter than the minimum. However, it is possible to define larger anchorage length. This button should re-adjust the minimum required anchorage length. Load default Reads the default values.
Total bar length Set to code
Picture properties Draw intersection points If ON, points in intersections of individual "offset edges" are drawn in the graphical window. This option is available only for cross-section shapes where this "intersection" exists. For example, for rectangle this option is not available. If ON, points in corners of the "offset outline" of the cross-section are drawn in the graphical window. Defines the size of the auxiliary points and text. If ON, dimension lines are displayed in the graphical window of the dialogue. If necessary, the graphical window may be manually regenerated.
Draw corner points Text & Point scale Draw dimensions Redraw
The procedure to define an automatic stirrup 1. Follow the procedure given in chapter Creating a new shear reinforcement template and open the Stirrup shape dialogue. 2. Click button [Automatic] (Note that this button may not be accessible for every crosssection shape). 3. A new stirrup following the shape of the cross-section is added to the template. 4. If necessary, edit stirrup properties in the property table at the right hand side of the table. The procedure to define user-defined auxiliary points 1. Follow the procedure given in chapter Creating a new shear reinforcement template and open the Stirrup shape dialogue. 2. Click button [Add]. 3. A new point is added to the list of points. 4. Select the edge and fill in other point parameters. 5. The point appears in the graphical window. The procedure to input a new stirrup manually 1. Follow the procedure given in chapter Creating a new shear reinforcement template and open the Stirrup shape dialogue. 2. Click button [New stirrup]. 3. Pick individual auxiliary points that are supposed to form corners of the stirrup. 4. Close the stirrup or press button [End stirrup] to complete the definition. 201
Proiectare structuri de beton 5. If necessary, edit stirrup properties in the property table at the right hand side of the dialogue. Note: In case of Construction stages calculation, the user may select the phase when the stirrup starts to act.
Editing the existing shear reinforcement template

The procedure to edit an existing stirrup template 1. Open the Stirrup shape manager. 2. Select the required template. 3. Click button [Edit]. 4. The Stirrup shape dialogue is opened on the screen. 5. Make necessary modifications (see chapter Defining the shape of a new stirrup for available tools).
Longitudinal reinforcement template

Longitudinal reinforcement template
Longitudinal reinforcement template defines the (i) position, (ii) number and (iii) type of bars of main reinforcement in a section of a beam. Individual templates can be created and edited in the Longitudinal reinforcement manager.
The Longitudinal reinforcement manager can be used to create a new template or edit an existing one. The existing templates can also be exported to an external file. And of course, new templates may be imported from an external file or files. The procedure to open the Longitudinal reinforcement manager Use menu function Libraries > Longitudinal reinforcement, or use tree menu function Library > Longitudinal reinforcement.
202
Reinforcement
Creating a new main reinforcement template

A new template for longitudinal reinforcement must be based on a shear reinforcement template. It is not possible to define longitudinal reinforcement without having defined stirrups. The procedure to create a new longitudinal reinforcement template 1. Open the Longitudinal reinforcement manager. 2. Press button [New]. 3. The Stirrup shape manager is opened on the screen. 4. Select the required stirrup shape or define a new one. 5. Close the Stirrup shape manager. 6. The Longitudinal reinforcement dialogue is opened on the screen. 7. Input the reinforcement into the cross-section. 8. Close the Longitudinal reinforcement dialogue. 9. The new template is added to the current template database. 10. Repeat steps 2 to 9 as many times as required. 11. Close the Stirrup shape manager.
Inserting new reinforcement to a template

Individual layers of longitudinal reinforcement and individual solo reinforcement bars can be defined in a dialogue called Longitudinal reinforcement dialogue.
Graphical window The graphical window displays the cross-section shape, auxiliary entities and defined stirrups. Shape of the cross-section Edge numbers Stirrups in the template The cross-section shape is drawn and filled with colour. Individual edges are numbered. The numbering is referred to in various dialogues for input and editing of reinforcement. All stirrups inserted into the particular template are shown.
203
Inserted bars / layers
Each defined bar of reinforcement is displayed.
Longitudinal reinforcement New layer This button inserts a new layer of longitudinal reinforcement. The properties of bars are defined in the group New reinforcement parameters (see below). This button can be used only once for each template. It inserts bars of reinforcement into all the corners of the cross-section.
Add bars to corners
New reinforcement parameters Number of bars Profile Stirrup name Edge index Between existing bars Move layer Specifies number of bars in the layer. Specifies the diameter of the bars in the layers. Selects the stirrup from the template to which edge the new layer will be added. Specifies the edge number where the new layer will be added. If a layer has been already defined at the selected edge, the bars of the new layer are inserted between the existing bars. If a layer has been already defined at the selected edge, the bars of the new layer are put to a new row.
List and properties of inserted layers Type of beam The program distinguishes two types of beam: (i) beams and ribs and (ii) columns. This parameter is important for automatic design of reinforcement. It shows all the defined layers. If required, any layer may be deleted using button [Delete]. Properties of the layer are summarised in a property table.
List of defined layers Properties of the reinforcement Name Position number Profile Number of bars Area Layer type
Each layer may have a unique name. This item shows the local position number. Specifies the diameter of the reinforcement bar. Specifies the number of bars in the layer. Calculates the total area of reinforcement in the layer. Specifies the layer type: Uniform: reinforcement bars are uniformly distributed along the selected edge. No corner: reinforcement bars are uniformly distributed along the selected edge BUT no bars are inserted into the corners. General: each layer can be broken into separate bars. Each bar is then independent and can be edited separately.
204
Reinforcement
Edit layer Cover type
This button opens the editing dialogue for a general layer. Specifies the cover type. The cover may be measured from the surface of longitudinal reinforcement to the surface of the stirrup or from the centre of longitudinal reinforcement to the centre of the stirrup (see the Fig. bellow). Specifies the cover size. This parameter defines the position of the bar with reference to the corner of the stirrup. see above Selects the stirrup to which the layer is added. Specifies the edge of the stirrup along which the longitudinal bars are distributed. Selects the colour of the reinforcement. Shows the total reinforcement area of selected layer. Shows the total reinforcement area of all layers. If ON, dimension lines are shown in the graphical window of the dialogue. Defines the scale for the text used in the graphical window of the dialogue.
Cover Left bar Right bar Stirrup name Edge index Colour Area of selected layers Area of all layers Draw dimensions Text scale
Parameters for automatic reinforcement design Automatic design Min number of bars If ON, this layer will be used for the automatic design. If OFF, this layer will be ignored in the automatic design. Defines the minimum number of bars in the layer if the layer is created by the automatic design procedure.
Note: For beams, only two layers may be marked for the automatic design. For columns, there may be more than two layers marked for the automatic design.
Cover type There are several variants in cover measurement. Some of them are available ONLY for editing of real reinforcement in a bar. Such options are not available in the Longitudinal reinforcement dialogue.
205
The procedure to add reinforcement bars automatically 1. Follow the procedure given in chapter Creating a new main reinforcement template and open the Longitudinal reinforcement dialogue. 2. Click button [Add bars to corners] (Note that this button may not be accessible for every cross-section shape). 3. New layers are added to the template. 4. If necessary, edit layer properties in the property table at the right hand side of the table. The procedure to add a new layer manually 1. Follow the procedure given in chapter Creating a new main reinforcement template and open the Longitudinal reinforcement dialogue. 2. Fill in and select parameters of the new layer in the New reinforcement parameters group. 3. Click button [New layer] (Note that this button may not be accessible for every crosssection shape). 4. New layer is added to the template. 5. If necessary, edit layer properties in the property table at the right hand side of the table.
Editing the existing main reinforcement template

The procedure to edit an existing template for longitudinal reinforcement 1. Open the Longitudinal reinforcement manager . 2. Select the required template. 3. Click button [Edit]. 4. The Longitudinal reinforcement dialogue is opened on the screen. 5. Make necessary modifications (see chapter Inserting new reinforcement to a template for available tools).
Editing a general layer of longitudinal reinforcement

If a layer of longitudinal reinforcement is required to be broken into separate reinforcement bars, it may be done in the Detail layer property dialogue.
206
Reinforcement
Graphical window Cross-section Reinforcement bars The cross-section is drawn here. Individual bars of reinforcement related to the edited layer are shown and numbered. The selected bar is always highlighted.
Sort by Sort by The list of bars may be sorted by position numbers or by individual bars.
List of bars / position numbers List of bars New Delete Depending on item Sort by, the list shows either all individual bars or all position numbers in the current layer. A new bar or new position number can be added to the edited layer. Any item from the list may be deleted.
Structural shape Position number Profile Cover type Shows the position number of selected reinforcement. Sets the diameter of reinforcement bar. Specifies the cover type. The cover may be measured from the surface of longitudinal reinforcement to the surface of the stirrup or from the centre of longitudinal reinforcement to the centre of the stirrup. Sets the cover size. It is possible to define the bar position in absolute or relative coordinates.
Cover Coordinate definition
207
Type of position Distance type
The coordinate may be measure from either side of the edge. The position of the bar can be measured: (i) between the surface of the bar and the surface of the stirrup, (ii) between the centre of the bar and the centre of the stirrup, (iii) between the centre of the bar and the surface of the stirrup. Specifies the position of the bar.
Position
Note: Some of the items above are relevant to sorting by position numbers or by bars, respectively. CAD Shape Position number Location Shows the position number. None No anchorage details are defined. Begin The anchorage is defined only for the beginning of the bar. End The anchorage is defined only for the end of the bar. Both The anchorage is defined only for both ends of the bar. The type and dimensions are the same for both ends. Both separately The anchorage is defined only for both ends of the bar. Each end has its own type and/or dimensions. Type "dimension" Selects the anchorage type. See REDES Hooks for options. Defines the anchorage length. The exact meaning of the parameter is clear from the guiding picture. In order to see the picture, position the mouse cursor on top of words Anchorage type and let the mouse steady for a while. The picture is shown. Defines the direction of the hook/bend. Plane XZ The bar is bent in the direction of the local z-axis of the beam. The negative dimension means that the bend is against the direction of the z-axis. Plane XY The bar is bent in the direction of the local y-axis of the beam. The negative dimension means that the bend is against the direction of the y-axis. Perpendicular to edge The bar is bent so that it is perpendicular to the nearest surface of the beam and goes inside the beam. See paragraph Plane below the table. Angle plane Permanent code check Specifies the angle of the bend. See paragraph Plane below the table. The total anchorage length is permanently checked to satisfy the condition of the minimal length stipulated in the appropriate standard.
Plane
208
Reinforcement
That means that e.g. change of the diameter of the bar may result in the change of the anchorage length. Total length Set to code Set default Shows the total bar length. Sets the parameters according to the regulations of the code assigned to the project. Reads the default values.
Plane The meaning of the parameters Plane and Angle plane is demonstrated in the following four pictures. PlaneXZ with positive length
209
PlaneXY with positive length
Perpendicular to edge with positive length
210
Reinforcement
Perpendicular to edge with positive length Angle plane = 30 deg
Input and modification of reinforcement 1D members

Inserting new reinforcement to a beam
New reinforcement can be defined using several commands with different function. Both simple beam and beam with variable cross-section can be handled using the same functions. Tree menu commands Tree menu Concrete > 1D Member > Redes (without As) offers the following functions: New reinforcement New stirrups New longitudinal reinforcement Add reinforcement around opening This functions enables you to define both stirrups and main reinforcement to a given interval of selected beam. This functions enables you to define stirrups to a given interval of selected beam. This functions enables you to define the longitudinal reinforcement to a given interval of selected beam. This functions enables you to define both stirrups and main reinforcement around opening.
Toolbar commands The toolbar above the command line offers the following functions for input of reinforcement.
211
Starts function that inputs both shear and longitudinal reinforcement on the whole selected beam. Starts function that inputs both shear and longitudinal reinforcement on the whole span of the selected beam. Starts function that inputs both shear and longitudinal reinforcement to the specified interval. Starts function that inputs shear reinforcement on the whole selected beam. Starts function that inputs shear reinforcement on the whole span of the selected beam. Starts function that inputs shear reinforcement to the specified interval. Starts function that inputs longitudinal reinforcement on the whole selected beam. Starts function that inputs longitudinal reinforcement on the whole span of the selected beam. Starts function that inputs longitudinal reinforcement to the specified interval. Starts function that inputs longitudinal reinforcement to the interval defined by the beginning of selected beam and user-defined point on the beam. Starts function that inputs longitudinal reinforcement to the interval defined by the end of selected beam and user-defined point on the beam. Starts function that inputs both stirrup and longitudinal reinforcement around the selected opening. Starts function that inputs stirrup reinforcement around the selected opening. Starts function that inputs longitudinal reinforcement around the selected opening.
Before you insert any reinforcement Before a new reinforcement can be inserted into a particular beam, it is advisable to review whether: all the relevant parameters have been adjusted in Concrete > 1D member > Setup dialogue, required member data have been specified using function Concrete > 1D member > Member data, the member data specified for the beams that will be processed contain basic reinforcement (defined by number of bars at upper and lower surface) and if so, whether this reinforcement is to be transformed into real bars or discarded. Command line syntax When the program requires that you specify a position for the inputted reinforcement, you may do so using the mouse cursor. Moreover, you can also type the position in the command line. This numerical input has the following sntax.
[/][@][%]ddd [/] [@] [%] ddd

from the end of the beam from the last point point distance in percents of the beam-length point distance in current length units
212
Reinforcement Parameters of reinforcement in the Reinforcement template manager The Longitudinal template manager or Stirrup shape manager may open during the input of reinforcement. If this happens, they contain an additional item called "Parameters". This item is not present in the manager when it is open through function Libraries > Concrete, reinforcement > Longitudinal reinforcement or Libraries > Concrete, reinforcement > Stirrups. This parameter controls whether the reinforcement parameters should be based on (i) the member data settings, or on (ii) the template. This option covers the following data: diameter of stirrups and longitudinal reinforcement, cover, number of cuts (i.e. number of legs), diameter of mandrel. The abovementioned data are defined both in the template and in the member data. The user may therefore decide which definition is relevant for the particular member. Example
Reinforcement in a beam that linearly changes its cross-section, e.g. from rectangular to Tlike Let us assume a beam whose cross-section changes from a rectangle at one end to a T-section at the other end.
Even this type of beam can be reinforced using the tools available in the program. The reinforcement (in our example added more or less automatically without taking account of all possible detailing and other rules) can look for example like this: End with rectangular cross-section
213
End with T-shape cross-section
Whole beam
The scheme of reinforcement for such a beam then contains two position numbers for the stirrups one for the stirrup shape at one end (rectangle) and one for the stirrup shape at the second end of the beam (T-shape).
214
Reinforcement Sample procedures to input reinforcement There are a large number of variants that may appear when you want to input the reinforcement. Complexity of the beam (simple beam, continuous beam, beam with variable cross-section, etc.), type of reinforcement (shear, longitudinal), presence of openings, etc. play their role in the input process. As a result, the procedure may be different (even significantly different) for each possible configuration. We present here a set of typical examples. Simple (one-span) beam The procedure to input reinforcement simple beam, input of both shear and main reinforcement 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Start function Add reinforcement on whole beam ( ) . 3. Select the required member. 4. The Longitudinal reinforcement manager opens on the screen. It offers available templates for the shape of the cross-section of the selected member. 5. Select the required template. 6. Choose whether the parameters are to be taken from the template of from member data see paragraph Parameters of reinforcement in the Reinforcement template manager above. 7. If necessary, open the editing dialogue for the template and modify whatever necessary. 8. Confirm the choice in the Longitudinal reinforcement manager with [OK]. 9. The reinforcement is inserted and (depending on the adjustment of view parameters) displayed. The procedure to input reinforcement simple beam, stirrups already exist, input of main reinforcement 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Start function Add longitudinal reinforcement on whole beam ( ) . 3. Select the required member. 4. The dialogue for editing of the template of longitudinal reinforcement opens on the screen (the template is defined by the stirrups that has been already input). 5. Input the bars of longitudinal reinforcement. 6. Confirm with [OK]. 7. The reinforcement is inserted and (depending on the adjustment of view parameters) displayed. Prismatic continuous beam The procedure to input reinforcement prismatic continuous beam, input of shear reinforcement only Let us assume a symmetrical two-span continuous beam (i.e. two spans of identical length). 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Start function Add stirrups on whole beam ( ) . 3. Select the required member. 4. The Stirrup shape manager opens on the screen. 5. Select the required template. 6. Choose whether the parameters are to be taken from the template of from member data see paragraph Parameters of reinforcement in the Reinforcement template manager above. 7. If necessary, modify the template. 8. Confirm with [OK]. 9. The reinforcement is inserted and (depending on the adjustment of view parameters) displayed. Now, when you select the stirrups and click action button Edit stirrups distance, you can review that the program automatically created two stirrup zones one for each span. The reason is that one stirrup zone cannot pass from one span to another. If required, you may modify the generated zones in this dialogue.
215
Beam of variable cross-section For this type of beams the program opens a special dialogue for input of reinforcement. This dialogue lists all the spans of the selected beam and enables the user to specify required parameters for each span separately.
Note: The layout of the dialogue (i.e. the number of columns) may differ depending on the particular configuration for which the reinforcement is being defined.
Span Start position End position Position without stirrups
(informative) Shows a short description of the span: number, tape of cross-section. (informative) Shows the x-coordinate of the start-point of the span. (informative) Shows the x-coordinate of the end-point of the span. (combo box) Depending on the shear reinforcement already inputted, this column shows intervals within the span where no shear reinforcement has been defined yet. (combo box + three-dot button) This column specifies the template of longitudinal reinforcement that will be used for the newly defined reinforcement. The combo box can be used to select the required template. The three-dot button can be used to input a new template.
Template of reinforcement
Template of stirrup
(combo box + three-dot button) This column specifies the template of stirrups that will be used for the newly defined reinforcement. The combo box can be used to select the required template. The three-dot button can be used to input a new template.
Master stirrup zone
(combo box) If longitudinal reinforcement is being defined for a span where several stirrup zones with different type of stirrup have been defined, this column tells which stirrup shape is used to specify the position of the newly defined longitudinal reinforcement. The positions can be expressed in absolute or relative coordinates.
Position type
216
Reinforcement
Same stirrup template for same type of cross-section
It is possible to prescribe that the same cross-section must be reinforced using the same stirrup template.
The procedure to input reinforcement continuous beam, variable cross-section, input of shear and main reinforcement 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Start function Add reinforcement on whole beam ( ) . 3. Select the required member. 4. Dialogue for the definition of reinforcement on several spans for selected member opens on the screen. As there is no reinforcement defined in the beam, the column "Position without stirrups" contains just one interval for each span (the interval is equal to the whole span). The column Template of reinforcement offers available templates of longitudinal reinforcement. If necessary, a new template can be defined through the three-dot button. 5. Select or define the required templates for individual spans. 6. Confirm with [OK]. The procedure to input reinforcement three-span continuous beam, variable crosssection, already partially reinforced (first span with two stirrup zones: total length of the two zones shorter than the span length, each zone uses different stirrup shape; second span with one stirrup zone shorter than the span length and main reinforcement; third span without any reinforcement), input of main reinforcement, overlapping of stirrups allowed 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Start function Add longitudinal reinforcement on whole beam ( ) . 3. Select the required member. 4. The program issues a warning that stirrup zones already exist and whether you want to create new zones. Say "yes". 5. Dialogue for the definition of reinforcement on several spans for selected member opens on the screen. As the first span contains two different stirrup shapes, the input dialogue requires that the master stirrup zone be selected for the first span. There are stirrups defined for the third span, which means that no main reinforcement will be added to this span (the input of longitudinal reinforcement requires that stirrups must already exist). 6. Select the master stirrup zone. 7. Confirm with [OK]. 8. The program opens dialogue for input of longitudinal reinforcement template for the crosssection of the first span. The dialogue contains the stirrup shape selected as a master. 9. Input the position of longitudinal bars. 10. Confirm with [OK]. 11. The program opens dialogue for input of longitudinal reinforcement template for the crosssection of the first span. This time, the dialogue already contains some longitudinal reinforcement, because the second span was already partially reinforced. 12. Make necessary modifications. If you define no reinforcement here, no bars will be added. If you define some new bars here, they will extend over the whole length of the span. 13. Confirm with [OK]. 14. The reinforcement is added to the beam.
Note: If the basic (assumed) reinforcement has been defined in the member data of the member-to-be-reinforced, it can be inserted automatically into the member. The user is asked by the program if they wishe to do so.
217
Note: If the reinforcement has been inserted to an "arbitrary member" (i.e. to a member with several spans) and the length of the spans is being altered, the program checks what happens with the reinforcement. If the reinforcement can be modified correspondingly, the geometrical modification is performed. However, if the geometrical modification leads to the situation that some reinforcement would disappear or that the program cannot determine what to do with the reinforcement, the geometrical modification is not performed.
Display style of reinforcement

Display style of shear reinforcement can be controlled via corresponding view parameters from tab Concrete. Service Display on opening the service If ON, the reinforcement is displayed whenever service Concrete is opened.
Concrete + reinforcement Display If OFF, no concrete and reinforcement symbols and descriptions are displayed. If ON, the selected symbols and/or descriptions are shown. Member data If ON, the symbol denoting that some member data have been defined for a particular member is drawn at the corresponding member. If OFF, the longitudinal reinforcement is not drawn at all. all All longitudinal reinforcement is displayed without detailing The longitudinal reinforcement marked as "detailing" is not displayed. only detailing Only the longitudinal reinforcement marked as "detailing" are displayed. Stirrups If OFF, nothing is displayed.
Main reinforcement Style of main reinforcement
218
Reinforcement
If ON, you can select the style see below. Style of stirrups all All types of stirrups are displayed. without detailing The stirrups marked as "detailing" are not displayed. only detailing Only the stirrups marked as "detailing" are displayed. Number of stirrups Options for the style are: One shape Only one stirrup is drawn on a beam.
All All stirrups in the beam are shown.
In ends Only three stirrups at the beginning and end of each reinforcement interval are drawn.
219
Colour of reinforcement
Defines the style for the colour of the reinforcement. Normal Standard drawing style is used. Colour by material The colour of material is applied. Colour by layers The colour of layers is applied. Colour by diameter The colour depends on the diameter. Each diameter uses one colour.
Scheme of reinforcement Reinforcement drawing type
If ON, the scheme of reinforcement is displayed below the corresponding members. Thin line Thin line is used to draw reinforcement.
By diameter The thickness of the line used to draw reinforcement depends on the reinforcement diameter.
220
Reinforcement
3D Full 3D view of reinforcement is used. This option may result in slower response of the program.
Rounded bends
If ON, the bends are drawn realistically with a corresponding radius in corners. If OFF, the bends are drawn just schematically with sharp corners.
Concrete labels Display label Name User defined reinforcement Diameter Material Cover Environmental class If OFF, none of the following labels is displayed. If ON, the selected labels are displayed. Shows the name of reinforcement. Shows the basic (user defined) reinforcement (if defined in member data). Shows the diameter of reinforcement. Shows the material of reinforcement. Shows the concrete cover. Shows the adjusted environmental class.
221
Proiectare structuri de beton Reinforcement labels Display label Type position number Name Diameter Material Reinforcement area Reinforcement position Style of reinforcement position If OFF, none of the following labels is displayed. If ON, the selected labels are displayed. The position number is shown (in a circle). The name of the reinforcement is shown. Shows the diameter of reinforcement. Shows the material of the reinforcement. Prints the reinforcement area. Prints the reinforcement position. Positions on member The x-coordinate of the start- and end-points of the reinforcement is shown. Length of reinforcement Length of reinforcement bars is displayed. Position and length The x-coordinate of the starting point of reinforcement and the reinforcement bar length is displayed Labels plane screen plane The description is put into the screen plane. local beam plane xy The description is put into the selected plane defined by means of local coordinate system of the beam. local beam plane xz ditto local beam plane yz ditto Stirrup label Dimension Dimension line is used to describe stirrups. Symbol Special symbol is used to describe stirrups. Type position number Local Local position numbers for a particular beam are used. The local number is just for a particular member. Global Global position numbers for the whole structure are used. The global number is for the whole structure. Read also Display style of reinforcement in slabs.
222
Reinforcement
Stirrup zones
The main function for insertion of stirrups into a beam assumes that the stirrups are distributed regularly along the beam. Sometimes it may be necessary to increase or reduce the distance between stirrups. The user may define spans (zones) on the beam. In addition, each span may consists of several parts (intervals). The distance between stirrups in each part may be different. The procedure to define a new zone is described in chapter Editing the distance between stirrups. Stirrup zones dialogue
List of spans List of defined spans [New span] The list shows all the defined spans. This button adds a new span to the beam. Sum of span lengths must be equal to the total beam length. Before a new span can be inserted, the length of current one (or ones) must be reduced to make room for the new span. This button deletes the selected span.
[Delete span]
Span properties Span number Length Shows span number. Defines the length of the span. We repeat that the sum of span lengths must be equal to the total beam length. Before a new span can be inserted, the length of current one (or ones) must be reduced to make room for the new span. Specifies the diameter of stirrup used. It is possible to have different diameter in each span. Distance Distance real Defines the distance between adjacent stirrups. Recalculates the distance between stirrups so that the stirrups fit into the span.
Diameter
223
Type
It is possible to use single, double or triple stirrups. Single: just one stirrup is in each "stirrup row". Double: two stirrups just next to each other are in each "stirrup row". Triple: three stirrups just next to each other are in each "stirrup row".
Distance to begin Distance to end
Defines a free space without any stirrups at the beginning of the span. Defines a free space without any stirrups at the end of the span. This item is only accessible if option "Symmetrical stirrups" is OFF.
Parts of span Input type Numbers + distance The stirrup distribution is defined by means of number of stirrups per the part and the distance between two adjacent stirrups. Numbers + total distance The stirrup distribution is defined by means of number of stirrups per the part and the distance between the first and last stirrup. Distance + total distance The stirrup distribution is defined by means of the distance between two adjacent stirrups and the distance between the first and last stirrup. Numbers Diameter Distance Total distance Type Defines or shows the number of stirrups per the part. Specifies the diameters of the stirrup. It is possible to have different diameter in each part. Defines or shows the distance between two adjacent stirrups. Defines or shows the distance between the first and last stirrup. Defines the arrangement of stirrups: single, double, triple.
If option Symmetrical stirrups is OFF, the user must define parts of span at the beginning and at the end of the span. Example 1 Lets assume that the following Minimum stirrup reinforcement and Additional stirrup reinforcement are defined in the Stirrup zones dialogue. Minimum stirrup reinforcement Span no. 1 Diameter 8 Distance 300 Type single
Additional stirrup reinforcement Number 3 Diameter 8 Distance 75 Total Distance 200 (150+50) Type single
224
Reinforcement
100
500
single
The final stirrup distribution
Example 2 The stirrups may be doubled in one section. The distance between stirrups is then measured between the centres of gravity of doubled stirrups. Additional stirrup reinforcement Number 3 5 Diameter 8 8 Distance 75 100 Total Distance 200 (150+50) 500 Type double single
The final stirrup distribution
Editing the distance between stirrups

The procedure to define a new span (zone) for stirrups 1. Start service Concrete. 2. Select the shear reinforcement that needs modification. 3. The properties of the reinforcement are shown in the Property window. 4. Press button [Edit distance] on the Action bar of the Property window. 5. The Stirrup zones dialogue is opened on the screen.
225
Proiectare structuri de beton 6. Define the required zone or zones. 7. Close the dialogue.
Editing the shear reinforcement

The parameters of shear reinforcement may be edited in the Property window. The parameters offered in the property table may vary according to the reinforcement distribution along the beam. Generally, stirrups may be arranged in several spans and zones. The number of zones used on a beam controls the parameters offered for quick editing in the Property table. Parameters that are not offered in the Property window may be edited in the Stirrup zones dialogue. Parameters of shear reinforcement Name Type of zone Position number Material Diameter Stirrup covers Number of cuts Specifies the name of the reinforcement. Shows the type of reinforcement. Shows the position number. Defines the material of the stirrup. Defines the diameter of the stirrup. Defines the cover size. Defines the arrangement of stirrups. It is possible to use single, double or triple stirrups. Single: just one stirrup is in each "stirrup row". Double: two stirrups just next to each other are in each "stirrup row". Triple: three stirrups just next to each other are in each "stirrup row". Stirrup distance First position Last position Defines the distance between stirrups. Specifies the interval without stirrups at the beginning of the beam. Specifies the interval without stirrups at the end of the beam.
Note: Some parameters may be filtered out if (i) there are several spans and zoned defined along the beam, or (ii) the stirrup template of the beam consists of several partial stirrups and each stirrup is made of different material or (iii) different diameter, or if (iv) cover size is different per each surface, etc.
Editing the hidden parameters of shear reinforcement The parameters filtered out due to the reasons mentioned in the note above may be edited in specialised dialogues accessible via Action buttons in the Property window. [Edit stirrup] [Edit cover] [Edit distance] Opens the Stirrup shape dialogue. Opens the Covers dialogue. Opens the Stirrup zones dialogue.
226
Reinforcement Deleting stirrups
IMPORTANT: As soon as transverse reinforcement is removed from a beam, all longitudinal reinforcement is deleted as well. The longitudinal reinforcement is bound to stirrups and therefore it may not be kept in a beam if any stirrup is removed.
Editing the cover

If required, the user may edit the cover size for a specific beam. It is possible to change the cover at each surface of the beam. The value of cover is normally taken from member data. It may be different for upper and lower surface. But it is constant otherwise. This dialogue enables the user to modify the cover at every edge of the section. Covers dialogue
The dialogue contains a graphical window with displayed cross-section and stirrup template of the selected beam. In addition, a simple property table provides for necessary modification of cover size for every edge of the cross-section. The procedure to edit cover on a specific beam 1. Start service Concrete. 2. Select the shear reinforcement that needs modification. 3. The properties of the reinforcement are shown in the Property window. 4. Press button [Edit cover] on the Action bar of the Property window. 5. Modify the required cover values. 6. Close the dialogue. 7. Clear the selection.
Note: Cover is always related to the transverse reinforcement (stirrups) because the longitudinal reinforcement is always related to a stirrup. The offset of the longitudinal reinforcement is defined from a stirrup. Of course, it is possible to define the offset from a face of the member. This however would result in the loss of the sophisticated feature enabling the automatic regeneration of longitudinal reinforcement after the modification of cover.
227
Editing the longitudinal reinforcement

There are two approaches to edit the longitudinal reinforcement on a specific beam. Editing of a specific layer of reinforcement Editing of a specific section of the beam Each approach is described in a separate chapter.
Editing a specific layer of longitudinal reinforcement

The parameters of a selected layer of longitudinal reinforcement are shown in the Property table. The user may modify the values here. Name Type of zone Material Number of bars Position x1 Position x2 Coordination definition Origin Description > Horizontal Description > Vertical [Edit bars] Specifies the name of the layer. Shows the type of reinforcement. Specifies the material of the selected reinforcement layer. Specifies the number of reinforcement bars in the selected layer. Defines the starting point of the reinforcement. Defines the end point of the reinforcement. Selects the coordination system used to define the extent of the reinforcement. Defines the origin of the coordination system. Defines the horizontal position of description (the description style may be further adjusted in the View parameters dialogue). Defines the vertical position of description (the description style may be further adjusted in the View parameters dialogue). This action button opens the dialogue for detailed editing of the reinforcement bars of the selected layer.
The procedure to edit a specific layer of longitudinal reinforcement 1. Start service Concrete. 2. Select the layer of longitudinal reinforcement that needs modification. 3. The properties of the reinforcement are shown in the Property window. 4. Edit the properties to modify displayed parameters. 5. If required, press button [Edit bars] to edit parameters in detail. 6. Clear the selection.
Editing a specific section of longitudinal reinforcement

The user may select a particular section of a particular beam and edit the reinforcement it this section. It is possible to edit both the (i) longitudinal reinforcement, (ii) shear reinforcement, and (iii) cover in the selected section. In addition, the modified reinforcement may se saved as a template of longitudinal reinforcement. The procedure to edit a specific section of a beam 1. Start service Concrete. 2. Press button [Edit cut] ( ) on the toolbar just above the command line OR use tree menu function 1D member > Redes (without As) > Edit reinforcement in section. 3. Select the beam that needs modification. 4. Select the section where the modification is supposed to be made. 5. The Longitudinal reinforcement dialogue is opened on the screen see chapter Inserting new reinforcement to a template for more about what can be done in this dialogue.
228
Reinforcement 6. If required, press button [Edit stirrups] to edit shear reinforcement see chapter Defining the shape of a new stirrup for details. 7. If required, press button [Edit cover] to edit cover see chapter Editing the cover for more information on this task. 8. When done, close the opened dialogue or dialogues.
Copying the reinforcement

The procedure to copy reinforcement 1. Select the reinforcement on the original member. 2. Invoke the pop-up menu of the graphical window and start function Copy add-data. 3. Select the target member or members. 4. Clear the selection.
Note: Longitudinal reinforcement may be copied only to members with already inserted stirrups of corresponding type. Alternatively, the longitudinal erinforcement may be copied together with stirrups. As the longitudinal reinforcement is bound to stirrups, it may not be kept in a beam without appropriate stirrups.
Changing the cross-section of a beam

If required, it is possible to change the cross-section of a beam even after some reinforcement has been input into this beam. If the shape of the cross-section remains the same and only the dimensions are different (even the proportion of individual dimensions may be changed), the change of the cross-section has no negative effect on the existing reinforcement. Since the reinforcement is based on templates (shear reinforcement templates and longitudinal reinforcement templates), the program is capable of handling the change of the cross-section. The distribution of reinforcement across the section is kept and only the distance between individual bars is adjusted to comply with the new dimensions. The size of cover is unchanged as well. If however, the shape of the cross-section is changed (e.g. from a rectangle to I-shape), all the existing reinforcement in the affected beams is removed and must be input again. The procedure to change a cross-section 1. Use the Cross-section manager to prepare the new cross-section. 2. Select the beam whose cross-section is to be changed. 3. In the Cross-section item of the Property window select the new cross-section. 4. Clear the selection. 5. Verify that the reinforcement in the new section is what expected and required.
Reinforcement in 1D members with opening

With regard to openings in 1D members, there are two issues that can be handled by the program: 1. splitting of shear and main reinforcement if it passes through the opening, 2. adding of reinforcement around the opening. Splitting of reinforcement You may insert an opening into a 1D member. If such an opening is marked as "Use for analysis and design", then the reinforcement algorithm used in functions combined under tree branch 1D member > Redes (without As) can automatically adapt the reinforcement, so that it takes into account the opening. It can be simply explained on an example. Let us assume a simple one-span beam with an opening somewhere in the middle of its length. If shear and longitudinal reinforcement has been inserted into this member, the program automatically splits the reinforcement. As a result:
229
Proiectare structuri de beton two stirrup zones have been created the first one going from the start-point of the beam to the face of the opening and the second one extending from the other face of the opening to the end-point of the beam, the longitudinal reinforcement bars has been cut into two parts with one part extending from the start-point of the beam to the face of the opening and the second one going from the other face of the opening to the end-point of the beam.
After the reinforcement has been inserted into a beam with an opening, it is possible to edit the size and position of the opening. The reinforcement is adapted accordingly after each such change. And vice versa: it is also possible to edit the reinforcement or add new bars, and all of them will take into account the existing opening.
This functionality (splitting the reinforcement) allows for an opening of any shape, e.g. rectangular, circular, I-shaped, T shaped, etc.
Reminder: In order to ensure that the reinforcement functions taken into account the openings defined in 1D members, the opening must have the option Use for analysis and design switched on.
230
Reinforcement Reinforcement around opening The program allows you to input both shear and longitudinal reinforcement around openings. The programs analyses the shape of the opening and creates a new cross-section. If this crosssection shape is not present in the current reinforcement template library of the project, you must define a new reinforcement template for the new shape of the cross-section. Once this is done, the program is able to use the standard algorithm. The beam is divided to individual spans (e.g. first span = from the beginning of the beam to one face of the opening; second span = the opening; third span = from the face of the opening to the end of the beam). Let us demonstrate the procedure on a typical example of a simple beam with a rectangular opening in the middle of the span. The beam has been already reinforced using the standard procedure.
Now, you have to add the reinforcement around the opening. 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Start function 1D member > Redes (without As) > Add reinforcement around opening ( ). 3. Select the opening. 4. The program analyses the shape of the cross-section and opens a dialogue for input of a new stirrup template.
231
5. Define the shape of stirrups and confirm with [OK]. Close also the Stirrup shape manager. 6. A dialogue for input of longitudinal reinforcement template is opened on the screen.
7. Define the position of the main reinforcement around opening and confirm with [OK]. Close also the Longitudinal shape manager. 8. The reinforcement is added to the beam.
232
Reinforcement
This functionality (input of reinforcement around opening) requires that the opening be only of a rectangular shape. Moreover, the opening must not be rotated.
Reminder: In order to ensure that the reinforcement functions taken into account the openings defined in 1D members, the opening must have the option Use for analysis and design switched on.
Handling multiple openings It is possible to define several openings in one member. If the openings were input separately, i.e. each opening on one call of Structure tree function 1D member > Modificator > Opening, there is no problem and the procedure described above can be applied on each of the openings.
However, if the openings were defined using the Repeat parameter, you must be aware of the consequences.
This way of input means that every time you select one of the openings, all of them are selected as they represent a single entity (multiple opening). This means that also the function for input of reinforcement around opening treats these openings as one entity. As a result, when you select the opening, the program opens a special dialogue on the screen in which you can define the reinforcement template for each of the multiple openings.
233
2D members
Inserting new reinforcement to a slab
Procedure to input the reinforcement into a slab 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Start tree menu function 2D member > reinforcement 2D. 3. Select the slab into which you need to define the reinforcement. 4. The Reinforcement 2D dialogue is opened on the screen. 5. Fill in the required parameters see below. 6. Confirm with [OK]. 7. Input the region where the specified reinforcement is to be inserted. 8. End the function. Reinforcement 2D dialogue General parameters Name 2D member Reinforcement Type Bars The user defines numbers, diameters, etc. of bars in individual layers. See below for more information. Mesh The user selects a pre-defined reinforcement mesh (usually made by a stainless steel mesh manufacturer) from a library of reinforcement meshes. See below for more information. Reinforcement - Bars Material Surface Number of directions Defines the material for the reinforcement. Specifies the surface: lowed, upper. The reinforcement can be laid in one or Specifies the name of the reinforced region. Shows the name of the member.
234
Reinforcement
two perpendicular directions. Direction closest to surface Defines in which direction the layer of the reinforcement is closer to the surface. Specifies possible inclination of the first direction. Defines the diameter of the reinforcement bars. Defines the thickness of the cover. Defines the distance of individual bars. The zero offset means that the first bar is put directly along the edge of the reinforced region (usually a slab of subregion). Nonzero offset means that there is a gap between the first bar and the edge of the reinforced region. Reinforcement area *) (informative) Shows the total reinforcement area per one-metre-section of the slab. Total weight (informative) Shows the total weight of the reinforcement in the reinforced region. This item has no meaning in the input dialogue. It gives the correct value only when the existing reinforcement region is edited. *) Items marked by the asterisk must be defined separately for every direction of the reinforcement in the reinforced region. Reinforcement - Mesh Mesh Material Surface Number of directions Selects the required mesh from the library of reinforcement meshes. Defines the material for the reinforcement. Specifies the surface: lowed, upper. (informative) Informs about the number of directions of reinforcement in the selected mesh. Direction closest to surface Angle of the first direction Diameter *) Defines the direction in which the reinforcement is closer to the surface. Specifies possible inclination of the first direction. (informative) Specifies the diameter of the reinforcement bars. It is defined in the mesh library.
Angle of the first direction Diameter *) Concrete cover *) Bar distance *) Offset *)
235
Concrete cover *) Bar distance *)
Defines the thickness of the cover. (informative) Specifies the distance of individual bars. It is defined in the mesh library.
Offset *)
The zero offset means that the first bar is put directly along the edge of the reinforced region (usually a slab of subregion). Nonzero offset means that there is a gap between the first bar and the edge of the reinforced region.
Reinforcement area *)
(informative) Shows the total reinforcement area per one-metre-section of the slab.
Total weight
(informative) Shows the total weight of the reinforcement in the reinforced region. This item has no meaning in the input dialogue. It gives the correct value only when the existing reinforcement region is edited.
*) Items marked by the asterisk must be defined separately for every direction of the reinforcement in the reinforced region. Geometry The reinforcement is always defined for a particular region. The reinforcement is distributed uniformly over this region. It is not possible to input separate bars of reinforcement. The shape of the reinforced region is defined by means of the following parameters. Geometry defined by Point The reinforcement region is defined by its centre, width, length and possible inclination. Line The reinforcement region is defined by its centre line and width. Polygon The reinforcement region is defined by the polygon outlining the region. Point: width, length, angle (available only for option Point) The three input values specify the size and orientation of the reinforced region. (available only for option Line) The direction and length of the reinforced region is defined by the input line. This parameter defines the width of the reinforced region.
Line: width
236
Reinforcement
Display style of reinforcement

The user may control the display style of the reinforcement through a set of view parameters. View parameters The view parameters related to reinforcement can be found under group Reinforcement regions 2d on tab Concrete. Display This parameter must be ON if the reinforcement is to be displayed. Simple Only the symbol representing the reinforcement is displayed.
Display style
Distribution The symbolic representation plus the indication of the distance between individual bars is displayed.
Distribution full The "real" distribution of the reinforcement is displayed.
237
Real positions All the option mentioned above draw the reinforcement schematically into the middle plane of the reinforced slab. Option Real positions displays the reinforcement in its real (actual) position. Upper layer Switches ON/OFF the layer of the reinforcement at the upper surface. Switches ON/OFF the layer of the reinforcement at the lower surface. This parameter must be ON if the reinforcement labels are to be displayed. Shows the name of the bars. Shows the diameter and distance of the reinforcement bars.
Lower layer
Display label
Name Diameter+distance
Read also Display style of reinforcement in beams.
Editing the reinforcement parameters

Procedure to edit the parameters of reinforcement in slabs 1. Select the reinforcement that needs editing. 2. The properties of the selected reinforcement are shown in the Property Window. 3. Modify the required parameters. 4. Clear the selection.
Editing the shape of the reinforced region

If the reinforced region was input as a polygon, you can later modify its shape.
238
Reinforcement
Procedure to edit the shape of the reinforced region 1. Select the reinforcement the region of which is to be modified. 2. The properties of the selected reinforcement are shown in the Property Window. 3. Click action button Edit geometry. 4. You can use the right-mouse button to invoke the pop-up menu and insert or delete vertices. 5. Or you can drag-and-drop the vertices by mouse. 6. To finish the editing, invoke the pop-up menu and select End polygon edit. Geometric manipulations with the reinforced area Any function for geometric manipulations can be used to modify the reinforced area. That means that functions like Move, Copy, Stretch, Rotate, etc. can be used.
2D reinforcement mesh
The reinforcement in slabs (and walls as well) in Scia Engineer can be realised by individual bars (laid in specified distance) or by (pre-manufactured) reinforcement meshes. The reinforcement meshes in Scia Engineer are defined in a specialised database manager. The input is a two step process. In the first step, the user defines (or selects from predefined) the type of the mesh. In the second step, the mesh definition is completed by all necessary details. The procedure to input the reinforcement mesh 1. Open the 2D reinforcement mesh library: a. use menu function Libraries > 2D reinforcement mesh. 2. Click button [New]. 3. The 2D reinforcement mesh input dialogue is opened on the screen. 4. Select the Type of mesh or define a new one through the three dot button [...]. (If no type of mesh has been defined yet, the Reinforcement mesh type library is opened automatically.) 5. Specify all the parameters of the new mesh. 6. Confirm with [OK]. 7. Close the 2D reinforcement mesh library.
Reinforcement mesh type library

The Reinforcement mesh type library is a standard Scia Engineer database manager. The user can use this manager to define the type of reinforcement meshes that will be used as the reinforcement of slabs (walls). The type defined here is then used as the basis for the input of a particular 2D reinforcement mesh. Mesh type parameters Name Description Diameter *) Bar distance *) Offset *) Name of the type. Short description. Defines the diameter of the reinforcement bars. Defines the distance of individual bars. The zero offset means that the first bar is put directly along the edge of the reinforced region (usually a slab of subregion). Nonzero offset means that there is a gap between the first bar and the edge
239
of the reinforced region. Reinforcement area *) (informative) Shows the total reinforcement area per one-metre-section of the slab. Total weight Total weight of the reinforcement (per unit area).
*) Items marked by the asterisk must be defined separately for every direction of the reinforcement mesh. There are two directions in the mesh.
2D reinforcement mesh library

The 2D reinforcement mesh library is a standard Scia Engineer database manager. The user can use this manager to specify the reinforcement meshes that will be used as the reinforcement of slabs (walls). The reinforcement mesh input is based on a type defined in Reinforcement mesh type library. Mesh parameters Name Description Producer Code Name of the type. Short description. Name of the producer of the particular mesh. Specifies the code for which the mesh can be used. This information does not affect the calculation. It is only a passive information. Material included The user may decide whether the material for the reinforcement is defined here in the reinforcement mesh library or if the material is taken from the settings in Concrete > 2D member > Setup (lower priority) or in Concrete > 2D member > Member data (higher prioroty). (only if Material included set to ON) Specifies the material for the mesh. Type of mesh Direction close to surface Selects the type of the mesh. Specifies the direction of the reinforcement that is closer to the surface. Defines the diameter of the reinforcement bars. Defines the distance of individual bars. The zero offset means that the first bar is put directly along the edge of the reinforced region (usually a slab of subregion). Nonzero offset means that there is a gap between the first bar and the edge of the reinforced region.
Material
Diameter *) Bar distance *) Offset *)
240
Reinforcement
Reinforcement area *)
(informative) Shows the total reinforcement area per one-metre-section of the slab.
Total weight of reinforcement
(informative) Tell the user the total weight of the reinforcement (per unit area).
Bar lap
Defines the overlap of the bars.
*) Items marked by the asterisk must be defined separately for every direction of the reinforcement mesh. There are two directions in the mesh.
Free bars
Free bars
The normal way in Scia Engineer is to define the reinforcement in beams through templates for both shear and longitudinal reinforcement. On the other hand, it may be sometimes more convenient to input separate bars (both stirrups and longitudinal bars). This feature is also necessary when the reinforcement is imported from a third party program (e.g. Allplan). The principle is that the user defines the shape of the reinforcement bars and then selects the members into which these bars are included. Free bars are considered in all calculations (design and checks). On the other hand, free bars are not included in the bill of material and scheme of reinforcement. Free bar input parameters Basic parameters Name Layer Specifies the name of the entity. Defines the layer into which the entity is located. (informative) Tells the position number of the bar. Diameter Mandrel Material Long/Stirrup Specifies the diameter of the bar. Specifies the mandrel. Specifies the material of the bar. Tells if the bar is a longitudinal bar or a stirrup. If ON, the bar is ignored in design and checks. It is just a structural bar.
Position number
Construct
Repetition Number It is possible to input a set of bars at a time. This parameter specifies the total
241
number of the bars in one set. Dir X Dir Y Dir Z Description position Horizontal Defines the horizontal position of the description (label) of the reinforcement bar. Defines the vertical position of the description (label) of the reinforcement bar. These three values determine the distance between individual bars in the set.
Vertical
Anchorage Location Add/subtract Defines if anchorage length is to be defined with the bar or not. Specifies whether the specified anchorage length is to be added to the input bar or whether the effective length of the bar is obtained from the defined bar by subtracting the specified anchorage length. Specifies the anchorage length.
Length Arc Curve type
Defines the type of the curve in bents of the reinforcement. Defines the parameter of the selected curve.
Curve parameter
The procedure to input a free bar 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Start function New free bars > New free bar. 3. The input dialogue is opened on the screen. 4. Fill in the required parameters. 5. Confirm with [OK]. 6. Define the shape of the bar in the graphical window. 7. End the function. Allocation of free bars Once a free bar is input, it represents a standalone entity that has no relation to any of the defined beams, columns, plates, etc. in the model. It is necessary to allocate the bar to required members. The principle is similar to the allocation of post tensioned tendons.
242
Reinforcement The allocation can be done through the corresponding action buttons. Manual allocation The user manually selects the members where the reinforcement free bar is allocated. To do sop, select the required free bar and click action button [Select allocation]. Then follow with the selection of appropriate members. Automatic allocation The program automatically selects the members where the reinforcement free bar is allocated. To allocate bars automatically, click action button [Allocate automatically]. The program does the allocation on its own. Editing the shape and properties of a free bar Once a free is defined, it is possible to change its properties and/or shape. The procedure to change the parameters of a free bar 1. Select the required free bar. 2. Its properties are displayed in the Property window. 3. Make necessary changes. 4. Clear the selection. The procedure to change the shape of a free bar 1. Select the required free bar. 2. Its properties are displayed in the Property window. A few action buttons are displayed in the Property window as well. 3. Click button [Table edit geometry] to get a table with bar coordinates. You may modify the shape in this table. 4. Alternatively, you may click button [Table edit geometry] to be able to edit graphically the shape of the bar. When this option is activated, the vertices of the selected free bar are highlighted and can be moved, etc. 5. Clear the selection when everything is done. Exploding normal reinforcement into free bars Any standard reinforcement can be exploded into free bars. Once this is done, the reinforcement bars lose all their original properties and become free bars. This operation is irreversible. The procedure to explode a normal reinforcement into free bars 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Start function New free bars > Explode to free bar. 3. Select the required reinforcement. End the selection with ESC 4. You are asked if the reinforcement elements are to be deleted or not. 5. Select YES if you want to have just the free bars (the original reinforcement is transformed into free bars.) 6. Select NO f you want to keep the original reinforcement and have its copy converted into the free bars.
Anchorage detailing Anchorage of reinforcement

Scia Engineer allows the user to specify the details (length, shape) of anchorage in stirrups and longitudinal bars. In Scia Engineer, this is sometimes called hooks and bends. The solution focuses on simple straight beams. This means that connections (of column and beam) are not covered for the time being. All dimensions and properties of the reinforcement including the anchorage details can be parameterised (dimensions, angles, numbers, material, bars diameter) The anchorage is not a part of the bar for calculation. This can be indicated by a separate colour of the anchorage length user adjustable.
243
Proiectare structuri de beton The design of the anchorage can be done for the following national standards: Following codes are supported: EC, NEN, DIN, SIA, BAEL, CSN/STN, NORM, BS.
Defining the anchorage details for stirrups

The anchorage details (also known as CAD shape of the stirrup) are a part of the stirrup template. Consequently, the specification of the anchorage is integrated into the standard procedure for the input of stirrups. Find more in the following chapters: Reinforcement Reinforcement template Shear reinforcement template Shear reinforcement template Creating a new shear reinforcement template Defining the shape of a new stirrup Editing the existing shear reinforcement template
Defining the anchorage details for longitudinal bars

Procedure to define the anchorage details for a longitudinal bar 1. Before you may define the anchorage details, you must first input the longitudinal reinforcement in a standard way. To do so, follow the instructions given in chapter
244
Reinforcement Reinforcement > Input and modification of reinforcement > 1D members > Inserting new reinforcement to a beam. Select the reinforcement for which you want to specify the anchorage details. The properties of the bars are displayed in the Property window. Also the parameters related to the anchorage are contained in the table. (Alternatively you may click action button [Edit bars], get the Detail layer property dialogue opened on the screen, activate tab CAD Shape and fill in the required parameters there (see chapter Editing a general layer of longitudinal reinforcement). Adjust the parameters as required. Clear the selection.
2. 3.
4. 5.
View parameters related to anchorage detailing

The user may control the display style of the detailing through a set of view parameters and other display-related settings. View parameters The view parameters related to anchorage details can be found under group Concrete + reinforcement on tab Concrete. Colour of reinforcement normal This option takes the colours as they were adjusted in Setup > Colours/Lines function. The hooks and bends (anchorage details) are displayed using the same colour as the rest of the reinforcement. normal with anchorage This option takes the colours as they were adjusted in Setup > Colours/Lines function, but it takes into account the colour adjusted for anchorage length. colour by material The colour if the reinforcement is controlled by the adjusted colour of material. The hooks and bends (anchorage details) are displayed using the same colour as the rest of the reinforcement. colour by layers Analogous to the previous option. colour by diameters Analogous to the previous option. Rounded bends If ON, the bends are drawn in realistic way. This option may lead to a decreased speed of the program on less powerful computers or in very large models. If OFF, the bends are drawn "schematically", i.e. using a sharp angle. This option puts less demand on the performance capacity of the computer. Colours Colour for the reinforcement and anchorage details can be adjusted in Setup > Colours/Lines. Longitudinal reinforcement Specifies the colour of the main reinforcement.
245
Anchorage length Stirrups
Specifies the colour over the anchorage length. Specifies the colour of the stirrups. The anchorage length of stirrups is always drawn in the colour of the stirrup.
Automatic design of reinforcement Automatic design of reinforcement

The non-prestressed reinforcement in beams can be defined manually by the user or it can be calculated automatically by the program. The latter designs the reinforcement on the basis of parameters defined in: reinforcement template, setup dialogue of service Concrete, member data related to the automatic design, practical reinforcement defined manually. The automatic design takes into account the combination of bending moments and axial force and shear forces. It does not include torque and deflections. It works within the ultimate limit state. The automatic design can be used for loads cases, ULS (not SLS) combinations and classes with ULS or ULS+SLS combinations. Concerning the parameters mentioned above, the practical reinforcement is of the highest priority. That means, if some reinforcement has been defined, the automatic design uses in the first step the diameter of this practical reinforcement. There is no output to the document. The results of the automatic design can be reviewed only on the screen in the graphical window and/or in the Preview window. Of course, the bill of reinforcement can be inserted into the document in order to show the reinforcement that has been automatically designed. The automatic design uses only the layers of the reinforcement marked in the reinforcement template. The automatic design is not capable of adding a new layer in the situation when the required reinforcement cannot be put into just one layer. Therefore, it may happen that the automatic design can fail.
Member data for the automatic reinforcement design

General Name Max. exploitation of cross-section Specifies the name of the member data. Specifies the maximal utilisation of the crosssection in the automatically reinforced beam. The value may be between 1 and 100%. Reinforcement template Shows the used reinforcement template. Note: This item appears in the dialogue ONLY when the already defined member data are edited. If the member data are being assigned to a new member, this item is not accessible.
246
Reinforcement Longitudinal reinforcement Try to reduce length of bars If OFF, the program uses only bars that extent along the whole length of the beam. If ON, some bars may be shortened if the unity check is satisfied without them. Maximal number of bigger diameters than the default Defines how many different (bigger) diameters of the reinforcement can be used for the optimisation. Let us assume that the default diameter specified in the Design default tab is 10mm. If this parameter is set to 2, the program can use diameters 10, 12 (i.e. +1 item in the manufacturing programme) and 14 (i.e. +2 item in the manufacturing programme) for the design. Do not use "Neighbouring" bars Some standards recommend that "neighbouring" profiles from the manufacturing programme should not be used in one beam (in order to avoid unintentional interchange of the profiles). Let us assume that the default diameter specified in the Design default tab is 10mm. Further assume that Maximal number of bigger diameters than the default is set to 2. If this option is ON, the following bars can be inserted into the beam: (i) either 10mm, (ii) or 12mm, (iii) or 14mm, (iv) or 10mm and 14mm can be combined together. 10mm and 12mm are not permitted to be combined in one beam.
Stirrups Minimal stirrups distance Specifies the minimal distance between stirrups measured from the centre of a bar to the centre of an adjacent bar. Defines the step for the reduction of the distance between two adjacent stirrups. This insures that the distance between stirrups is always a "rounded" number e.g. 200mm, then 250mm, then 300mm, etc. (and not e.g. 200, 246mm, 298mm, etc.). This parameter may enforce that the stirrup part are symmetrical along the length of the beam. (informative only)
Stirrups step
Symmetrical stirrups parts
Member
247
Shows the name of the beam where the member data are assigned to.
The procedure to assign the member data 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Select branch Automatic member reinforcement design. 3. Double-click function Member data. 4. Select the beam where the new member data are to be assigned. 5. Adjust the required parameters (see above). 6. Confirm with [OK].
Performing the automatic reinforcement design

First, you should define the parameters that may affect the automatic design. reinforcement template define in templates for longitudinal reinforcement, which layers can be optimise during the automatic reinforcement procedure, setup dialogue of service Concrete specify the default parameters that affect and control the procedure for the automatic design, member data related to the automatic design if required, override the default value (see the point above) by member data that specific for a particular beam. define some reinforcement manually prior to the automatic design. This may be important if for any reason there are some requirements specified for the practical reinforcement. Once the parameters are defined, you may start the function for the automatic design. Procedure to run the automatic design 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Select branch Automatic member reinforcement design. 3. Double-click function Reinforcement design. 4. Select members that are to be designed. 5. Select the required load case, combination or class. 6. If required, adjust other parameters in the Property window. 7. Select the beam where the new member data are to be assigned. 8. Press action button [Refresh]. 9. The selected beams are reinforced.
Bill of material
Displaying the bill of material
The procedure to display the bill of material in the Preview window 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Select function Bill of material. (single click on the function is sufficient to invoke the function). 3. Select beams to be checked. 4. Select the required quantity and if required, make other adjustments in the property window. 5. Click Action button [Preview] to see the table of selected values in the Preview window. 6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 as many times as required. Selecting the positions to be listed in the bill of material It is possible to limit the bill for certain part of reinforcement only. Press action button [Renumber] to select the numbers of positions to be included in the bill. Renumbering can be called for global position numbers and therefore, in order to see any response, drawing of global position numbers must be ON.
248
Checking 1D elements
Checking to interaction diagram
The checking of a concrete member can be carried out (among other methods) using the interaction diagram method. Interaction N + My + Mz, Vz. Parameters Selection This item defines the type of selection that the user wants to use to choose beams where the design results should be displayed. Selects the type of load to be evaluated: load case, combination, class. Selects the particular load case, combination or class to be evaluated. The selection of beams to be evaluated may be filtered out. If ON, a table explaining warning and error occurring the design is attached to the document. This item has no response in the graphical window. This item selects the value or values to be displayed. See below. Defines the places where numerical values will be added to the diagram of selected quantity. Enables the user to adjust the display style for the result diagrams. See below. All The checks are performed and displayed in all sections along the member. The number of sections is defined in Solver setup. Input The checks are performed and displayed ONLY in sections defined by the user. The sections can be defined in service Structure. Ends The checks are performed and displayed ONLY in end points of the member. Input + Ends The checks are performed and displayed in sections defined by the user and in the end points of the member. The sections can be defined
Type of loads
Load cases / Combinations / Classes Filter Print explanation
Values Extreme
Drawing setup
Section
249
in service Structure. Values Check Nu Vzu Myu Mzu the assessment by means of relative value. ultimate axial force ultimate shear force ultimate bending moment My ultimate bending moment Mz
Note: The values may differ according to the applied code.
Drawing setup In addition to standard drawing setup parameters, the following parameters are added for the needs of design of concrete beams. Values If ON, labels are attached to the diagram. If OFF, only the diagram without any description is displayed. Draw section in labels Draw load case or combination in label If ON, the longitudinal position of the section is depicted. The design is always performed for the selected load case or combination. The number of considered load case / combination may be added to the diagram label. If ON, the number of a potential warning or error is attached to the diagram of selected quantity. If no error occurs, nothing is printed.
Warnings, errors
Action buttons Refresh Refreshes the contents of the graphical window. Whenever the refresh of the screen is required, this item is redhighlighted. Shows information about the calculation. See Calculation info for design. Enables the user to modify design parameters. See Concrete setup for design of beams. Performs a detailed check of a selected beam. See separate chapter. Shows the selected design values in the Preview window.
Calculation info
Concrete setup
Single check Preview
250
Checking
Checking to interaction diagram - single check

If required, a selected member can be checked in detail. To do so, press button [Single check] in the Action bar of function Check diagram. Single cross-section dialogue provides for detailed view of design results.
Parts of the dialogue Step / position Calculation The user may select the section of the beam that should be calculated. This group shows internal forces in the selected section, enables the user to change the settings and calculate the results. The designed beam is shown. Mouse cursor may be used to select the required section for assessment. Pop-up menu may be used to control the view adjustment. Set of graphical windows The set of graphical windows presents all the important information related to the design. Pop-up menu may be used to control the view adjustment.
251
Information window
Any comments accompanying the calculation are listed in this window.
Calculation Code setup Filtered dialogue for adjustment of design parameters is opened on the screen. Selects the quantity for which the check is performed. Lists internal forces in the selected section. If ON, the user may modify the internal forces manually. Performs the calculation.
Extreme Internal forces Internal forces input by user Calculation Set of graphical windows ( the pictures below) Cross-section Loads Vertical section Horizontal section Interaction diagram Cross-section
Shows the cross-section, its dimensions and defined reinforcement. Shows internal forces in the selected section. Shows the vertical section of the 3D interaction diagram. Shows the horizontal section of the 3D interaction diagram. Shows the 3D interaction diagram.
252
Checking
Loads
Vertical section
253
Horizontal section
Interaction diagram
254
Checking
Performing the checking to interaction diagram

The procedure to perform the check 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Select function 1D member > Member check > Check capacity (single click on the function is sufficient to invoke the function). 3. Select the required type of load. 4. Select the required load case, combination or class. 5. Select beams to be checked. 6. Select the required quantity and if required, make other adjustments in the property window. 7. Click Action button [Refresh] to see the selected design values. 8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 as many times as required.
Checking of limit strain

The checking of a concrete member can be carried out (among other methods) using the limit deformations method. Interaction N + My + Mz, Vz. Parameters Parameters are analogous to parameters in Checking to interaction diagram. Values check eps cc eps sc eps st Vzu the assessment by means of relative value concrete strain reinforcement steel strain compression reinforcement steel strain tension ultimate shear force
255
Drawing setup See Checking to interaction diagram. Action buttons Refresh Calculation info Concrete setup Single check Preview See Checking to interaction diagram. See Checking to interaction diagram. See Checking to interaction diagram. Performs a detailed check of a selected beam. See separate chapter. See Checking to interaction diagram.
Checking of limit strain - single check

If required, a selected member can be checked in detail. To do so, press button [Single check] in the Action bar of function Check response. Single cross-section dialogue provides for detailed view of design results.
Parts of the dialogue See Checking to interaction diagram - single check.
256
Checking Calculation See Checking to interaction diagram - single check. Set of graphical windows ( the pictures below) Cross-section Loads Strain Stress Strain 3D Stress 3D Forces 3D Stress-strain diagram Shows the cross-section, its dimensions and defined reinforcement. Shows internal forces in the selected section. Shows the strain and its distribution across the section. Shows the stress and its distribution across the section. Shows the strain and its distribution across the section in a 3D view. Shows the stress and its distribution across the section in a 3D view. Shows internal forces in the selected section in a 3D view. Shows the stress-strain diagram for the selected section. The user may click a point in the section (in the left hand side part of the graphical window) and see the corresponding position on the diagram (in the right hand side part of the graphical window).
Cross-section
Loads
257
Strain
Stress
258
Checking
Strain 3D
Stress 3D
259
Forces 3D
Stress-strain diagram
260
Checking
Performing the checking to limit deformations

The procedure to perform the check 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Select function 1D member > Member check > Check response (single click on the function is sufficient to invoke the function). 3. Select the required type of load. 4. Select the required load case, combination or class. 5. Select beams to be checked. 6. Select the required quantity and if required, make other adjustments in the property window. 7. Click Action button [Refresh] to see the selected design values. 8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 as many times as required.
Checking the cracks

The checking of a concrete member can be carried out (among other methods) using the check of cracks. Limitations The calculation of crack width is performed ONLY for the axial force and bending moment My. In addition, the moment My must be in the plane of symmetry of the cross-section. If either of the two conditions is not met, the program issues a corresponding warning. Two moment load The calculation of crack width assumes that the load which the cross-section is subjected to is acting in the XZ-plane (in the local coordinate system) of the beam. The load is assumed to be composed of one bending moment about the local Y-axis of the beam. The analysed section, however, is subjected to two bending moments. Non-symmetrical result plane The calculation of crack width assumes that the load which the cross-section is subjected to is acting in the XZ-plane (in the local coordinate system) of the beam. The resultant strain-plane is inclined from the XZ-plane of the bending moment, probably due to asymmetry in reinforcement, due to an opening, etc.
261
Proiectare structuri de beton Parameters Parameters are analogous to parameters in Checking to interaction diagram. Values w As max distance max diameter value w required area of reinforcement considering the appearance of cracks maximal distance between reinforcement bars maximal diameter of reinforcement bars
Drawing setup See Drawing setup in chapter Design of beams. Action buttons Refresh Calculation info Concrete setup Preview See Checking to interaction diagram. See Checking to interaction diagram. See Checking to interaction diagram. See Checking to interaction diagram.
Note: This check can be carried out for SLS combination or for a result class with a SLS combination.
Performing the checking of crack

The procedure to perform the check 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Select function Member check > Crack control (single click on the function is sufficient to invoke the function). 3. Select the required type of load. 4. Select the required load case, combination or class. 5. Select beams to be checked. 6. Select the required quantity and if required, make other adjustments in the property window. 7. Click Action button [Refresh] to see the selected design values. 8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 as many times as required.
Overall check
The idea behind this function is to perform both ULS and SLS check in one step. Limitations 1) only 1D non-prestressed member are supported, 2) only structures without construction stages are supported, 3) only EN code is supported, 4) only four types of check are supported:
262
Checking - design ULS without detailing provisions, - check ULS (response or capacity), - check SLS (only crack width), - check detailing provisions. All types of loads (load case/combination/class) are supported. Named items are no supported for this check, because the named items are supported only for ULS and allowable stress checks. Check box "Redistribution of moment" is active only if ULS combination or class with ULS combination is selected. Types of check (1) Design As This check is performed if check box "Design ULS" is ON in the properties of the service (if this check box is OFF, in the numerical table the value OFF will be presented for this check). This check is NOT DONE if: - SLS combination or class without load cases and ULS combinations is selected. The reason why the check was not done or why the check does not satisfy is explained in column (W/E)DesignULS. (2) ULS check This check is performed if check box "ULS" is ON in the properties of the service (if this check box is OFF, in the numerical table the value OFF will be presented for this check). This check is NOT DONE if: - SLS combination or class without load cases and ULS combinations is selected, - the user real reinforcement is not input on the member. The reason why the check was not done or why the check does not satisfy is explained in column (W/E)ULS. The user can select the method for the check in combo box "Method for check" in the properties of the service. Two methods are available: - check response (all values which are in property Value in the service Check response will be checked), - check capacity (all values which are in property Value in the service Check capacity will be checked). (3) SLS - crack width This check is performed if check box "SLS-crack width" is ON in the properties of the service (if this check box is OFF, in the numerical table the value OFF will be presented for this check). This check is NOT DONE if: - ULS combination or class without load cases and SLS combinations is selected, - type of reinforcement for check is As,user and the user real reinforcement is not input on the member, - type of reinforcement for check is As,tot and the required reinforcement is not design on the member. The reason, why the check was not done or why the check does not satisfy is explained in column (W/E)crack. The crack width, max. distance and maximum diameter are checked for this check too. (4) Detailing provisions This check is performed, if check box "Detailing provisions" is ON in the properties of the service (if this check box is OFF, in the numerical table the value OFF will be presented for this check). This check is NOT DONE if: - the user real reinforcement is not input on the member. The reason why the check was not done or why the check does not satisfy is explained in column (W/E)det. All selected detailing provisions are checked.
263
Proiectare structuri de beton Check result The maximum value of unit check from all selected checks is presented in the graphical window. Detailed results can be found in the Document or in Preview window. Printed values are: DesignULS Design reinforcement for ULS As,add/As,req The ratio of additional reinforcement to required reinforcement (W/E)DesignULS Warning and errors for design reinforcement for ULS Checkcalc,ULS Maximum value of unit check for all selected ULS checks CheckULS Check for ULS (W/E)ULS Warning and errors for ULS Checkcalc,SLS Maximum value of unit check for all selected SLS checks CheckSLS Check for SLS (W/E)SLS Warning and errors for SLS Checkcalc,crack Maximum value of unit check for check cracks width Checkcrack Check for crack width (W/E)crack Warning and errors for check of crack width Checkcalc,det Maximum value of unit check for all selected detailing provisions Checkdet Check for detailing provisions (W/E)det Warning and errors for detailing provisions Checkcalc Maximum value of unit check for all selected checks Checklim Limit value of unit check Check Check for all selected checks (W/E) Warning and errors Type of reinf. Type of reinforcement which is used for check Notes relating the output table:
264
Checking The value Checkxxx and Check presents text result of the check. There are the following possibilities: - OFF (the selected check is OFF), - NOT DONE (the selected check is ON, but some conditions for this check are not fulfilled, therefore check will not be done), - OK, - NOT OK. The following item can be presented in the value "Type of reinf.": - NO REAL USER - if user REDES reinforcement or FREE bars are not defined on the member, - NO REQ. - if required reinforcement is not calculated, - USER REAL - if check is done for user REDES reinforcement or FREE bars, - REQ. - if check is done for required reinforcement, As,add = 0, - TOT - if check is done for total reinforcement, As,add > 0. USER REAL REINFORCEMENT = REDES reinforcement or FREE bars.
The idea behind this function is to check detailing provisions in a special function. Limitations 1) only 1D non-prestressed member are supported, 2) only EN code is supported, 3) the same filter for combination/loads/ classes is used as for ULS, 4) named items are not supported for this check, because the named items are supported only for ULS and allowable stress checks, 5) check box "Redistribution of moment" is active only if ULS combination or class with ULS combination is selected. Available check values Check value The maximum check value from all check is presented. Longitudinal reinf. The maximum check value from all checks for longitudinal reinforcement is presented. Stirrups The maximum check value from all checks for shear reinforcement is presented. Check result Printed values are: Check, long Check of detailing provisions for longitudinal reinforcement. Check, calc,long Maximum value of unit check for detailing provisions of longitudinal reinforcement. Check, shear Check detailing provisions for shear reinforcement. Check, calc,shear Maximum value of unit check for detailing provisions of shear reinforcement. Notes relating the output table: The value Checkxxx and Check presents text result of the check. There are the following possibilities: - OFF (the all detailing provisions for the check is OFF),
265
Proiectare structuri de beton - OK , - NOT OK. Single check It is based on the single check for check of response. The tab-sheets in the graphical window are the same as for check of response. Two values are presented in text prompt: - Check,long (Maximum value of unit check for detailing provisions of longitudinal reinforcement). - Check,shear (Maximum value of unit check for detailing provisions of shear reinforcement).
Deflections according to codes

Prerequisites for calculation of deflections according to a standard
Prerequisites The following steps must be taken before the calculation of deflections according to a standard itself can be performed: special load case combination must be created and it may contain ONLY static loads, reinforcement should be defined in members and should comply with provisions related to the ultimate limit state, if reinforcement is missing, at least required reinforcement areas should have been calculated, if even the required reinforcement areas have not been determined, the calculation is carried out without any modification of members stiffness. Limitations The theory behind the applied method determining the necessary reinforcement areas and the calculation of non-linear deformations is to blame for a certain inaccuracy of calculated physically-non-linear deformations in ribs of slabs. A usual finite element static calculation of a T-shaped rib transforms the structure into a slab and a beam of rectangular cross-section attached to the slab with eccentricity (which also follows from the definition of geometry). This approach gives absolutely right. However, when we determine the required reinforcement, we already "work" with a t-shaped rib taking account of acting width of the slab. In other words, we modify the original beam (we add a part of the slab) and, on the other hand, we do not take account of a part of the slab (the part added to the beam). This "operation" is common in everyday practice even though not completely right in terms of theory. This modification then takes its toll in the calculation according to the serviceability limit state. This is again finite element analysis and uses the beam + slab model. Calculated stiffness of these rib parts are inevitable different from the stiffness of the T-section.
Load case combination for calculation of deflections according to a standard

Since we are dealing with physically non-linear deformations, we must define a set of non-linear combinations. These combinations should describe the extreme response of the structure and related deformations.
Note: Load case deformations MUST NOT contain displacement load. Note: The Czech standard (CSN) uses a different approach than other national standards.
Combinations to CSN When a new variable load is defined, the user must specify whether the variable load is longterm in action or just a short-term. The CSN determines the long-term component of load from all variable long-term loads in a corresponding combination. The long-term component does not take account of the effect of short-term variable loads. The long-term component is calculated for all defined combinations. The short-term and long-term deformation (creep deformation) are evaluated for each non-linear combination.
266
Checking Combinations to other standards For other than Czech standard, the user may define just one permanent combination and one long-term combination. These combinations are used to calculate variable components of deformation from all combinations (by deducing the deformation in the permanent combination from the appropriate deformation in a given combination) and to calculate deformations including the effect of creep from all combinations (by adding the difference between long-term and shortterm deformations in long-term combination to the given combination). Additional combination parameters for non-CSN standards Used to determine Code Dependent Deflection (CDD) caused by creep If ON, the combination will be used for creep-calculation. The calculation of deformations is carried out twice for this combination first, the effective tangential modulus of elasticity of concrete for the short-term component is used and second, the effective tangential modulus of elasticity of concrete for the long-term component is used. The difference between the two deformations is considered to be the creep component. ONLY ONE long-term combination may be defined. Used to determine permanent Code Dependent Deflections (CDD) If ON, the current selected combination will be used for the calculation of permanent deformation. ONLY ONE permanent combination may be defined.
Performing the calculation of deflections according to a standard

The calculation of deflections according to a standard can be started like any other type of calculation using tree menu command Calculation, Mesh > Calculation. It is necessary to select calculation type Concrete > Code Dependent Deflections.
Note: The calculation of deflections according to a standard may be performed ONLY if a linear static calculation has been already performed. Note: A message that the division into finite elements is not sufficient may be issued by the calculation module. If this happens, it is necessary to refine the finite element mesh for beams and repeat both the static linear and calculation of deflections according to a standard.
Deflections according to a standard

Deflections in beams Parameters Selection This item defines the type of selection that the user wants to use to choose beams where the design results should be displayed.
267
Type of loads
Selects the type of load to be evaluated: for this particular function only Concrete combination is available. Selects the particular combination class to be evaluated. The selection of beams to be evaluated may be filtered out. Determines whether relative or absolute deformations are evaluated. Selects the type of value to be evaluated see below. This item selects the value or values to be displayed. Defines the places where numerical values will be added to the diagram of selected quantity. Enables the user to adjust the display style for the result diagrams. See below.
Concrete combination Filter Relative deformation Value type Values Extreme
Drawing setup
Value types linear nonlinear linear deformation non-linear deformation (short time component + immediate long time component) (without creep coefficient taken into account) total deformation
nonlinear + creep
Note: The value types may differ depending on the applied code. Note: The explanation of the values is given at the end of the chapter.
Drawing setup In addition to standard drawing setup parameters, the following parameters are added for the needs of design of concrete beams. Values If ON, labels are attached to the diagram. If OFF, only the diagram without any description is displayed. Draw section in labels Draw load case or combination in label If ON, the longitudinal position of the section is depicted. The design is always performed for the selected load case or combination. The number of considered load case / combination may be added to the diagram label.
268
Checking Action buttons Refresh Refreshes the contents of the graphical window. Whenever the refresh of the screen is required, this item is redhighlighted. Enables the user to modify design parameters. See Concrete setup for design of beams. Shows the selected design values in the Preview window.
Concrete setup
Preview
Deflections in slabs Parameters Selection This item defines the type of selection that the user wants to use to choose beams where the design results should be displayed. Selects the type of load to be evaluated: for this particular function only Concrete combination is available. Selects the particular combination class to be evaluated. The selection of beams to be evaluated may be filtered out. linear The linear deformations will be shown. These are identical to the deformations in service Results. nonlinear These deformation values reflect the nonlinear behaviour of the concrete during deflecting. nonlinear with creep These values take into account the creep of the concrete. Drawing Standard The results are displayed in the form of isolines / isobands. Section The results are drawn along defined sections. Resultant The resultants in the defined sections are shown. Values Extreme This item selects the value or values to be displayed. Defines the places where numerical
Type of loads
Concrete combination Filter Deformation
269
values will be added to the diagram of selected quantity. Drawing setup Enables the user to adjust the display style for the result diagrams. See chapter in the Reference guide: Results > Results on slabs > Isolines, Isobands, etc..
Action buttons Refresh Refreshes the contents of the graphical window. Whenever the refresh of the screen is required, this item is redhighlighted. Enables the user to modify design parameters. See Concrete setup for design of beams. Shows the selected design values in the Preview window.
Concrete setup
Preview
Calculated and printed values 1D members lim,tot = Limit value of total deflection lim,add = Limit value of additional deflection lim/tot,lim = Check of total deflection add/add,lim = Check of additional deflection linear = deflection from linear calculation for selected combination for check elastic = elastic deformation calculated for short-term stiffness and selected combination for check creep = creep deflection calculated as difference between deflection calculated for long-term and short-term stiffness for combination used for calculation creep deflection imm = immediate deflection calculated for short-term stiffness and for combination used to permanent deflection tot = total deflection; tot = elastic + creep add = additional deflection; add = total - imm. linear = rotation from linear calculation for selected combination for check elastic = elastic rotation calculated for short-term stiffness and selected combination for check creep = creep rotation calculated as difference between rotation calculated for long-term and short-term stiffness for combination used for calculation creep deflection imm = immediate rotation calculated for short-term stiffness and for combination used to permanent deflection tot = total rotation; tot = elastic + creep add = additional rotation; add = total - imm 2D members lim,tot = Limit value of total deflection lim,add = Limit value of additional deflection lim/tot,lim = Check of total deflection add/add,lim = Check of additional deflection linear = deflection from linear calculation for selected combination for check elastic = elastic deformation calculated for short-term stiffness and selected combination for check
270
Checking creep = creep deflection calculated as difference between deflection calculated for long-term and short-term stiffness for combination used for calculation creep deflection imm = immediate deflection calculated for short-term stiffness and for combination used to permanent deflection tot = total deflection tot = elastic + creep add = additional deflection add = total - imm. linear = rotation from linear calculation for selected combination for check elastic = elastic rotation calculated for short-term stiffness and selected combination for check creep = creep rotation calculated as difference between rotation calculated for long-term and short-term stiffness for combination used for calculation creep deflection imm = immediate rotation calculated for short-term stiffness and for combination used to permanent deflection tot = total rotation; tot = elastic + creep add = additional rotation; add = total - imm.
Performing the check of deflections according to a standard

The procedure to perform the check 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Select function Member check - Check of non-prestressed concrete > Deformation (single click on the function is sufficient to invoke the function). 3. Select the required type of load. 4. Select the required load case, combination or class. 5. Select members to be checked. 6. Select the required quantity and if required, make other adjustments in the property window. 7. Click Action button [Refresh] to see the selected design values. 8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 as many times as required.
Note: There are two functions Member check > Deformation in service Concrete: one in 1D member branch and the other in 2D member branch. Depending on the type of the member you want to check, select the function in the appropriate branch.
Stiffness in calculation of code dependent deformations

When the calculation of code-dependent deformations has been run, it is possible to review the stiffnesses. Available stiffness-values and other values that may appear in output tables 1D members N = Normal force My(z) = Bending moment around y(z) axis Nr = Normal cracking force Mry(z) = Bending cracking moment around y(z) axis EIIy(z),s = Short-term bending stiffness for uncracked section around y(z) axis EIIIy(z),s = Short-term bending stiffness for cracked section around y(z) axis EIy(z),s = Short-term resultant bending stiffness around y(z) axis EAIx,s = Short-term normal stiffness for uncracked section EAIIx,s = Short-term normal stiffness for cracked section EAx,s = Short-term resultant normal stiffness EIIy(z),l = Long-term bending stiffness for uncracked section around y(z) axis EIIIy(z),l = Long-term bending stiffness for cracked section around y(z) axis EIy(z),l = Long-term resultant bending stiffness around y(z) axis EAIx,l = Long-term normal stiffness for uncracked section EAIIx,l = Long-term normal stiffness for cracked section EAx,l = Long-term resultant normal stiffness
271
Proiectare structuri de beton xr = Depth of compression zone for cracked section As = Total area of reinforcement Asc = Area of tension reinforcement for cracked section Ast = Area of compresiion reinforcement for cracked section Ir = Second moment of inertia for cracked section Case_Area = Name of combination for which area of reinforcement was calculated sy(z) = Stress in tension reinforcement calculated for cracked section around y(z) axis sy(z) = Stress in tension reinforcement calculated for cracked section after created first crack around y(z) axis y(z) = Distribution coefficient around y(z) axis 2D members - standard axes nx(y) = Normal force in x(y) direction mx(y) = Bending moment in x(y) direction nrx(y) = Normal cracking force in x(y) direction mrx(y) = Bending cracking moment in x(y) direction EIIx(y),s = Short-term bending stiffness for uncracked section in x(y) direction EIIIx(y),s = Short-term bending stiffness for cracked section in x(y) direction EIx(y),s = Short-term resultant bending stiffness in x(y) direction EAIx(y),s = Short-term normal stiffness for uncracked section in x(y) direction EAIIx(y),s = Short-term normal stiffness for cracked section in x(y) direction EAx(y),s = Short-term resultant normal stiffness in x(y) direction EIIx(y),l = Long-term bending stiffness for uncracked section in x(y) direction EIIIx(y),l = Long-term bending stiffness for cracked section in x(y) direction EIx(y),l = Long-term resultant bending stiffness in x(y) direction EAIx(y),l = Long-term normal stiffness for uncracked section in x(y) direction EAIIx(y),l = Long-term normal stiffness for cracked section in x(y) direction EAx(y),l = Long-term resultant normal stiffness in x(y) direction xrx(y) = Depth of compression zone for cracked section in x(y) direction Asx(y) = Total area of reinforcement in x(y) direction Ascx(y) = Area of tension reinforcement for cracked section in x(y) direction Astx(y) = Area of compresiion reinforcement for cracked section in x(y) direction Irx(y) = Second moment of inertia for cracked section in x(y) direction Case_Area = Name of combination for which area of reinforcement was calculated sx(y) = Stress in tension reinforcement calculated for cracked section in x(y) direction sr(y) = Stress in tension reinforcement calculated for cracked section after created first crack in x(y) direction x(y) = Distribution coefficient in x(y) direction 2D members - principal axes n1(2) = Normal force in 1(2) principal direction m1(2) = Bending moment in 1(2) principal direction nr1(2) = Normal cracking force in 1(2) principal direction mr1(2) = Bending cracking moment in 1(2) principal direction EII1(2),s = Short-term bending stiffness for uncracked section 1(2) principal direction EIII1(2),s = Short-term bending stiffness for cracked section in 1(2) principal direction EI1(2),s = Short-term resultant bending stiffness in 1(2) principal direction EAI1(2),s = Short-term normal stiffness for uncracked section in 1(2) principal direction EAII1(2),s = Short-term normal stiffness for cracked section in 1(2) principal direction EA1(2),s = Short-term resultant normal stiffness in 1(2) principal direction EII1(2),l = Long-term bending stiffness for uncracked section in 1(2) principal direction EIII1(2),l = Long-term bending stiffness for cracked section in 1(2) principal direction EI1(2),l = Long-term resultant bending stiffness in 1(2) principal direction EAI1(2),l = Long-term normal stiffness for uncracked section in 1(2) principal direction EAII1(2),l = Long-term normal stiffness for cracked section in 1(2) principal direction EA1(2),l = Long-term resultant normal stiffness in 1(2) principal direction xr1(2) = Depth of compression zone for cracked section in 1(2) principal direction As1(2) = Total area of reinforcement in 1(2) principal direction Asc1(2) = Area of tension reinforcement for cracked section in 1(2) principal direction
272
Checking Ast1(2) = Area of compression reinforcement for cracked section in 1(2) principal direction Ir1(2) = Second moment of inertia for cracked section in 1(2) principal direction Case_Area = Name of combination for which area of reinforcement was calculated s1(2) = Stress in tension reinforcement calculated for cracked section in 1(2) principal direction sr(2) = Stress in tension reinforcement calculated for cracked section after created first crack in 1(2) principal direction 1(2) = Distribution coefficient in 1(2) principal direction 1(2) = The angle between x-axis of LCS and 1(2) principal direction
Procedure to display the stiffness 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Select function Member check - Check of non-prestressed concrete > Stiffness presentation (single click on the function is sufficient to invoke the function). 3. Select the required type of load. 4. Select the required load case, combination or class. 5. Select members to be checked. 6. Select the required quantity and if required, make other adjustments in the property window. 7. Click Action button [Refresh] to see the selected design values. 8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 as many times as required.
Note: There are two functions Stiffness presentation in service Concrete: one in 1D member branch and the other in 2D member branch. Depending on the type of the member you want to check, select the function in the appropriate branch.
Prestressed concrete
Checks of prestressed concrete
This Scia Engineer module is intended for experienced users with good technical knowledge of the calculation of prestressed concrete structures including their time-dependant effects. The user may want to perform checks of strength, deflections and stability according the EN 1992-1-1 code for a prestressed concrete structure, because the design has to fulfil the regulations set by the European Union. Both initial and resultant state of the stresses, strains, etc. can be reviewed. The initial state is the state of the cross-section wherein all permanent loads including prestressing are applied. The resultant state is the state of the cross-section wherein all loads (permanent and variable including prestressing) are applied. The operating stress in the prestressed tendons/strands is the stress including the losses due to creep, shrinkage and relaxation. Moreover, the losses due to elastic deformation are also taken into account. The moment capacity of a whole beam can be calculated for the resultant vector moment of My and Mz. Also the capacity of a single section can be checked using the interaction diagrams of N, My and Mz. The allowable stresses are checked according to article 5.10.2.2. The influence of the environmental classes, amount of soft steel reinforcement and the location of the prestressing reinforcement can be verified for individual construction stage. Limitations The checks of prestressed structures can be performed in a frame XZ, frame XYZ, grid XY, plate XY and general XYZ. The checks of prestressed structures can be used for composite (concrete/concrete) crosssections only. The checks of prestressed structures can be used for beam members only. It is not possible to check lightweight concrete members. It is not possible to check plain and lightly reinforced concrete members.
273
Proiectare structuri de beton The anchorage length is not automatically calculated. It is not possible to check deep beams. It is not possible to use checks of prestressed structures after a physically non-linear (deflections/internal forces) calculation. It is not possible to check the fire resistance of the structure. Checks of prestressed concrete do not take into account buckling-related data. Buckling is not considered in the checks of prestressed concrete.
Prerequisites
IMPORTANT: The project with prestressed concrete 1D elements must be calculated with respect to construction stages (preferably TDA).
Crack control
Handling with the function is analogous to Checking of limit strain. The values offered for display are naturally different. Limitations The calculation of crack width is performed ONLY for the axial force and bending moment My. In addition, the moment My must be in the plane of symmetry of the cross-section. If either of the two conditions is not met, the program issues a corresponding warning. Two moment load The calculation of crack width assumes that the load which the cross-section is subjected to is acting in the XZ-plane (in the local coordinate system) of the beam. The load is assumed to be composed of one bending moment about the local Y-axis of the beam. The analysed section, however, is subjected to two bending moments. Non-symmetrical result plane The calculation of crack width assumes that the load which the cross-section is subjected to is acting in the XZ-plane (in the local coordinate system) of the beam. The resultant strain-plane is inclined from the XZ-plane of the bending moment, probably due to asymmetry in reinforcement, due to an opening, etc. Values w As max. distance max. diameter Sigma p 0 Crack width Required reinforcement area with respect to crack formation Max. distance of reinforcement bars Max. diameter of reinforcement bars Decompression stress
Note: This calculation can be used only for SLS combinations.
For the procedure read Performing crack control.
Performing crack control

The procedure to perform the crack control 1. Open service Concrete.
274
Checking 2. Select function 1D member > Member check > Check of prestressed concrete > Crack control (single click on the function is sufficient to invoke the function). 3. Select the required type of load. 4. Select the required load case, combination or class. 5. Select beams to be checked. 6. Select the required quantity and if required, make other adjustments in the property window. 7. Click Action button [Refresh] to see the selected design values. 8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 as many times as required.
Note: This calculation can be used only for SLS combinations.
Note: This function does not offer Single check action button.
Checking of limit strain

Parameters Name Selection Shows the name of the function. All The result diagrams are displayed on all the active members in the structure. Standard The result diagrams are displayed on all the currently selected members. Selected This option allows the user to display diagrams on selected members. It is similar to the previous option but offers something more. See below the table. Named selection This option allows the user to select one of the previously created, named and saved selections. Type of load This item selects the type of load for which the results are to be displayed: load cases, combinations, result classes. If any of the option is marked with an asterisk, the results for that option are not available. Load case/Combination/Class Depending on the option selected in the previous item, this combo box offers the available load cases/combinations/classes. This option enables the user to filter the members on which the results will be displayed. If ON, the output in the Preview window (invoked by action button [Preview]) shows the explanation of possible errors and warnings encountered during the calculation.
Filter
Print explanation
275
Values Extreme
This combo offers the available result quantities. This item control the display of numerical values attached to the result diagram. Read chapter Results > Adjusting the style of result diagrams in the Reference Guide. Read chapter Results > Selected sections > Displaying the results in selected sections in the Reference Guide.
Drawing setup
Section
Selection: Selected With this option, you may select required members on which the results are to be displayed and review the results. Then you may clear the selection. The result diagrams, however, remain displayed. Now you may make a new selection and invoke the refresh of the screen. The program will ask you what to do. The available options are: Use current selection The result diagrams displayed during the last refresh are deleted. New result diagrams are displayed on the currently selected members only. Add current selection to previous selection The result diagrams displayed during the last refresh remain displayed. New result diagrams are shown on the currently selected members. Use previous selection The current selection is ignored. The result diagrams displayed during the previous refresh remain displayed. Subtract current selection from previous selection If there is a result diagram currently displayed on one of the currently selected members, this diagram is hidden. The result diagrams that are shown on members that are not in the current selection remain displayed. Values check value eps cc eps sc eps st eps tt Vzu Tu Vrdi the assessment by means of relative value concrete strain reinforcement steel strain compression reinforcement steel strain tension tendon strain tension shear resistance torsional resistance design shear resistance at the interface
Action buttons Refresh Calculation info Concrete setup Refreshes the screen. Show a brief information about the calculation of the result quantities. Open the Setup dialogue.
276
Checking
Single check Preview
Calls the Detailed checking of limit strain. Shows result table(s) in the Preview window.
For the procedure read Performing the checking of limit strain.
Detailed checking of limit strain

Parts of the dialogue Step / position Calculation The user may select the section of the beam that should be calculated. This group shows internal forces in the selected section, enables the user to change the settings and calculate the results. The designed beam is shown. Mouse cursor may be used to select the required section for assessment. Pop-up menu may be used to control the view adjustment. Set of graphical windows The set of graphical windows presents all the important information related to the design. Pop-up menu may be used to control the view adjustment. Information window Numerical output Any comments accompanying the calculation are listed in this window. Change of setup This button opens a dialogue where you can specify what the content of the output document is to be. Output This button produces the output either to the Document or to the Preview window. Step / position Step This value defines the step by which the section is moved if Move cursor left or Move cursor right is clicked. This value specifies the x-coordinate of the section that is assessed. Selects a section that is located one step from to the left from the current section. Analogous to the previous item.
Position Move cursor left
Move cursor right
277
Move to previous segment
This button is meaningful only for "members" consisting of several parts, e.g. continuous beam where each span is modelled by a separate beam. It moves the cursor to the previous segment (part).
Move to next segment automatic recalculationredraw
Analogous to the previous one. If ON, all the calculations and display regenerations are done automatically once the user changes any value in the dialogue. If OFF, the use must invoke the calculation manually through button [Calculation].
Section
Selected section The assessment is carried out for the selected section of the beam. Extreme section The program automatically finds the extreme section for the selected quantity and performs the check of this critical section.
Calculation Code setup Filtered dialogue for adjustment of design parameters is opened on the screen. Selects the quantity for which the check is performed. Or if Extreme section is adjusted in the previous group, this selects the quantity for which the extreme is found. Internal forces Calculation Set of graphical windows Name of the window Cross-section Loads Strain *) Contents The shape, dimensions and description of the assessed cross-section. The external loads acting in the selected section. Distribution of the strain over the crosssection. It is graphically shown which part of the cross-section is subjected to tension and which to compression. Analogous to strain. 3D drawing of the strain distribution Lists internal forces in the selected section. Performs the calculation.
Extreme
Stress *) Strain 3D *)
278
Checking
over the section. Stress 3D *) Force 3D *) Stress-strain diagram Analogous to Strain 3D. The forces acting in the individual reinforcement bars and in the concrete. Stress-strain diagram. The user may click the required point on the cross-section image and the corresponding stress-strain diagram is shown. *) Initial and resultant state For the quantities marked with an asterisk, the user may select whether the (i) initial state, or (ii) resultant state, or (iii) both should be displayed. This selection can be made in the Picture properties dialogue that can be opened through the pop-up menu of the graphical window. Values Initial The initial state is the state of the cross-section wherein all permanent loads including prestressing are applied. The resultant state is the state of the cross wherein all loads (permanent and variable including prestressing) are applied. Both the previous option are shown together in one picture.
Resultant
Initial and resultant
Material All Concrete Reinforcement steel Strands Steel The diagram is displayed for all the material in the cross-section. The diagram is displayed only for the concrete part of the cross-section. The diagram is displayed only for the reinforcement steel. The diagram is displayed only for strands. The diagram is displayed only for (soft) steel.
Procedure to select the state to be displayed 1. Select the graphical window (tab) you want to review. 2. Place the mouse cursor inside of the graphical window. 3. Click the right-mouse button, the pop-up menu is opened on the screen. 4. Select function Picture properties and click it. 5. Make required settings in the dialogue. 6. EITHER: Confirm with [Apply] to see the changes and NOT to close the dialogue. OR: Confirm with [OK] to see the changes and close the dialogue.
279
Proiectare structuri de beton The following table demonstrates the individual windows through a sample picture they may contain. Crosssection
Loads
Strain
280
Checking
Stress
281
Strain 3D
Stress 3D
Force 3D
282
Checking
Stressstrain diagram
Performing the checking of limit strain

The procedure to perform the check 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Select function 1D member > Member check > Check of prestressed concrete > Check response (single click on the function is sufficient to invoke the function). 3. Select the required type of load. 4. Select the required load case, combination or class. 5. Select beams to be checked. 6. Select the required quantity and if required, make other adjustments in the property window. 7. Click Action button [Refresh] to see the selected design values. 8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 as many times as required. The procedure to perform the detailed check 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Select function 1D member > Member check > Check of prestressed concrete > Check response (single click on the function is sufficient to invoke the function). 3. Click Action button [Single check] to invoke the dialogue for the detailed check. 4. Select the member to be checked. 5. The Single check dialogue is opened on the screen.
283
Checking to interaction diagram

Handling with the function is analogous to Checking of limit strain. Values Check value Nu Myu Mzu Vzu Tu Vrdi The result of the check. The value of 1 means that the capacity is fully utilised. The limit axial force the cross-section can transfer. The limit bending moment My the cross-section can transfer. The limit bending moment Mz the cross-section can transfer. The limit shear force. The torsional resistance. Design shear resistance at the interface.
For the procedure read Performing the checking to interaction diagram.
Detailed checking to interaction diagram

This is analogous to Detailed checking of limit strain. The graphical windows are different. Set of graphical windows Cross-section Loads Vertical section Horizontal section Interaction diagram Shows the cross-section, its dimensions and defined reinforcement. Shows internal forces in the selected section. Shows the vertical section of the 3D interaction diagram. Shows the horizontal section of the 3D interaction diagram. Shows the 3D interaction diagram.
Performing the checking to interaction diagram

The procedure to perform the check 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Select function 1D member > Member check > Check of prestressed concrete > Check capacity (single click on the function is sufficient to invoke the function). 3. Select the required type of load. 4. Select the required load case, combination or class. 5. Select beams to be checked. 6. Select the required quantity and if required, make other adjustments in the property window. 7. Click Action button [Refresh] to see the selected design values. 8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 as many times as required.
284
Checking
The procedure to perform the detailed check 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Select function 1D member > Member check > Check of prestressed concrete > Check capacity (single click on the function is sufficient to invoke the function). 3. Click Action button [Single check] to invoke the dialogue for the detailed check. 4. Select the member to be checked. 5. The Single check dialogue is opened on the screen.
Allowable stress in concrete

Handling with the function is analogous to Checking of limit strain. The values offered for display are naturally different. Values Check value sigma cc,max sigma cc,ch sigma cc,qp f ct,eff sigma c,aa sigma cq,min sigma clt,min sigma cq,max sigma clt,max sigma c,inc The result of the check. The value of 1 means that the capacity is fully utilised. Allowable stress of concrete prior and after anchoring/transfer of prestressing. Allowable stress of concrete in compression under SLS characteristic combination. Allowable stress of concrete in compression under SLS quasi-permanent combination. Allowable stress of concrete in tension under SLS combinations. Stress of concrete after anchoring/transfer of prestressing. Minimum concrete stress after application of selfweight, all permanent, and variable loads. Minimum concrete stress caused by long-term loads. Maximum concrete stress after application of selfweight, all permanent, and variable loads. Maximum concrete stress caused by long-term loads. Stress increment in concrete caused by selected load case.
For the procedure read Performing the check of allowable stress in concrete.
Detailed check of allowable stress in concrete

This is analogous to Detailed checking of limit strain.
Performing the check of allowable stress in concrete

The procedure to perform the check 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Select function 1D member > Member check > Check of prestressed concrete > Allowable stress in concrete (single click on the function is sufficient to invoke the function). 3. Select the required type of load.
285
Proiectare structuri de beton 4. Select the required load case, combination or class. 5. Select beams to be checked. 6. Select the required quantity and if required, make other adjustments in the property window. 7. Click Action button [Refresh] to see the selected design values. 8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 as many times as required. The procedure to perform the detailed check 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Select function 1D member > Member check > Check of prestressed concrete > Allowable stress in concrete (single click on the function is sufficient to invoke the function). 3. Click Action button [Single check] to invoke the dialogue for the detailed check. 4. Select the member to be checked. 5. The Single check dialogue is opened on the screen.
Check of prestressing reinforcement

Handling with the function is analogous to Checking of limit strain. The values offered for display are naturally different. Values Check value sigma p,pa sigma p,aa sigma p,ltl sigma pq,min The result of the check. The value of 1 means that the capacity is fully utilised. Stress of prestressing reinforcement prior anchoring (during tensioning). Stress of prestressing reinforcement after anchoring/transfer of prestressing. Stress of prestressing reinforcement after long-term losses (LTL). Minimum stress of prestressing reinforcement after application of self-weight, all permanent, and variable loads. Maximum stress of prestressing reinforcement after application of self-weight, all permanent, and variable loads. Stress range in prestressing reinforcement. Stress increment in prestressing reinforcement caused by selected load case. Maximum unbalanced stress the difference of stresses calculated from the strain determined in structural analysis once as elastic stress (Hookes law), and second as stress non-linear stress-strain relationship. Allowable stress of prestressing reinforcement prior anchoring (during tensioning). Allowable stress of prestressing reinforcement after anchoring/transfer of prestressing. Allowable stress of prestressing reinforcement caused by SLS combinations.
sigma pq,max
sigma pq,max sigma pq,min sigma p,inc sigma p,un
sigma p,max
sigma pm0
sigma pm
286
Checking
For the procedure read Performing the check of prestressing reinforcement.
Performing the check of prestressing reinforcement

The procedure to perform the check 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Select function 1D member > Member check > Check of prestressed concrete > Check of prestressing reinforcement (single click on the function is sufficient to invoke the function). 3. Select the required type of load. 4. Select the required load case, combination or class. 5. Select beams to be checked. 6. Select the required quantity and if required, make other adjustments in the property window. 7. Click Action button [Refresh] to see the selected design values. 8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 as many times as required.
Allowable principal stresses

Handling with the function is analogous to Checking of limit strain. The values offered for display are naturally different. Values Sigma 1 Sigma 2 max Sigma 3 max Sigma x max Sigma y max Sigma z max Tau xy max Tau xz max self-explanatory ( Detailed check of allowable principal stresses) self-explanatory ( Detailed check of allowable principal stresses) self-explanatory ( Detailed check of allowable principal stresses) self-explanatory ( Detailed check of allowable principal stresses) self-explanatory ( Detailed check of allowable principal stresses) self-explanatory ( Detailed check of allowable principal stresses) self-explanatory ( Detailed check of allowable principal stresses) self-explanatory ( Detailed check of allowable principal stresses)
For the procedure read Performing the check of allowable principal stresses.
Performing the check of allowable principal stresses

The procedure to perform the check 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Select function 1D member > Member check > Check of prestressed concrete > Allowable principal stress (single click on the function is sufficient to invoke the function). 3. Select the required type of load. 4. Select the required load case, combination or class.
287
Proiectare structuri de beton 5. Select beams to be checked. 6. Select the required quantity and if required, make other adjustments in the property window. 7. Click Action button [Refresh] to see the selected design values. 8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 as many times as required. The procedure to perform the detailed check 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Select function 1D member > Member check > Check of prestressed concrete > Allowable stress in concrete (single click on the function is sufficient to invoke the function). 3. Click Action button [Single check] to invoke the dialogue for the detailed check. 4. Select the member to be checked. 5. The Single check dialogue is opened on the screen.
Detailed check of allowable principal stresses

Parts of the dialogue Step / position Calculation The user may select the section of the beam that should be calculated. This group shows internal forces in the selected section, enables the user to change the settings and calculate the results. The designed beam is shown. Mouse cursor may be used to select the required section for assessment. Pop-up menu may be used to control the view adjustment. Set of graphical windows The set of graphical windows presents all the important information related to the design. Pop-up menu may be used to control the view adjustment. Information window Numerical output Any comments accompanying the calculation are listed in this window. Change of setup This button opens a dialogue where you can specify what the content of the output document is to be. Output This button produces the output either to the Document or to the Preview window. Step / position Step This value defines the step by which the section is moved if Move cursor left or Move cursor right is clicked. This value specifies the x-coordinate of
Position
288
Checking
the section that is assessed. Move cursor left Selects a section that is located one step from to the left from the current section. Analogous to the previous item. This button is meaningful only for "members" consisting of several parts, e.g. continuous beam where each span is modelled by a separate beam. It moves the cursor to the previous segment (part). Move to next segment automatic recalculationredraw Analogous to the previous one. If ON, all the calculations and display regenerations are done automatically once the user changes any value in the dialogue. If OFF, the use must invoke the calculation manually through button [Calculation]. Section Selected section The assessment is carried out for the selected section of the beam. Extreme section The program automatically finds the extreme section for the selected quantity and performs the check of this critical section. Calculation Code setup Filtered dialogue for adjustment of design parameters is opened on the screen. Selects the quantity for which the check is performed. Or if Extreme section is adjusted in the previous group, this selects the quantity for which the extreme is found. Internal forces Calculation Set of graphical windows Name of the window Cross-section Loads Sigma x Contents The shape, dimensions and description of the assessed cross-section. The external loads acting in the selected section. Axial stress in longitudinal direction. Lists internal forces in the selected section. Performs the calculation.
Move cursor right Move to previous segment
Extreme
289
Sigma y Sigma z Tau xys
Axial stress in the y-direction. Axial stress in the z-direction. Shear stress in the x-direction perpendicular to the y-direction due to the shear force in that direction. Shear stress in the x-direction perpendicular to the z-direction due to the shear force in that direction. Shear stress in the y-direction perpendicular to the x-direction due to the torsion. Shear stress in the z-direction perpendicular to the x-direction due to the torsion. Shear stress in the y-direction perpendicular to the x-direction (Tau xys + Tau xyt). Shear stress in the z-direction perpendicular to the x-direction (Tau xzs + Tau xzt). Principal stress in direction 1 Principal stress in direction 2 Principal stress in direction 3
Tau xzs
Tau xyt
Tau xzt
Tau xy
Tau xz
Sigma 1 Sigma 2 Sigma 3
Procedure to adjust display properties 1. Select the graphical window (tab) you want to review. 2. Place the mouse cursor inside of the graphical window. 3. Click the right-mouse button, the pop-up menu is opened on the screen. 4. Select function Picture properties and click it. 5. Make required settings in the dialogue. 6. EITHER: Confirm with [Apply] to see the changes and NOT to close the dialogue. OR: Confirm with [OK] to see the changes and close the dialogue.
290
Punching shear Introduction

When a slab is subject to a concentrated load or to a load acting over a small area, the punching shear resistance of the slab should be checked. Scia Engineer can deal with concentrated loads from columns or supports that are perpendicular to a slab.
There is a principal difference between Czech and Slovak national standards on one hand and other national standards on the other hand. This difference can be briefly summarised in the following points. CSN / STN The punching shear check does not require to perform also the check of the main reinforcement in the slab, it is not necessary to calculate necessary reinforcement areas. The load for punching shear is interpreted differently, moments from supports are included in the maximal shear force used for punching shear. It is possible and necessary to define the shear reinforcement for punching shear. The position of critical sections is variable according to the defined reinforcement. Other standards The check of main reinforcement in the slab must be performed as a part of punching shear check. The axial force is usually the only load considered in the check, the column position and eccentricities are defined through coefficients. The check consists of the calculation of required reinforcement area, the real (practical) reinforcement is not defined, the position of critical sections is fixed and defined by the standard.
Punching shear data

Name Node Advanced mode Specifies the name of the entity (punching shear data). (informative) Shows the name of the node where that data are defined. Swaps between basic and advanced mode. In the Basic mode only the main parameters must be input by the user. All the other
291
parameters use the default values. In the Advanced mode, the user may control almost everything and is responsible for verification and input of all the necessary parameters. Note: In the following text, the data relevant for the advanced mode are marked with a text "(advanced mode)". Plate data (advanced mode) User input plate Concrete User-input thickness Selected slab If ON, the material and thickness imported from the project data can be edited manually The material imported from the project data can be edited manually. The thickness imported from the project data can be edited manually. If the Option User input plate is OFF, this line is displayed (informative).
Column type Shape of support Width Height Diameter Specifies the shape of the support: rectangular / circular. (for rectangular only) Defines the dimension of the support. (for rectangular only) Defines the dimension of the support. (for circular only) Defines the dimension of the support.
Hole data (advanced mode) Hole data Shape Width Height Diameter Distance x-dx Distance y-dy A hole may be defined in the vicinity of the column or support. Defines the shape of the hole (for rectangular only) Defines the dimension of the hole. (for rectangular only) Defines the dimension of the hole. (for circular only) Defines the dimension of the hole. Defines the centre-to-centre distance of the hole from the column/support. Defines the centre-to-centre distance of the hole from the column/support.
292
Punching shear Column position Column position "position of the column" Defines the position of the column. Depending on the position of the column, additional parameters may be required to specify the exact location of the column. The meaning of individual parameters is clear from the image next to the input table. Column head (advanced mode) Column head Shape Width-bh Height-hh Diameter - dh Type of depth If ON, the column is equipped with a head. Defines the shape of the column. (for rectangular only) Defines the dimension of the head. (for rectangular only) Defines the dimension of the head. (for circular only) Defines the dimension of the head. Specifies the shape of the head. Prismatic and Pyramidal are for rectangular columns, cylindrical and conical are for circular columns. Thickness Loads (advanced mode) User loads If OFF, the program takes the load from the model of the structure. If ON, the load defined in the model is ignored and the user must define load of the particular node manually. Set user loads Opens the dialogue for the input of userdefined load. Defines the thickness of the head.
Reinforcement (advanced mode) Reinforcement steel Main reinforcement in plate (advanced mode) User input reinforcement If ON, the user must specify the reinforcement in the plate. If OFF, the calculated necessary reinforcement areas are applied. Reinforcement Opens a dialogue for the input of Specifies the type of reinforcement.
293
reinforcement in 2, or alternatively in 3, directions. Note: The distance of bars is measured from centre-to-centre of the bar. Shear reinforcement for punching (advanced mode) Shear reinforcement angle Specifies the angle of the reinforcement. The angle is measured from the horizontal plane.
Action buttons Load default values Concrete setup Reads the default values of the parameters. Opens the Setup dialogue for related parameters.
Punching shear data for CSN/STN

Name Node Advanced mode Specifies the name of the entity (punching shear data). (informative) Shows the name of the node where that data are defined. Swaps between basic and advanced mode. In the Basic mode only the main parameters must be input by the user. All the other parameters use the default values. In the Advanced mode, the user may control almost everything and is responsible for verification and input of all the necessary parameters. Note: In the following text, the data relevant for the advanced mode are marked with a text "(advanced mode)". Plate data (advanced mode) Concrete User-input thickness Normally the material is read from the project. The user may alter it here. If OFF, the thickness is read from the project. If ON, the thickness imported from the project data can be edited manually. Thickness If the previous option is ON, the thickness may be altered here.
294
Punching shear Column type Shape of support Width Height Diameter Specifies the shape of the support: rectangular / circular. (for rectangular only) Defines the dimension of the support. (for rectangular only) Defines the dimension of the support. (for circular only) Defines the dimension of the support.
Hole data (advanced mode) Hole data Shape Width Height Diameter Distance x-dx Distance y-dy A hole may be defined in the vicinity of the column or support. Defines the shape of the hole (for rectangular only) Defines the dimension of the hole. (for rectangular only) Defines the dimension of the hole. (for circular only) Defines the dimension of the hole. Defines the centre-to-centre distance of the hole from the column/support. Defines the centre-to-centre distance of the hole from the column/support.
Column position Column position "position of the column" Defines the position of the column. Depending on the position of the column, additional parameters may be required to specify the exact location of the column. The meaning of individual parameters is clear from the image next to the input table. Column head (advanced mode) Column head Shape Width-bh Height-hh Diameter If ON, the column is equipped with a head. Defines the shape of the column. (for rectangular only) Defines the dimension of the head. (for rectangular only) Defines the dimension of the head. (for circular only) Defines the dimension of
295
the head. Type of depth Specifies the shape of the head. Prismatic and Pyramidal are for rectangular columns, cylindrical and conical are for circular columns. Thickness Loads (advanced mode) User loads If OFF, the program takes the load from the model of the structure. If ON, the load defined in the model is ignored and the user must define load of the particular node manually. Set user loads Opens the dialogue for the input of userdefined load. Defines the thickness of the head.
Reinforcement (advanced mode) Reinforcement steel Specifies the type of reinforcement.
Shear reinforcement for punching (advanced mode) Shear reinforcement angle Number of rows Specifies the angle of the reinforcement. The angle is measured from the horizontal plane. Defines the total number of rows of shear reinforcement. For links it is the number of rows of links bordering the critical sections. For bent-up bars it is the number of their various types. These may differ in profile and steel and also position and number. Type of reinforcement End of stirrups The required type of reinforcement can be selected here: links (stirrups) or bent-up bars. (accessible for links only) The standard distinguishes between welded links and links with anchor hooks. Diameter dss Defines the diameter of shear reinforcement (both links (stirrups) or bent-up bars).
Cover of punching reinforcement (advanced mode) upper x-cxu lower x-cxl upper y-cyu lower y-cyl The four parameters specify cover in two directions at lower and upper surfaces.
296
Punching shear Individual rows of reinforcement (advanced mode) Distance between bars in x-dsx Distance between bars in y-dsy Position of reinforcement from column face in x-psx Position of reinforcement from column face in y-psy Action buttons Load default values Concrete setup Reads the default values of the parameters. Opens the Setup dialogue for related parameters. Distance between bars in x direction. Note: The distance of bars is measured from centre-to-centre of the bar. Distance between bars in y direction. Note: The distance of bars is measured from centre-to-centre of the bar. Specifies the distance between the reinforcement and the closest surface of the column in x-direction. Specifies the distance between the reinforcement and the closest surface of the column in y-direction.
Assigning the punching shear data to the node

Procedure to assign the punching shear data to required nodes 1. Open service Concrete. 2. Start function Punching > Punching data. 3. Input the required parameters. 4. Confirm with [OK]. 5. Select nodes where the defined data should be assigned. 6. End the selection with [Esc]. 7. Close the function.
Performing the punching shear check

Procedure to perform the punching shear check (except CSN/STN) 1. Define the model and perform the calculation. 2. Open service Concrete. 3. Use function 2D member > Setup to input the slab parameters or verify their default values. 4. If necessary, use function 2D member > Member data to define parameters and input values for a specific slab(s) where the punching shear check will be performed. 5. Use function Punching > Setup to input the punching-shear parameters or verify their default values. (The explanation of individual punching shear parameters is given in chapter General parameters > "particular national standard" > Ultimate limit state - Punching shear.) 6. If necessary, use function Punching > Punching data to define parameters and input values for a specific node where the punching shear check will be performed. 7. Use function 2D member > Member design ULS to calculate the necessary reinforcement areas in required slabs. 8. Use function Punching > Punching check to start the punching shear check itself. 9. Define the selection of nodes where the punching shear check should be performed.
297
Proiectare structuri de beton 10. Adjust the required load case combination (load case, etc.) and other parameters in the property window. 11. Press Action button [Refresh] to see the check results on the screen. 12. Alternatively press button [Preview] to see the results in tabular form. 13. Or press button [Single check] to perform a separate check of one particular node (see chapter Detailed punching shear check) 14. When ready, close the service Concrete. Procedure to perform the punching shear check according to CSN/STN 1. Define the model and perform the calculation. 2. Open service Concrete. 3. Use function Punching > Setup to input the punching-shear parameters or verify their default values. (The explanation of individual punching shear parameters is given in chapter General parameters > "particular national standard" > Ultimate limit state - Punching shear.) 4. If necessary, use function Punching > Punching data to define parameters and input values for a specific node where the punching shear check will be performed. 5. Use function Punching > Punching check to start the punching shear check itself. 6. Define the selection of nodes where the punching shear check should be performed. 7. Adjust the required load case combination (load case, etc.) and other parameters in the property window. 8. Press Action button [Refresh] to see the check results on the screen. 9. Alternatively press button [Preview] to see the results in tabular form. 10. Or press button [Single check] to perform a separate check of one particular node (see chapter Detailed punching shear check) 11. When ready, close the service Concrete.
Detailed punching shear check

Function Punching > Punching check in service Concrete offers the action button named [Single check]. This button opens a dialogue for detailed punching shear check. The dialogue is divided into several tabs: Geometry of punching Loads Main reinforcement (not for CSN/STN) Design of reinforcement Reinforcement for punching (only CSN/STN) Check (only CSN/STN) Document setup In addition, the results can be previewed in the Preview window or exported to the Document. Geometry of punching The data on this tab are mainly used to determine the critical perimeter. Column type group Column data The dimensions of the column can be defined in these fields. In the case of a support, these dimensions are also stored. The axes in the picture are the local axes of the column. Hole data Check the Hole box, if you want to define a hole. In this group, the dimensions of the hole have to be defined.
298
Punching shear Column position group The following column positions are available: parallel to the x-side, parallel to the y-side, corner column, internal column. The axes in the picture are the axes of the plate Parallel to the x-side Column distance y Distance in the y-direction between the edge of the slab and the nearest face of the column.
Parallel to the y-side Analogous to parallel to the x-side Corner column Column distance x Distance in the x-direction between the edge of the slab and the nearest face of the column. Distance in the y-direction between the edge of the slab and the nearest face of the column. Angle of the edge of the slab with the x-axis.
Column distance y
Angle of edge with xaxis Angle of edge with yaxis Central column No position definition is needed
Angle of the edge of the slab with the y-axis.
Hole position If you check "Hole" in the Column type group, the following positions have to be defined. Hole distance x Hole distance y Distance in the x-direction between the hole and the centre of the column. Distance in the y-direction between the hole and the centre of the column.
Section groups Plate data Thickness of plate Thickness of the plate at the critical perimeter. Default value: the thickness of the plate. Concrete If possible, the material may be changed here.
Column head data Column head Check this box to define a column head.
299
Type of depth
Select the type of the column head. Prismatic and Pyramidal are for rectangular columns, cylindrical and conical are for circular columns.
Depth of the head Width of the head Lx of the head Ly of the head
Depending on the column head type the depth and width of the column head can be defined using the appropriate fields.
Loads This tab shows either (i) the load imported from the model of the analysed structure, or (ii) the manually defined load in the assessed point. This is controlled by the item User loads in the Punching shear data. If the load from the model is used, this tab shows all available load cases or combinations defined in the project. If user load is used, the table contains the user-defined loads. Two buttons below the table makes it possible to add a new combination or to delete the existing one. qd Distributed load (2D) on the slab of the appropriate load case/combination. It is used to correct Vd punching force VSdpunch. VSd Concentrated load causing the punching force. For a support this is the reaction force. For a column it is its normal force that works on the slab. mSdx Minimum bending moment per unit length in the x-direction in the slab corresponding to the appropriate load case/combination. Minimum bending moment per unit length in the y-direction in the slab corresponding to the appropriate load case/combination.
mSdy
The sign convention can be read from the attached picture. Main reinforcement Note: This tab is not available for CSN/STN. This tab shows the amount of longitudinal reinforcement in the plate near the node that is investigated. Profile, Angle and Distance groups The values are determined in the following way: Current available results for required reinforcement areas calculated in centroids of finite elements are used. This means that load cases or combinations considered during the punching shear check do not have any effect on the amount of reinforcement. Only results in finite elements whose centroid is closer than 1.5 m from the assessed node are taken into account. Maximum value of reinforcement amount is used.
300
Punching shear Area group This group contains the calculated values of necessary reinforcement per unit of length in the appropriate layer. Design of reinforcement The contents of this tab may be different for different standards. Loads group The required load case / combination can be selected in the list of defined load cases / combinations. Results of punching shear check are displayed on the screen. Critical section group Detailed explanation of individual parameters is given in appropriate standards and in the theoretical manual. The button [Calculation] performs the re-calculation for the current load case / combination. Reinforcement for punching Note: This tab is available only for CSN/STN. This dialogue enables you to define shear reinforcement for punching shear. It is possible to input bent-up bars and links (stirrups). Bent-up bars are defined by their number, links by the number of rows. Reinforcement group Steel Number of rows Definition of the type of reinforcement steel. Defines the total number of rows of shear reinforcement. For links it is the number of rows of links bordering the critical sections. For bent-up bars it is the number of their various types. These may differ in profile and steel and also position and number. Type of reinforcement Angle of bent-up bars The required type of reinforcement can be selected here. (accessible for bent-up only, links are assumed perpendicular to the middle plane) The angle between the bent-up and the plate surface. End of stirrups (accessible for links only) The standard distinguishes between welded links and links with anchor hooks. Load group The required load case / combination may be selected here. The selected load case / combination is used for the design of punching shear reinforcement. Reinforcement row group One tab opens for each row of reinforcement. Bars diameter Distance between bars Defines the diameter of the reinforcement bars. Distance between bars. Note: The distance of bars is measured from
301
centre-to-centre of the bar. Concrete cover top Concrete cover at the top surface. It influences whether the row is considered in the calculation. Analogous to the item above. The reinforcement area that is necessary to transfer the relative shear force. The reinforcement area calculated from the input parameters. Defines the distance of the reinforcement bars from the column surface. For bent-up bars it is the distance of bent-up foot from the column face. For links it is the distance between the link axis and the column face. Set optimal position Opens a dialogue that calculates an optimal position of the reinforcement. The position is calculated in accordance with the provision defined in art. 5.5.6.14 of the standard. Check Note: This tab is available only for CSN/STN. This tab can be used to assess punching shear including the reinforcement. Load group The required load case / combination may be selected here. The selected load case / combination is used for the design of punching shear reinforcement. Total design tab This tab contains the overall evaluation. The worst critical section is automatically found and checked. Maximal punching shear force qd max and the ultimate punching shear force qu are listed including the critical section where these values were found. Critical section tabs Detailed results can be scrutinised in the tabs for individual sections. hs Mcdx, Mcdy ucrx, urcy ucr qqd qxmd, qymd Plate thickness. Moments recalculated to the centroid of the critical section.
Concrete cover bottom As required Reinforcement areas Position of reinforcement from column face
Length of the critical section. Total length of the critical section. Shear forces effects. Moment effects.
302
Punching shear
qbu qsu [List qsu]
Shear force transferred by concrete. Shear force transferred by the reinforcement. Lists the effectiveness of reinforcement for individual sections in accordance with the standard. The list specifies the distance where the reinforcement can be placed in order to be effective.
Document setup This tab defines the contents of the document tables.
303
Physically non-linear calculation Comparison of PNL and PGNL calculation

The names PNL calculation (or analysis) (physically non-linear calculation) and PGNL calculation (or analysis) (physically and geometrically non-linear calculation) are taken from previous versions of the software. These terms are very similar and may be a bit misleading. Therefore, it is useful to start with a few words about the features and principles of the two types of analysis. First of all, it may be reasonable to establish more explanatory names. What was known as a PNL calculation should be called: calculation of deflections according to a standard. IMPORTANT: Starting from version 2008.1 the term PNL was replaced by more suitable Code Dependent Deflections (CDD) What was known as a PGNL calculation should be called: physically (and geometrically) non-linear calculation. It is not a rule that both types of non-linearity must be engaged in the latter, there are three possibilities: (i) only physical non-linearity is taken into account, (ii) only geometrical non-linearity is taken into account, (iii) both physical non-linearity and geometrical non-linearity are taken into account. This fact in turn may lead to shortening of the name of the second calculation type to "physically non-linear calculation" which may be abbreviated PNL. Now you can see one of the reasons why a more reasonable naming should be introduced. The second reason is that the old PNL calculation (CDD from 2008.1 on) is not a real physically non-linear calculation in terms of finite element method (contrary to PGNL that is a real nonlinear calculation). It is a two-step solution following exactly the regulations given in technical standards for design and checking of concrete structures. Both analyses are aimed primarily at concrete structures. The "calculation of deflections according to a standard" has been designed exclusively for concrete beams and plates, as it is based on the wording of technical standards for design and checking of concrete structures. The "physically (and geometrically) non-linear calculation" is a general procedure tailored for the analysis of concrete frames (as it takes into account the provided reinforcement), but it is not limited to such structures. Calculation of deflections according to standards This calculation of deflections depends (is based) on standards. Therefore, it represents a standard-related calculation that is performed in two steps. First, a normal linear calculation is carried out and the computed internal forces are used to input the reinforcement (the provided reinforcement) or at least to determine the required reinforcement areas. The procedure continues with the calculation of cracks and their effect on the stiffness of individual elements. This weakening is then input into the solver. Finally, the calculation (linear one) is run once more with these reduced stiffnesses taken into account. Which is exactly what the technical standards require. The short-term deflection is calculated. This deflection is multiplied by the creep coefficient and the long-term deflection is obtained. It is known that the elastic deflection multiplied by the creep coefficient equals to the deflection due to creep. Then, we add the long-term deflection to the short-term deflection and get the total deflection that can be assessed in accordance with the standards. This calculation of the effects of creep is simplified and can be used for a limited set of situations. In fact, in case of reinforced concrete it covers most possible situations, as the history of assembly does not have to be followed. In other words, if the history of assembly steps does not have to be followed, this procedure can be applied. The procedure is based on the method of effective modulus of elasticity Ef:
305
Physically (and geometrically) non-linear calculation The Physically (and geometrically) non-linear calculation (i.e. what was so far called PGNL) is something completely different. It is a physically and/or geometrically non-linear calculation that can be applied to frame structures, contrary to Calculation of deflections according to a standards that can be used also for the analysis of plates. The Physically (and geometrically) non-linear calculation can be used for planar and spatial frame structures. If a plate (or generally a shell) is present in the analysed structure, such a model is analysed as well, but the plate (shell) is taken as a linear element. The same approach is applied if a steel (or other material) beam appears in the model of the structure. For frame structures, we take into account the effect of cracks, plasticity and other factors on the stiffness. The problem is solved by means of a real non-linear calculation, i.e. using the iteration and secant method, i.e. the Newton-Raphson method that is implemented in Scia Engineer. Fully physically and/or geometrically non-linear calculation is performed. It is necessary to select in the Functionality settings, which non-linearity is to be used: (i) physical, (ii) geometrical, or (iii) both. Through this setting the solver recognises what type of calculation should be started.
We apply some load and find out that cracking occurs and determine the weakened crosssection (in fact, this is a bit more complicated, but the full description of the problem exceeds the scope of this text, for more details read [1]). The stiffness is modified in places where cracks appear and the calculation run once more. We calculate internal forces that are based on the modified stiffness, but the new internal forces usually still do not correspond to the stifnesses. Therefore, we have to determine the stifnesses once more. And this procedure is repeated as many times as necessary to meet the convergence criterion. The Physically (and geometrically) non-linear calculation is a calculation performed in several, usually many steps and the result is such a state of the structure when strain corresponds to internal forces (contrary to Calculation of deflections according to a standards calculation). This is the way to find the limit resistance not of a single section, but of the whole structure. And it is the main goal of the Physically (and geometrically) non-linear calculation analysis.
Material properties for physically non-linear calculation

Material properties for physically non-linear calculation At the very beginning, we must check the settings in the material manager, verify that non-linear stiffness is selected, and if required, to make necessary settings. This non-linear stiffness is selected by default in a new project where Physical non-linearity is adjusted on the Functionality tab of the Project setup. If we have adjusted the non-linear stiffness of the material, we can adjust its stress-strain diagram.
306
Physically non-linear calculation
The same can be done for the material of reinforcement.
In a physically non-linear calculation the stress-strain diagrams are NOT taken as defined in the appropriate standard, bus AS defined by the user in the material manager. To sum up. If we open the material manager and start editing of a selected material, we can (better must) select the non-linear stiffness. Then we can select the stress-strain diagram that corresponds to our particular situation. Alternatively, we can input our own stress-strain diagram that can be input "from scratch" or derived from values stipulated in a standard. The stress-strain diagram can contain even a declining branch. Even such a situation can be successfully analysed by means of the method implemented in Scia Engineer.
Beam related parameters for physically non-linear calculations

We define the structure (the model of it). No load is required to be defined at this moment, but a new function is already added in the service Structure: Beam PNL Member data, i.e. the member properties required for a non-linear calculation.
307
Proiectare structuri de beton PNL Member data Name Physical non-linear stiffness Identifies the member data. If ON, the particular beam is considered to behave physically non-linearly. If OFF, that beam is treated as in a standard linear calculation. Reinforcement taken from Specifies the reinforcement in the beam. The meaning of individual options is explained in the following text. Note: If Fire resistance is adjusted in Project > Functionality dialogue, only two options are available here. Practical use of PNL member data When these data are input, two questions must be answered: (1) "Do you want to have physically non-linear stiffness?" And if so,: (2) "What type of reinforcement do you want: (i) no reinforcement, (ii) only practical (provided), (iii) only design (or required) areas, (iv) practical and if no such reinforcement is found, then use the design As, or (v) the design reinforcement and if it is missing, then use the practical (provided) reinforcement?"
Individual options use its own symbol in the graphical window, and thus we can immediately see what type of reinforcement is considered in the calculation.
No reinforcement
Design As
Practical (provided) reinforcement
We could say that there will be no reinforcement. It means that we can have no reinforcement and still we can perform the non-linear calculation. It is a reasonable choice for e.g. masonry or plain concrete. However, normally we say that the Physically (and geometrically) non-linear calculation should be calculated for "Practical ONLY" reinforcement or for the option "1st practical, 2nd design As." Let us select "1st practical, 2nd design As". We have no reinforcement calculated or defined, so the program opts for "No reinforcement". But, the initial setting is "1st practical, 2nd design As". Both these "values" can be seen in the property table. The program have not found any reinforcement and, therefore, selected the option "No reinforcement". But it also remembers the initial setting.
308
So far, we have defined a structure (the model of it). Let us create a load case: e.g. self-weight. Let us create a common combination consisting of it with the load factor set to e.g. 1.3. Then, let us define a non-linear combination, once again with the load factor set to 1.3. And start the calculation - the linear one. This gives us a linear solution that is necessary just for the design of reinforcement. Let us perform the design of reinforcement for the calculated common combination. Open service Concrete and start function 1D member > Member design > Design. Select the beam(s) to be treated and press the Action button [Refresh]. The required reinforcement areas are calculated and (depending on the adjustment of View parameters) displayed. If required, in order to see the PNL member data symbol, we can open the View parameters setup dialogue and select option Member nonlinearities on the tab Structure. Now we can start the calculation again. This time, we can run the non-linear calculation and therefore, we must not forget to adjust finer finite element mesh. The program found: "The current status of Reinforcement taken from of Beam PNL member data is different than default setup. Would you like to change it back to default setup?" Let us say "Yes", the program finishes the calculation, regenerates the graphical window and we can see a new symbol for "PNL member data". The program has just performed the physically non-linear calculation for the design (required) reinforcement areas. The results cannot be reviewed in the service Concrete, as they do not represent any check. It is true that we have calculated with concrete, but the results are general results of a general non-linear calculation and therefore they are in the service Results > PNL stress/strain and PNL stiffness. For example, ecc is the compressive strain in concrete, ert is the tensile strain in reinforcement. Now, let us input the practical (provided) reinforcement. Let us open the service Concrete, open function New reinforcement and input the reinforcement bars. Now we can repeat the nonlinear calculation. The program again checks the settings of PNL member data and again asks if we want to change it so that it corresponds to the initial setting (The initial setting was "1st practical, 2nd design As". Up to now, there was no practical reinforcement defined and therefore the calculations were performed with the required reinforcement areas. Now we have just input the real reinforcement, the program discovered it and asks if we insist on the initial adjustment, or whether the current results calculated for the required reinforcement are good enough). We answer "Yes", as we do want to perform the calculation with the defined practical reinforcement. Procedure to define beam related PNL parameters 1. Open service Structure. 2. Start function Beam PNL Member data. 3. Select the required options. 4. Confirm with [OK]. 5. Select the beam(s) where the specified data should be assigned to.
Reinforcement in the physically non-linear calculation

Although it is possible to run the Physically (and geometrically) non-linear calculation without any reinforcement, it is strongly recommended to input the real reinforcement (i.e. the provided reinforcement not just required reinforcement areas) before running the Physically (and geometrically) non-linear calculation calculation. On the other hand, it is true that in case of planar frames it is possible to perform the calculation also for the required reinforcement areas (see [1]).
309
Proiectare structuri de beton Calculation for design As (required reinforcement areas) So, for planar frames, the procedure may be as follows. We define a standard combination of load cases and use it for the design of reinforcement (after performing a linear static calculation). We compute the required reinforcement areas and run a non-linear calculation of the planar frame. In this calculation we do not have the "balls" of the reinforcement, but a "strip" of it (see the figure below).
Strip of reinforcement idealised design (required) reinforcement
Balls of reinforcement real position of individual reinforcement bars
This strip will behave in a certain way. It can plasticise, or even break. This is not possible in a spatial frame as an unsymmetrical bending occurs there and we would not know what to do with that strip. We need the balls in that frame, i.e. we need the real (provided) reinforcement. That is why a spatial frame cannot be calculated with required reinforcement. Calculation without any reinforcement We can say that there will be no reinforcement. It means that we do not have to have any reinforcement and still we can perform the non-linear calculation. It is a reasonable choice for e.g. masonry or plain concrete. If required, the FEM solver is run repeatedly for geometrical nonlinearity within each step of the physical non-linearity and this approach combines the two nonlinearities. To conclude, we can run the calculation without any reinforcement, but such an e.g. a simply supported beam subjected to bending would fail and collapse. Such a calculation can be applied to columns subjected to eccentric compression as we know that there is a compression zone there, that a part of the section plasticises, that cracks open on one side, and that it does not matter as it shifts the centre of gravity, and that there is a compressive stress causing balance in the section and everything is in order. General recommendation
Regardless of what was said above, it is strongly recommended that, under normal circumstances, the Physically (and geometrically) non-linear calculation be performed for the option "Practical ONLY" reinforcement or alternatively for the options "1st design As, 2nd practical" or "1st practical, 2nd design As".
The procedure for the Physically non-linear calculation

The procedure can be briefly summarised in the following steps: 1. definition of material properties, 2. input of the structure model including load, boundary conditions, etc. 3. input of member-related parameters (called "PNL Member data") (can be done in point 2), 4. linear calculation to be able to design or input the reinforcement, 5. design or input of reinforcement, 6. non-linear calculation, 7. review and assessment of results.
310
Types of load case combinations

This text is not exclusively related to the Physically (and geometrically) non-linear calculation, but it may be useful as a kind of revision of what should be clear in this context. In Scia Engineer there are: (i) usual combinations of load cases (let us call them common combinations), (ii) non-linear combinations for physically non-linear calculation and (iii) special combinations for concrete that are reserved for the earlier-mentioned Calculation of deflections according to a standard (just for that type of calculation). If no combination for concrete has been defined, we cannot run the Calculation of deflections according to a standard. Unless we have defined a non-linear combination, the Physically (and geometrically) non-linear calculation cannot be performed.
To sum up. Common combinations are used for the assessment of the ultimate limit state according to a standard. Combinations for concrete are used for the assessment of the serviceability limit state according to a standard, i.e. for the assessment of deflection in accordance with a standard. Non-linear combinations are used for a real non-linear calculation.
Assessment of results
When we complete the procedure of the Physically non-linear calculation and get into the assessment phase, we may open the service Results and see either (i) standard result quantities or (ii) results directly linked to this type of calculation: PNL stress/strain and PNL stiffness. IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY
(1) Once the physically and geometrically nonlinear analysis has been performed, we SHOULD NOT perform a new design of reinforcement. The real (practical) reinforcement was defined prior to the calculation. The analysis just PROVES whether the designed reinforcement and dimensions of the cross-section are satisfactory for the transfer of given loads. (2) In order to prevent the misinterpretation of the calculated bending moments, we must aware of the following. After the PGNL analysis has been performed, the calculated internal forces (moments) are related to the centroidal axis of the NET (i.e. WEAKENED) CROSSSECTION. This net cross-section is assigned to the corresponding finite element in the solver. All internal forces in Scia Engineer are always related to the centroidal axis of the cross-section! Therefore, in order to obtain (after PGNL calculation) the quantity that is comparable to the result of a linear solution, we must ADD the moment that equals to the axial force multiplied by the distance of the centroid of the new net (weakened) cross-section from the centroid of the original (gross) cross-section.
Note: The results cannot be reviewed in the service Concrete, as they do not represent any check. It is true that we have calculated with concrete, but the results are general results of a general non-linear calculation and therefore they are in the service Results > PNL stress/strain and PNL stiffness.
PNL stress/strain eps cc compressive strain in concrete, meaningful
311
only for beams made of concrete eps ct eps rt eps rc tensile strain in concrete, meaningful only for beams made of concrete tensile strain in reinforcement, meaningful only for beams made of reinforced concrete compressive strain in reinforcement, meaningful only for beams made of reinforced concrete tensile strain in steel, meaningful only for beams made of steel compressive strain in steel, meaningful only for beams made of steel compressive stress in concrete, meaningful only for beams made of concrete tensile stress in concrete, meaningful only for beams made of concrete tensile stress in reinforcement, meaningful only for beams made of reinforced concrete compressive stress in reinforcement, meaningful only for beams made of reinforced concrete tensile stress in steel, meaningful only for beams made of steel compressive stress in steel, meaningful only for beams made of steel
eps st eps sc sigma cc sigma ct sigma rt sigma rc
sigma st sigma sc
Note: Steel beams are calculated linearly.
Example: The two images below show all the strain components displayed for (i) a reinforced concrete beam and (ii) steel beam. It is clearly seen that the components that are irrelevant for the particular material are zero.
312
reinforced concrete beam
steel beam PNL stiffnesses EAx EIy Non-linear axial stiffness. Non-linear flexural stiffness, i.e. the connection presented in the last iteration step. EIz Non-linear flexural stiffness, i.e. the connection presented in the last iteration step.
313
xr As
Height of compression zone, or the position of neutral axis. Total reinforcement area in a given section that is considered in the calculation of nonlinear stiffness. This area is multiplied by the coefficient for reinforcement from the Solver setup.
Plasticization in supports To show the effect of plasticizing that may be "discovered" in the physically non-linear calculation, let us consider the following simple structure. We create a two-span (2 6.0 m) continuous beam with concrete cross-section 500 300 mm. We input the practical reinforcement whose details are not important for the purpose of our explanation (for more information see the note below). Only physical non-linearity is considered. The beam is subjected to a uniformly distributed load q = 28,5 kNm-1 . When we apply the analytically derived formula for the hogging moment above the intermediate support of a two-span continuous beam, we obtain: M = 0.125 q l2 = 0.125 28.5 62 = 128.25 kNm. The linear calculation in Scia Engineer gives the bending moment calculated above the intermediate support is equal to 127,6 kNm, which is very close to the direct solution.
When we apply the non-linear calculation, the change of cross-section stiffness due to formed cracks results in a redistribution of internal forces.
The bending moment calculated above the intermediate support is equal to 88.8 kNm. We may look at the correctness of the moment redistribution by taking the bending moment in the middle of the span (not shown in the picture) 83.9 kNm and performing a simple calculation: moment in the middle of the span + half of the redistributed hogging moment = hogging moment before the redistribution = 83.9+88.8/2=128.3, which almost precisely equals to the direct solution stated above.
Note: More details are given in [1]. Contrary to older program EPW, it is not possible to control the insertion of plastic hinges. Details are again given in [1].
314
Separate check of a section/beam

The single check that can be activated after the completion of physically non-linear calculation is available in the service Results (contrary to the Single check in the service Concrete that applies to checking according to a particular standard). In case of the Physically (and geometrically) non-linear calculation it is a check that has nothing in common with the standard-related calculation, i.e. with the checks stipulated in a certain standard. It is a means for a detailed analysis of results obtained through the physically non-linear calculation, or through the physically and geometrically non-linear calculation. Procedure to perform the single check 1. Open service Results. 2. Select function PNL stress/strain (single click on the function is sufficient to invoke the function). 3. Select the required type of load. 4. Select the required non-linear combination or class. 5. Click the Action button [Single check]. 6. Select a beam to be checked. 7. The single check dialogue is opened on the screen. Press button [Calculate] to get the results. 8. Review the results. Parts of the Single check dialogue Step / position Calculation The user may select the section of the beam that should be calculated. This group shows internal forces in the selected section, enables the user to change the settings and calculate the results. The designed beam is shown. Mouse cursor may be used to select the required section for assessment. Pop-up menu may be used to control the view adjustment. Set of graphical windows The set of graphical windows presents all the important information related to the design. Pop-up menu may be used to control the view adjustment. Information window Any comments accompanying the calculation are listed in this window.
Calculation Code setup Filtered dialogue for adjustment of design parameters is opened on the screen. Selects the quantity for which the calculation is performed. Lists internal forces in the selected section. If ON, the user may modify the internal forces manually.
Extreme Internal forces Internal forces input by user
315
Calculation Set of graphical windows Cross-section Loads Strain Stress Strain 3D Stress 3D Forces 3D Stress-strain diagram
Performs the calculation.
Shows the cross-section, its dimensions and defined reinforcement. Shows internal forces in the selected section. Shows the strain and its distribution across the section. Shows the stress and its distribution across the section. Shows the strain and its distribution across the section in a 3D view. Shows the stress and its distribution across the section in a 3D view. Shows internal forces in the selected section in a 3D view. Shows the stress-strain diagram for the selected section. The user may click a point in the section (in the left hand side part of the graphical window) and see the corresponding position on the diagram (in the right hand side part of the graphical window).
Example: For example, we may open the service Results, select PNL stress/strain and activate the Single check (action button). Looking at the stress we can see (for example) that the stress is too low, that we have input too much reinforcement. We can go to the service Concrete, display the required reinforcement areas and open the table of required reinforcement areas in the Preview window. There we can see how many bars of which diameter are recommended by the program and compare that value with the input reinforcement.
316
Literature
[1] Navrtil, J., Foltyn, P. Fyzikln a geometricky nelinern vpoty rmovch konstrukc systmem Scia Engineer (Physically and geometrically non-linear calculations of frame structures by the system Scia Engineer), In: proceedings of the 5th international seminar "Modelovanie stavebnch kontrukci 2005" (Modelling of civil engineering structures 2005), Tatransk trba, Slovakia, EDIS, 2005, pp. 23-32, ISBN 80-8070-460-0
317
Fire resistance Types of fire resistance calculation

Three types of calculation are implemented in the program: Detailing provisions, Simplified method, Advanced method. Detailing provisions Detailing provisions will be setting in Concrete setup. There are three type of calculation (adjusted globally in the Concrete > Setup or individually for each beam in the Member Data): Automatic, From temp. curve, Input by user. Detailing provisions are checked only if the check box Check detailing provisions for fire resistance (Concrete > Setup > Detailing provisions > Fire resistance) is ON. Detailing provisions are supported only for: any load case, combination and class in case of "Automatic" and "Input by user" calculation, only for a load case, combination and class with defined Temperature distribution curve in case of "From temp. curve". Only the check of practical reinforcement is supported. The value Standard fire resistance R (Fire duration) used for the calculation of values bmin, amin and hs,min from tables is defined by: the temperature distribution curve for type of calculation "from temp.curve", the value in Concrete setup or Member data for other type of calculation. The value Critical temperature Theta_cr for modification of amin and bmin is: loaded from Concrete setup or Member data for type of calculation ="Input by user", loaded from Temperature distribution curve for type of calculation ="from temp. curve", calculated according to chapter 5.2(6) for type of calculation ="Automatic" . Function Check fire resistance-detailing rules is added to Member check > Concrete Fire Resistance check. Simplified method This type of calculation is supported only for accidental combinations: EN-ULS Accidental Psi1, EN-ULS Accidental Psi2. Only Check capacity and Check response functions are supported. Check capacity and Check response are performed for changed cross-section and materials properties changes in cross-section properties: o reduced height of section (damaged zone), o new eccentricities. changes in materials properties of concrete and non-prestressed reinforcement: o new stress/strain diagram, o thermal expansion coefficient, o reduced ultimate limit strain, o reduced strength, o reduced module of elasticity. Shear capacity is calculated according to EN 1992-1-1, but with following changes: reduced strength fcd (temperature in centroid of section), reduced strength fctd (temperature in centroid of section), reduced geometry of cross-section, reduced strength of stirrups fsd (the reference temperature is the temperature in the point P (intersection of the branch of a stirrup with the section aa, where the section
319
Proiectare structuri de beton aa is the boundary of the effective tension area calculated according to EN 1992-1-1, chapter 7.3.2 (3)
For members with prestressed reinforcement there are the following simplifications: check is performed only for a member that is statically determined (simply supported beam, cantilever). This property can be adjusted in the Member data dialogue, all initial stresses are set to zero (We justify this step by the assumption that all stresses relaxed at high temperature - due to accelerated concrete creep and steel relaxation), check shear is not supported for members with prestressed reinforcement. There are four functions under Concrete Fire Resistance Check: Check fire resistance response, Check fire resistance capacity, Prestress check fire resistance response, Prestress check fire resistance capacity. Advanced method Functionality Physical non-linearity for reinforced concrete must be ON. The calculation of fire resistance through the physically (and geometrically) nonlinear calculation is not possible for members with prestressed reinforcement. Three types of calculation are supported (prefire, during fire and post-fire) and depend on the type of a nonlinear combination ("prefire", "during fire" and "post fire"). Only nonlinear combinations can be used. Practical reinforcement should be manually editing after each calculation. Prefire calculation standard physically (and geometrically) nonlinear calculation is carried out without any changes in the member and material properties for nonlinear combinations without a load case of type "Temperature distribution curves" During fire calculation standard physically (and geometrically) nonlinear calculation is carried out with changes in the member (reduced cross-section, new eccentricities) and material properties (new stress/strain diagram) for nonlinear combinations with load case of type "Temperature distribution curves" Post fire calculation standard physically (and geometrically) nonlinear calculation is carried out with changes in member (reduced cross-section, new eccentricities) and material properties (new stress/strain diagram) for nonlinear combinations without load case of type "Temperature distribution curves". The results are presented in functions PNL stress/strain and PNL stiffness of service Results.
Setup dialogue for fire resistance calculations

If item Fire resistance is selected in the Project > Functionality, the Setup dialogue in service Concrete contains new items related to the fire resistance calculations. The parameters are distributed over several pages of the dialogue: General, Ultimate limit state, Ultimate Limit State - Fire resistance,
320
Fire resistance Detailing provisions - Fire resistance.
Fire resistance related member data

The Member data dialogue contains group Fire resistance for all types of beam if the functionality Concrete >Fire resistance is turned on in the Project data dialogue. Detailing provisions Simply supported member This option is active only for Beam type = "beam" If ON, the calculation of values amin and bmin in table Table for minimum dimension bmin and minimum axis distance amin (Table 5.5 and 5.6) uses the column for simply supported member. Type of calculation The option is active only for Beam type = "Beam" and "Beam slab". The options are: - from. temp.curve (default}, - automatic, - input by user. Theta_cr Default value is 773.15C. This item is active only for Beam type = "Beam" and "Beam slab" and if the Type of calculation = "input by user". Fire (time) resistance R Default value is 7200s. This item is active only if the Type of calculation = "input by user" or "automatic". Column exposed The item offers two items: - one side, - more than one side (default}. This item is active only for Type of beam = "column".
Note: If no member data are assigned to a particular member, the following options are considered: For columns without member data, Column exposed = "more than one side". For beams without member data, Type of beams = "continuous beam".
Simplified calculation method This group is active only if functionality Prestressing is turned on in the Project data dialogue. Statically determined Default is ON.
321
structure
Is active for all types of beam. If OFF, the checks in services Prestress check fire resistance response and Prestress check fire resistance capacity are not performed and error 810 will appear.
Material properties of concrete with reference to fire resistance

For Simplified calculation and for Advanced calculation with nonlinear combinations "during fire (Ps1)" and "during fire (Ps2)" new material properties of concrete must be defined. Other properties will be calculated using the simplified calculation method "Zone method" described in EN 1992 - 1 - 2: 2002 (reduced strength, reduced Youngs module, new strain-stress diagram). Stress-strain diagram (fire resistance) This group is active only if functionality Fire resistance (of concrete) is turned on. Type of diagram By code with automatic temperature (default) The temperature will be loaded automatically as the temperature in the centroid of a layer of a cross-section. Property Picture of Stress-strain diagram is active, but the graphical interpretation of the stress/strain diagram is without numerical values. By code with fixed temperature Item Temperature can be used to input the value of temperature and stress/strain diagram for this temperature will be same as for all layers of the cross-section. Property Picture of Stress-strain diagram" is active and the graphical interpretation of the stress/strain diagram contains numerical values. Picture of stress strain diagram Shows the diagram in graphical form.
Strain diagram for nonlinear analysis (fire resistance) This group is active only if functionality Fire resistance (of concrete) and Physical nonlinearity for reinforced concrete are turned on in the Project data dialogue. Type of diagram By code with automatic temperature
322
Fire resistance
(default) The temperature will be loaded automatically as the temperature in the centroid of a layer of a cross-section. Property Picture of Stress-strain diagram is active, but the graphical interpretation of the stress/strain diagram is without numerical values. By code with fixed temperature Item Temperature can be used to input the value of temperature and stress/strain diagram for this temperature will be same as for all layers of the cross-section. Property Picture of Stress-strain diagram" is active and the graphical interpretation of the stress/strain diagram contains numerical values. Picture of stress strain diagram Shows the diagram in graphical form.
Type of aggregate The material property Type of aggregate is also important for the fire resistance calculation and should be therefore adjusted with proper carefulness.
Note: Siliceous aggregates are: (i) quartzite aggregates, (ii) sandstone aggregates and (iii) basalt aggregates. Calcareous aggregates are only limestone aggregates
Material properties of reinforcement with reference to fire resistance

This is analogous to Material properties of concrete with reference to fire resistance.
Material properties of prestressing reinforcement with reference to fire resistance

For Simplified calculation and for Advanced calculation with nonlinear combinations "during fire (Ps1)" and "during fire (Ps2)" new material properties of prestressing reinforcement must be defined. Other properties will be calculated using the simplified calculation method "Zone method" described in EN 1992 - 1 - 2: 2002 (reduced strength, reduced Youngs module, new strain-stress diagram). Stress-strain diagram (fire resistance) This group is active only if functionality Fire resistance (of concrete) is turned on. Class for calculation of Beta This item selects the class: - Class A (default}, - Class B. Reduction factor beta (only informative) The calculated value of the factor according to chapter 3.2.4(2) is displayed here.
323
Type of diagram
By code with automatic temperature (default) The temperature will be loaded automatically as the temperature in the centroid of a layer of a cross-section. Property Picture of Stress-strain diagram is active, but the graphical interpretation of the stress/strain diagram is without numerical values. By code with fixed temperature Item Temperature can be used to input the value of temperature and stress/strain diagram for this temperature will be same as for all layers of the cross-section. Property Picture of Stress-strain diagram" is active and the graphical interpretation of the stress/strain diagram contains numerical values.
Picture of stress strain diagram
Shows the diagram in graphical form.
Note: The stress-strain diagram for nonlinear analysis (fire resistance) is not defined, because physically (and geometrically) nonlinear calculation for members with prestressed reinforcement is not supported in Scia Engineer.
Results for the check of detailing provisions

Results for the check of detailing provisions can be reviewed in service Concrete. Use function 1D member > Member check > Concrete Fire Resistance Check > RC check detailing provisions. In comparison with standard result functions this one differs in the following. Filter The option Fire duration enables the user to select members with same value of Fire duration. Values amin/acal bminl/bcal Check value for axial distance of reinforcement from the edge of cross-section. Check value for the minimum dimension of the cross-section.
324
Fire resistance
Rcal
Calculated value of fire resistance of section calculated from acal and bcal.
Single check The dialogue for a detailed assessment (called Single check) differs in the following details. Only tab-sheets "Cross-section" and "Loads" is active. There is a new tab-sheet Temperature. This tab-sheet is active only for beam type "Beam" and "beam slab". The following can be displayed: o temperature in each layer of the cross-section , o temperature at the edges of the cross-section, o fire duration, o direction of temperature for type of calculation "from temp.curve".
Load case combinations for fire resistance calculations

With regard to the fire resistance calculations there are certain limitations and assumptions concerning load case combinations. Fire resistance detailing provisions For Type of calculation ="Input by user" and "Automatic" all types of load cases/combinations/ classes can be used. For Type of calculation ="from temp. curves" an accidental combination must be created: EN-ULS Accidental Psi1, EN-ULS Accidental Psi2. Simplified method This type of calculation is supported only for accidental combinations: EN-ULS Accidental Psi1, EN-ULS Accidental Psi2.
325
Proiectare structuri de beton Remarks For detailing provisions (Type of calculation ="from temp. curves") and for simplified calculation (check response and check capacity) only accidental combinations (EN-ULS Accidental Psi1 and EN-ULS Accidental Psi2 can be used, Temperature curves can be defined only in a load case with action type = "accidental". A load case with action type = "accidental" in an accidental combinations is in all linear combinations that will be generated from these accidental combinations. Only one load case with action type = "accidental" can be in one accidental combination. If an accidental combination without load case with action type = "accidental" appears in checks of fire resistance, the Document will contain an error message. Advanced calculation Only nonlinear combinations are supported. There is a combo box Fire type in the dialog for the definition of a nonlinear combination: o prefire, o during fire, o post fire. For this calculation new types of nonlinear combinations have to be generated o Prefire, o During fire , o Post fire. These nonlinear combinations are available only if functionalities Fire resistance (of concrete) and Physical non-linearity for reinforced concrete are turned on in the Project data dialogue. If type of combination = "prefire" and a nonlinear combination contains a load case of type "Temperature distribution curves", then such a load case is ignored in the calculation. If type of combination = "post fire" and a nonlinear combination contains a load case of type "Temperature distribution curves" , then such a load case is ignored in the calculation. If type of combination = "during fire" and a nonlinear combination does not contain a load case of type "Temperature distribution curves", then a warning is issued that: "The nonlinear combination does not contain load case of type "Temperature distribution curves"". If type of combination = "during fire" and a nonlinear combination contains more than one load case of type "Temperature distribution curves" , then a warning is issued that: "The nonlinear combination contains several load cases of type "Temperature distribution curves"".
Results for advanced method

Results for advanced calculation can be evaluated in services Results and functions PNL stress/strain and PNL stiffness. In comparison with standard result functions this one differs in the following. Filter The option Fire duration enables the user to select members with same value of Fire duration. Combination There is a combo box for filtering nonlinear combination according type of calculation: pre-, during-, and post-fire. Values for PNL stress/strain eps cc eps ct compressive strain in concrete, meaningful only for beams made of concrete tensile strain in concrete, meaningful only for beams made of concrete
326
Fire resistance
eps rt eps rc
tensile strain in reinforcement, meaningful only for beams made of reinforced concrete compressive strain in reinforcement, meaningful only for beams made of reinforced concrete compressive stress in concrete, meaningful only for beams made of concrete tensile stress in concrete, meaningful only for beams made of concrete tensile stress in reinforcement, meaningful only for beams made of reinforced concrete compressive stress in reinforcement, meaningful only for beams made of reinforced concrete
sigma cc sigma ct sigma rt sigma rc
PNL stiffness EAx EIy Non-linear axial stiffness. Non-linear flexural stiffness, i.e. the connection presented in the last iteration step. EIz Non-linear flexural stiffness, i.e. the connection presented in the last iteration step. xr As Height of compression zone, or the position of neutral axis. Total reinforcement area in a given section that is considered in the calculation of nonlinear stiffness. This area is multiplied by the coefficient for reinforcement from the Solver setup.
Results for simplified method

Results for the simplified method of calculation can be reviewed in service Concrete. There are four different functions available under 1D member > Member check > Concrete Fire Resistance Check: RC check response RC check capacity Checks the limit strain in reinforced concrete. Checks the limit internal forces the crosssection made of reinforced concrete can transfer. Checks the limit strain in prestressed concrete. Checks the limit internal forces the crosssection made of prestressed concrete can transfer.
PC check response PC check capacity
Note: RC = Reinforced Concrete, PC = Prestressed Concrete 327
In comparison with standard result functions this one differs in the following. Filter The option Fire duration enables the user to select members with same value of Fire duration. Combination Only accidental combination will be supported: EN-ULS Accidental Psi1 and EN-ULS Accidental Psi2. Values The values depend on the function. RC check response Check value eps cc - concrete strain eps sc - reinforcement steel strain compression eps st - reinforcement steel strain tension Vzu - ultimate shear force Check value Nu - ultimate axial force Myu - ultimate bending moment My Mzu - ultimate bending moment Mz Vzu - ultimate shear force Check value eps cc - concrete strain eps sc - reinforcement steel strain compression eps st - reinforcement steel strain tension eps tt tendon strain tension Check value Nu - ultimate axial force Myu - ultimate bending moment My Mzu - ultimate bending moment Mz
RC check capacity
PC check response
PC check capacity
Single check The dialogue for a detailed assessment (called Single check) differs in the following details. The tab-sheet Cross-section shows the reduced height of the cross-section. There is a new tab-sheet Temperature. The following can be displayed: o temperature in each layer of the cross-section , o temperature at the edges of the cross-section, o fire duration, o direction of temperature.
Quantities, parameters and warnings related to fire resistance

The following quantities may occur in the Document when the user prepares an output for the fire resistance calculation. a min/a cal b min/b cal R Check value for axis distance reinforcement from edge of cross-section Check value for minimum dimension of cross-section Input value for fire resistance ( fire duration )
328
Fire resistance
R cal a cal a min b cal b min R cal,a R cal,b mu phi As,req/As,prov Theta cr R Theta M fck,Theta fckt,Theta epsilon c1,Theta epsilon cu1,Theta Ecm, Theta alpha t Theta fsy, Theta fsp, Theta epsilon sp,Theta epsilon sy,Theta epsilon st,Theta epsilon su,Theta Es, Theta beta fpy, Theta fpp, Theta epsilon pp,Theta epsilon py,Theta epsilon pt,Theta epsilon pu,Theta Ep, Theta ay
Calculated value of fire resistance for section calculated from acal and bcal Calculated value of axis distance reinforcement from edge of cross-section Tabulated value of minimum axis distance reinforcement from edge of cross-section Calculated value of minimum dimension of crosssection Tabulated value of minimum dimension of crosssection Calculated value of fire resistance calculated from acal Calculated value of fire resistance calculated from acal Reduction factor for column Ratio of design reinforcement and real reinforcement The maximum critical temperature on edge of section Input value of fire resistance (fire duration) The temperature in centroid of cross-section Characteristic compressive cylinder strength for temperature Theta M Characteristic tensile strength for temperature Theta M Strain at reaching maximum strength for temperature Theta M Ultimate strain for temperature Theta M Secant modulus of elasticity for temperature Theta M Thermal expansion for temperature Theta M The temperature in non-prestressed bars Characteristic yield strength for temperature Theta Maximum characteristic strength linear branch for temperature Theta Strain at reaching strength fsp,Theta for temperature Theta Strain at reaching maximum strength for temperature Theta Maximum strain at top horizontal branch for temperature Theta Ultimate strain for temperature Theta Modulus of elasticity for temperature Theta Reduction factor Characteristic yield strength for temperature Theta Maximum characteristic strength linear branch for temperature Theta Strain at reaching strength fsp,Theta for temperature Theta Strain at reaching maximum strength for temperature Theta Maximum strain at top horizontal branch for temperature Theta Ultimate strain for temperature Theta Modulus of elasticity for temperature Theta The width of damaged zone
329
az h red ey ez
The width of damaged zone Reduced height of cross-section Eccentricity for reduced cross-section Eccentricity for reduced cross-section
The following errors may occur during the calculation of fire resistance. The value of mu_phi is different than 0,7. W204 This warning appears when value mu_phi is not 0,7 and column is only one side loaded The value of mu_phi is out of range which is given in tabulated W205 data This warning appears when value mu_phi <0,2 or mu_phi >0,7,column is more than one side loaded and check box "Calculate standard fire resistance according to 5.3.2.4" is turned off The conditions for check tabulated data for column (Method A) W206 are not fulfilled. This warning appears when conditions according chapter 5.3.2(2) are not fulfilled Note: value e_max is setting in Concrete setup >ULS >Tab-sheet Fire resistance The conditions for calculation standard fire resistance according W207 to 5.3.2.4 are not fulfilled. This warning appears when checkbox "Calculate standard fire resistance according to 5.3.2.4" is turned on and conditions according chapter 5.3.2.4 are not fulfilled This type of cross-section for check of column is not supported W208 This warning appears when type of cross-section is not rectangular or circular section This type of cross-section for check of beams and slabs is not W209 supported This warning appears when type of cross-section is not rectangular or hollow core slabs Inputting value of fire resistance (fire duration) is out of range W210 which is given in tabulated data This warning appears when inputting value of fire resistance is: for slabs, columns and beams: R<30min or R >240min for hollow core slabs: R<15 min or R >180min Minimum axis distance for beams and slabs is not reduced, W211 because critical temperature is out of range (350C<Thetacr<700C) This warning appears when critical temperature for bar of reinforcement is out of range 350C<Thetacr<700C and check box "Reduced min. axis distance according to 5.2(7c)" is turned on Minimum cross-sectional dimension for beams is not reduced, W212 because critical temperature is higher than 400C This warning appears when critical temperature in cross-section is higher than 400C Minimum dimension of section and minimum axis distance are W213 satisfied This warning appears when amin/acal <1 and bmin/bcal <1 Minimum dimension of section and minimum axis distance are E805 not satisfied This warning appears when amin/acal >1 and bmin/bcal >1 Minimum axis distance is not satisfied E806 This warning appears when amin/acal >1 and bmin/bcal < 1 Minimum dimension of section is not satisfied E807
330
Fire resistance
This warning appears when amin/acal <1 and bmin/bcal > 1
331

Proiectare Structuri de Beton Rom

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Proiectare Structuri de Beton Rom

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Manual

Proiectare structuri de beton

Proiectare structuri de beton

General parameters Adjusting the parameters for design

Proiectare structuri de beton

Parameters to a particular code

Automatic member reinforcement design

Proiectare structuri de beton

Minimal length of one stirrup part

Minimal number of stirrups in one stirrup part Step for reduction

Symmetrical part of stirrups

Lower Lower cover

Proiectare structuri de beton

(My/Myu)x + (Mz/Mzu)x < 1

Proiectare structuri de beton

Shear force capping at supports

Proiectare structuri de beton

A = Division of strain; B = Vertical division; C = Horizontal division Figure 2 Method of check

Ultimate limit state

Proiectare structuri de beton

Ultimate limit state - Shear

See ENV 1992-1-1 : Art. 4.3.2.3.(1). This is the default setting.

Ultimate limit state - Punching shear

Proiectare structuri de beton

or outside of the column head

Ultimate limit state - Foundation block

Calculation of bending moment

Pyramidal block k1 k2 Correction coefficient. Default value = 2.25. Correction coefficient.

Proiectare structuri de beton

Default value = 1.11. k3 Correction coefficient. Default value = 1.34.

Min. number of bars in circular column

Min bar distance

Max. bar distance

Proiectare structuri de beton

reinforcement percentage at face +Zp

Min tension reinforcement percentage at face -Zp

Serviceability limit state

Serviceability limit state - Crack proof

Proiectare structuri de beton

Design and drawing

Anchorage of longitudinal reinforcement

Warning and errors

Sway in YY direction. Sway in ZZ direction.

Proiectare structuri de beton

Optimize the number of bars in c-s for biaxial calculation

(My/Myu)x + (Mz/Mzu)x < 1

Moment capping at supports

Shear force capping at supports

Proiectare structuri de beton

Ultimate limit state

A = Division of strain; B = Vertical division; C = Horizontal division Figure 2 Method of check

Ultimate limit state - Shear

Principal stress Check design tensile strength only in compression zone

Construction joint Take into account cos_alpha for formula 6.25

Ultimate Limit State - Fire resistance

Proiectare structuri de beton

Simplified calculation method

Ultimate limit state - Punching shear

Proiectare structuri de beton

Serviceability limit state

Serviceability limit state - Creep

Relative humidity Age of loading Age at concrete

Serviceability limit state - Crack proof

Proiectare structuri de beton